2022 RAM 1500 Manual

2022 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM 1500

OWNER’S MANUAL
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. THIRD EDITION
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_DT_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
to install them on products previously manufactured. dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
substitution therefore. is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and transportation.
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4
5 MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 5
6 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 10
11 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 11
2
INTRODUCTION DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . 37

Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
SYMBOLS KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 25 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Power Side Steps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 26 Illuminated Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry . . . . . . 26 Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If Equipped . 27 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . . . 11 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SYMBOL GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Trailer Tow — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . 28 Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . 41
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . 29 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 29 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . 41
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . 29 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory . 30 (HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) . . . . . 21 Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 42
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels . . . . . . 42
To Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Non-Rolling Code Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) . . . . . . . . . 32 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . 22 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . 32 Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation — Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 34 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers . . . . . . . . . . 34 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 43
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) . . . . . . 23 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . 44
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF EQUIPPED . . 36
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 24 Introducing Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 36
To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 24 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) . . . . . . . . . 46
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 65 TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . 81
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped . . . . . . 66 Tonneau Cover Components . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Folding For Driving Or
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 47 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 47 Automatic Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation . . . . . . . 85
Automatic Headlights With Wipers . . . . . . . . 47 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . 87
Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . . 68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . 68 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 48 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . 68 GASOLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights/Trailer Hitch Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . 68 Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 48 Dual Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . 69 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE . . 90
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 To Open The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 To Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . 51 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 52 Locking Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Multifunction Tailgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . 72 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL . . . . 94
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And Tailgate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Bed Step — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Manual Climate Control Descriptions PICKUP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . 95
And Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Bed Rail Tie-Down System — If Equipped . . . . 77 Instrument Cluster Display Location
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Locking And Unlocking RamBox . . . . . . . . . 78 Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Climate Voice Recognition — If Equipped . . . . 57 RamBox Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Display Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 RamBox Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Head Up Display (HUD) — If Equipped . . . . . 101
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . 58 Bed Divider — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages . . . 102
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
USB/AUX Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . 119 AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . 139
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Cold Weather Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF EQUIPPED . . . 139
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Engine Idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — Stopping The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Electric Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . 121 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES ONLY —
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . 105 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Red Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 GASOLINE ENGINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . 140
Yellow Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — Autostop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Yellow Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Green Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
White Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . 141
Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . . 141
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . 113 Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . 142
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 (BTSI) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 142
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 8-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 125 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED . 130 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . 144
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
STARTING AND OPERATING Case — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Case — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Tip Start Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR SUSPENSION ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition . . . . . . . . 116 SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
STOP Button — Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . 116 Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . 154
AutoPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . 135 Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . 154
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . 154
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/ ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR SUSPENSION PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
STOP Button — Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . 118 SYSTEM (OFF-ROAD GROUP) — IF EQUIPPED . . . 136 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cold Weather Operation Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . 138 Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Starting Fluids — Diesel Engine Only . . . . . . 119 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Assistance Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
5
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 MULTIMEDIA

LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 172
UCONNECT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . 159 Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . 159 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Trailer Towing Weights UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . 174 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . 189
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . . . . . . 161
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 UCONNECT INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
Trailer Reverse Steering Control . . . . . . . . 175 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Safety And General Information . . . . . . . . . 207
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 UCONNECT MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
SNOWPLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Steering Wheel Audio Controls — If Equipped . 208
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . 165
Trailer Surround View Camera System — Before Plowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability . . 182 Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
AUX Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE . . 167 Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF EQUIPPED . 223
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Is My Vehicle Connected? . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE . . . . 168
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Introduction To Connected Vehicle Services . . 223
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel . . . . . . . . . 169
RECREATIONAL TOWING Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . 169
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 183 Using SiriusXM Guardian™ . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage . . . . . . . . . . 169
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account . . . 234
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Connected Services SOS FAQs — If Equipped . 234
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 171
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Connected Services Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 171
Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . 185 Connected Services Roadside Assistance
Tire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Rim Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs . . . . 235
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance
FAQs — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . 303
FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . 267 Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Connected Services Account FAQs — Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 305
Data Collection & Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . 238 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . 238 Connected Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . 305
PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . 238 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE ENGINE . . 306
G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Dynamometer (Dyno)/Engine . . . . . . . . . . 240 Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE . . . . 308
Vehicle Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Maintenance Plan — Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . 309
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . 240 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Off-Road Pages Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . 241 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3.6L Engine With Stop/Start . . . . . . . . . . 312
Vehicle Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . 289 5.7L Engine Without Stop/Start . . . . . . . . 313
Accessory Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . 289 5.7L Engine With Stop/Start . . . . . . . . . . 314
Pitch & Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . 292 3.0L Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Forward Facing Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Removal Of Jack And Tools . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
SAFETY Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Pressure Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . 245 To Stow The Flat Or Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System . . . . 245 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools . . . . . . . . . 298 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . 250 Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation — Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement —
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 257 Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . 262 Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel —
MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . 262 Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . 262
7
Intervention Regeneration Strategy — BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Message Process Flow (Diesel Engine) . . . . 322 Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . 360
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . 360
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 322 Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . 374
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . 324 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . 374
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Plastic And Coated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Leather Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 374
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . 374
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
(Diesel Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands . . . . . . . . 374
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) . . . . . . 364 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . 364
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE . . . . 365 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 In The 50 United States And
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . 365 Ordering and Accessing Owner’s Information . . . 376
Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . 366
Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . 366
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
Snow Traction Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
(MMT) In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . 358
Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . 367
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Diesel Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 367
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . 371
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . 373
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road
use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on
different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or a collision page 185.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of
the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 9
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special 1
WARNING! These statements are against operating equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. US resi-
procedures that could result in a colli- dents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the
sion, bodily injury and/or death. “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty Information. Such equipment includes
video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty cover-
CAUTION! These statements are against proce- age and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
dures that could result in damage to your
vehicle.
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installa- CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United States Gov-
lowed, may result in damage.
ernment, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on tion, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of accommodating slide-in
easier use of the product or functionality. campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall provide... at the time of original
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW Follow this reference for additional infor- purchase to the first person who purchases the truck”... information on Truck Camper
mation on a particular feature. Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment that con-
tains your Vehicle Identification Number, truck model, cargo weight rating, and the
forward/rearward limit of a camper. To obtain additional dimensional and technical
specifications for your vehicle, please visit https://www.ramtrucks.com.
FOOTNOTE Supplementary and relevant information Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits of the
pertaining to the topic. zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be located, to pro-
vide satisfactory vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
NOTE:
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
10 INTRODUCTION
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck con- Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your
sists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and rear
camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the wheels separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed
weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not
load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). If weight ratings are exceeded, move
within the truck’s recommended CG zone when installed. or remove items to get the total weight below the ratings.
INTRODUCTION 11
NOTE: Red Warning Lights

These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the driver’s
side B-pillar. See page 171 for more information. 1
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper manufacturer Battery Charge Warning Light
or an authorized dealer. page 106
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
Brake Warning Light
page 105
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Door Open Warning Light
page 106
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper- Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
ating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol page 105. page 106
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 106
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

page 105 page 107
12 INTRODUCTION
Red Warning Lights Red Warning Lights
Hood Open Warning Light Transmission Temperature Warning Light

page 107 page 107
Oil Pressure Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light

page 107 page 108
Oil Temperature Warning Light Yellow Warning Lights

page 107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
page 108
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 107
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
page 108
Tailgate Open Warning Light
page 107
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 108
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
page 107
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
page 109
INTRODUCTION 13
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

1
Electric Park Brake Warning Light Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
page 108 page 109
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
page 108 page 109
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 108 page 109
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) Service 4WD Warning Light
page 109 page 109
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light Service LaneSense Warning Light

page 109 page 108
Low Fuel Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 109 page 110
14 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light
page 111 page 111
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light Cargo Light Active Indicator Light
page 110 page 111
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light Entry/Exit Indicator Light

page 111 page 111
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator Light Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
page 110 page 111
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light
page 110 page 111
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light NEUTRAL Indicator Light
page 111 page 111
INTRODUCTION 15
Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

1
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light Wait To Start Light Indicator Light
page 111 page 112
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light Water In Fuel Indicator Light

page 111 page 112
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light Green Indicator Lights

page 111
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
page 112
4WD Indicator Light
page 111
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
page 112
4WD Low Indicator Light
page 111
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
page 113
4WD High Indicator Light
page 112
ECO Mode Indicator Light
page 112
16 INTRODUCTION
Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
page 112 page 113
LaneSense Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready Indicator

page 112 page 113
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Cruise Control SET Indicator Light

page 112 page 113
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
page 113 page 113
Turn Signal Indicator Lights LaneSense Indicator Light

page 112 page 113
4WD AUTO Indicator Light Blue Indicator Lights

page 113
High Beam Indicator Light
page 113
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
KEYS A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the 2
KEY FOB LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no lon-
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports ger illuminates from key fob button pushes, then the
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless key fob battery requires replacement page 207.
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), remote air suspension low-
ering (if equipped), and Remote Start (if equipped). The
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
key fob allows you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
and the RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice within five seconds
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the (if equipped). To lock all the doors and the tailgate,
vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also con- push the lock button once.
tains an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
the key fob. and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
NOTE: and the horn will chirp.
Key Fob
• The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or 1 — LED Indicator Light push of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the lock
other electronic device. This may result in poor 2 — Unlock button is pushed can be programmed on/off within
performance. 3 — Tailgate Lowering (If Equipped) Uconnect Settings page 188.
4 — Air Suspension Remote Lowering (If Equipped)
• If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging 5 — Lock Key Left Vehicle Feature
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
6 — Remote Start (If Equipped) If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad page 66. 7 — Panic while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
• With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle 8 — Emergency Key START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
disabled. In case the ignition switch does not change with the along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
by referring to the instrument cluster display, which will
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
display directions to follow.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Canceling Remote Lowering 1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing the emer-
Vehicle lowering can be canceled at anytime. When gency key release button (2) on the side of the key
• The doors have to be open and then closed in order vehicle lowering is canceled, the vehicle will raise to the fob, and pulling the emergency key out with your
for the vehicle to check for the presence of a key other hand.
fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate next defined level and lock out the remote lowering fea-
until all of the doors are closed. ture for five seconds until a new request is made.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air suspen-
• These alerts will not be activated in situations where sion lowering button one time during the lowering pro-
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob cess. When vehicle lowering is canceled, the horn will
inside. chirp two times and the turn signal lamps will flash four
times. Once raising is completed, the horn will chirp one
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of time.
The Vehicle) — If Equipped
NOTE:
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can
be lowered by pushing the key fob air sus- More information on air suspension is provided later in
pension lowering button two times. When air this manual, see page 133.
suspension lowering is requested using the
key fob, the vehicle will send a series of chirps and
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob Emergency Key Removal
flashes to alert the customer that the operation has The replacement battery model is one CR2450 battery.
begun and will continue these alerts until it success- 1 — Emergency Key
fully lowers. NOTE: 2 — Emergency Key Release Button
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to • Customers are recommended to use a battery 2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing down,
lower remotely: obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
and locate the small rectangular gap on the left side
• The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit ride dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
between the housing and the back cover of the key
height. battery dimensions.
fob. Use a small screwdriver (or similar tool) to pry
• The vehicle battery must be fully charged. • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. open the left side of the fob cover while applying
• All doors must be closed. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate pressure until the cover snaps open.
for further information.
• The key fob must be out of the vehicle. 3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key fob,
• Gear selector must be in PARK. • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the which is positioned further to the edge than the left
back housing or the printed circuit board. side gap. Pry open the right side, and remove the
NOTE:
Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets, and • Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the key back cover.
fob above the top row buttons blinks when a button 4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to slide the
people prior to remote lowering.
is pressed. The coin battery should last a minimum battery downward and back toward the key ring.
of three years with normal vehicle usage.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge Programming And Requesting
of the back cover with the top of the fob, and press
the edges into the interlocking hinges until all edges
Additional Key Fobs
snap together with no large visual gaps. Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into place.
NOTE: 2
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified • Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
authorized dealer. vehicle.
• Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
WARNING! electronics can be used to start and operate the
Key Fob Battery Location vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle,
NOTE:
• The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery. it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the new cause severe internal burns in just two hours and WARNING!
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause bat- can lead to death.
tery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
with rubbing alcohol.
• If you think a battery may have been swallowed or lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate unattended.
medical attention.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to push • Always remember to place the Keyless Enter ‘n Go
down and slide the battery under the small lip on • Keep new and used batteries away from children. Ignition™ in the OFF position.
the top edge of the opening. If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
from children. rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
Key Fob Battery Replacement

SENTRY KEY All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- page 207. OFF
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys- • The engine is stopped
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
IGNITION SWITCH • Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available
locked or unlocked.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION ACC
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau- This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition • Engine is not started
thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob • Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and is in the passenger compartment. sunroof, power windows, etc.)
operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a The START/STOP ignition button has several operating ON/RUN
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in posi- • Driving position
tion. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for • All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate con-
trols, heated seats, etc.)
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the elec- START
tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the • The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event NOTE:
that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there If the ignition switch does not change the mode by
is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or
start and shut off after two seconds. depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec- against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as operate the ignition switch.
soon as possible by an authorized dealer. Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
CAUTION! 2 — ACC (Accessory)
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible 3 — ON/RUN
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
NOTE:
CAUTION! Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. reduce this range page 207.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. WARNING!
2
NOTE: • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
• The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Key- oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
less Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; injury or death when inhaled.
Backup Starting Method

these devices may block the key fob’s wireless sig- • Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
nal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
from starting the vehicle. controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! • For more information on normal engine starting, see
page 115.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key HOW TO USE REMOTE START
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. • When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
access to an unlocked vehicle. will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
“Ignition or Accessory ON” will display in the cluster.
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth- the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children 15 minute cycle.
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
(GASOLINE) To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the This system uses the key fob to start the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power win- engine conveniently from outside the vehicle NOTE:
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. while still maintaining security. The system
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked has a range of approximately 328 ft • With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
(100 m). 15 minutes.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death. Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold • Remote Start can only be used twice.
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambi-
ent conditions before the customer enters the vehicle. • If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The parking lights will turn on and remain on during WARNING! REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
Remote Start mode.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
• For security, power window and power sunroof Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. controls could cause serious injury or death. temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or
• The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position less. The time is dependent on the ambient tempera-
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE ture. Once the timer expires, the system will automati-
for a third cycle. cally adjust the settings depending on ambient condi-
To drive the vehicle after a Remote Start, unlock the
All of the following conditions must be met before the doors using the key fob or Passive Entry and disarm the tions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems —
engine will remote start: Vehicle Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
• Gear selector in PARK end of the 15 minute cycle, press the brake pedal and
REMOTE START COMFORT
• Doors closed push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
• Hood closed The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
• Hazard switch off if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The
cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi- heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature
• Battery at an acceptable charge level tion, the climate controls will resume the previously set will turn on if programmed in the comfort menu screen
• Panic button not pushed operations (temperature, blower control, etc.). within Uconnect Settings page 188. In warm
• Fuel meets minimum requirement NOTE: weather, the driver vented seat feature will automati-
• System not disabled from previous Remote Start cally turn on when the Remote Start is activated and is
event • To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will programmed in the comfort menu screen. The vehicle
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid will adjust the climate control settings depending on
• Vehicle Security system not active Remote Start request. the outside ambient temperature.
• Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start The climate controls automatically adjust to an optimal
WARNING! Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru- temperature and mode, dependent on the outside
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP ambient temperature. When the ignition is placed in the
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or ignition button. ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume their
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- previous settings.
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
injury or death when inhaled. • In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
(Continued) the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
• In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to • Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on • Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold engine off.
the last settings selected by the driver. To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above, • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level All of the following conditions must be met before the
mode, with Recirculation on. The message will stay active until the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
engine will remote start: 2
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control • Gear selector in PARK
settings, see page 52.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) • Doors closed
NOTE: • Hood closed
These features will stay on through the duration of This system uses the key fob to start the • Hazard switch off
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will while still maintaining security. The system
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually has a range of approximately 328 ft • Battery at an acceptable charge level
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote (100 m). • Panic button not pushed
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
NOTE:
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
off using the OFF button.
• System not disabled from previous remote start
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob event
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD may reduce this range. • Vehicle Security system not active
WIPER DE–ICER ACTIVATION — • The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait To • Water In Fuel indicator light is not illuminated
IF EQUIPPED Start indicator light to extinguish before cranking • Wait To Start indicator light is not illuminated
the engine. This allows time for the engine preheat
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
cycle to heat the cylinder air, and is normal in cold
• Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield For additional functions of the Remote Start system,
weather. For further information on the Wait To Start
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will see page 22.
indicator light and the preheat cycle, see
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
page 112.
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue. WARNING!
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE Push and release the Remote Start button on the key • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
The following messages will display in the instrument oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start, or Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
exits Remote Start prematurely: injury or death when inhaled.
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open 15 minute cycle. (Continued)
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
WARNING!
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte-
vehicle: rior power door lock switches will not unlock the
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the ○ Push the lock button on the interior power door doors.
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other lock switch with the driver and/or passenger The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
controls could cause serious injury or death. door open. vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
○ Push the lock button on the exterior Passive system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — in the same exterior zone page 26.
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
○ Push the lock button on the key fob. and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
IF EQUIPPED 3. If any doors are open, close them. disarm the Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors, If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security sys- The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
tem is armed, interior switches for door locks and tail- of the following methods: exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
gate release are disabled. If something triggers the occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the fol-
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
lowing audible and visible signals: • Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
door page 26.
• The horn will pulse. • Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
• The turn signals will flash. the system.
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
• The Vehicle Security Light, located in the upper right NOTE: between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
corner of the instrument cluster display, will flash.
remains active) and then rearm itself.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM • The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cyl- SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system: inder when the system is armed will sound the
alarm when the door is opened. OVERRIDE
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
position. • The Vehicle Security system remains armed when doors using the manual door lock.
the power tailgate (if equipped) is opened using the
○ For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make tailgate button on the key fob.
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
• If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the
tailgate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed
and the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked
unless all doors are set to unlock on first press
within Uconnect Settings.
DOORS POWER DOOR LOCKS —

IF EQUIPPED
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS The power door lock switches are located on each front
The power door locks can be manually locked from door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock 2
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key
fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. Rear Door Lock Knob
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle WARNING!
Security system. • For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as Power Door Lock Switches
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the key fob
keyless ignition is in the OFF position, remove the is detected inside the vehicle when the door lock button
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. on the front door panel is used to lock the door. This will
occur for two attempts. Upon the third attempt, the
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
doors will lock even if the key fob is inside.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num- NOTE:
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
or other electronic device, the wireless signal may get
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
selector.
automatically.
Front Door Lock Knob • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
in a location accessible to children, and do not
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC
will not lock.
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED • Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach NOTE:
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier entry whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or • Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
and exit of the vehicle. 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
When configured for Auto mode, the Power Side Steps flashes of the turn signal lamps. depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
will deploy when any of the doors are opened, or when system page 188.
the deploy setting is activated through the touchscreen. • If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/snowing
When configured for Store mode, the steps will not
on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensi- • All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
tivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
deploy unless the setting is selected manually through unlock preference setting.
time.
the Controls menu within the touchscreen. Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if the • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no (FOBIK-Safe)
retract setting is selected within Uconnect Settings door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and (if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
page 188, the steps will retract.
system. Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the
PASSIVE ENTRY With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of OFF position.
the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door
— Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and handle will unlock all doors and the tailgate • A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the automatically. fob while a door is open.
key fob lock or unlock buttons. • A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
NOTE:
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch
• Passive Entry may be programmed on or off within while the door is open.
Uconnect Settings page 188. • When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm or
• The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Pas- armed status and the tailgate transitions from open
sive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile to closed.
phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these • When the tailgate transitions from open to closed
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and and remote start is active.
prevent the Passive Entry system from locking/ When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
unlocking the vehicle. are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON

The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Pas-
sive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The EXIT — IF EQUIPPED
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow- The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
ing conditions are true: power door locks after the following sequence of
actions: 2
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs. 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within the Uconnect system.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using
the door panel switch and then the doors are 2. All doors are closed.
closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
PARK.
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
4. Any door is opened.
handle.
NOTE:
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within • After pushing the door handle button, you must wait IF EQUIPPED
5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, pushing the two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle. doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
by pulling the door handle without the vehicle when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
unlocking. The auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled in the
Uconnect Settings page 188.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect Set-
tings, the key protection described in "Frequency
Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
remains active/functional. SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key To provide a safer environment for small children riding
fob battery is depleted. in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
○ The LED light on the key fob will not blink if the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
key fob battery is low or fully depleted, but a low
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
key fob battery condition will still support the
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the lock or
Passive Entry system functionality. When the key
unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged,
fob battery is low, the instrument cluster will
NOTE: that door can only be opened by using the outside door
display a message indicating that the key fob
handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door battery is low page 207.
position.
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child Protec-
tion Door Locks are engaged.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system on both
rear doors, check for effective engagement by trying to
Child Lock Control open a door with the internal handle. Once the Child- Tilt/Telescoping Lever
Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is impos-
NOTE: sible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Before To unlock the steering column, push the control down-
getting out of the vehicle, be sure to check that there is ward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
• When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is no one left inside. move the steering wheel upward or downward as
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
outside door handle even though the inside door pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
lock is in the unlocked position. STEERING WHEEL desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock the control upward until fully engaged.
system, always test the door from the inside to TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
make certain it is in the unlocked position. WARNING!
COLUMN
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys- This feature allows you to tilt the steering column Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
certain it is in the locked position.
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up is located on the steering column, below the multifunc- driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
on the door lock knob (unlocked position), roll down tion lever. this warning may result in serious injury or death.
the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — WARNING!

IF EQUIPPED • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
The steering wheel contains a heating ele- insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold ing wheel covers of any type or material. This may
weather. The heated steering wheel has only cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. 2
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may
not turn on when it is already warm. DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —
The heated steering wheel button is located on the cen-
ter of the instrument panel below the radio screen, and
IF EQUIPPED
within the Climate or Controls screen of the This feature allows the driver to save up to two different Memory Settings Switch
touchscreen. memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn switch. Each memory profile saves desired position set- PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY
the heating element on. tings for the following features: FEATURE
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second • Driver’s seat To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
time to turn the heating element off.
• Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
NOTE: • Adjustable pedals (if equipped) NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering • Side mirrors Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected
wheel to operate. profile from memory.
NOTE:
For information on use with the Remote Start system, 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be (do not start the engine).
see page 22.
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The driver memory settings switch is located on the 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
WARNING! driver door, next to the door handle, and consists of ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable
three buttons: pedals (if equipped), and radio station presets).
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe- • The set (S) button, which is used to activate the 3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, memory save function.
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will dis-
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer- • The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall play which memory position has been set.
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It either of two saved memory profiles.
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
NOTE:
cially if used for long periods.
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
(Continued) but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY MEMORY POSITION RECALL MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
FOB TO MEMORY NOTE: (FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, WARNING!
saved memory profiles. a message will display in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE: To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
Before programming your key fob you must select the cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not
unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
memory position.
the Uconnect system page 188. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
To program your key fob, perform the following: • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is can-
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. celed, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
second will occur before another recall can be selected. chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2. belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
release the set (S) button on the memory switch. SEATS
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
the vehicle.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob WARNING! The manual seat adjustment handle is located under
within 10 seconds. the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
NOTE: outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory set- these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
tings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing or killed.
the unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide

the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
2
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat Manual Recline Lever Center Portion Of Front Bench Seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt. WARNING!
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actu-
ating the handle. The seatback may swing forward
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment and hit you causing injury.
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback
and actuate the handle, then position the seat-
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the back in the desired position.
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright posi-
tion, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position. Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard
seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the Center Portion Folded Forward
seat. If equipped, the back of the center portion (20%)
easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT WARNING!

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or
(REAR SEATS) Rearward
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
WARNING! In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of desired position has been reached.
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. POWER ADJUSTMENT
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down by
(FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight-way power direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
The recliner handle is located on the front of the rear driver and passenger seats. The power seat switches desired position has been reached.
outboard seat cushions. To adjust the seatback, lift are located on the outboard side of the driver and pas-
upward on the handle, and slide the seat bottom for- senger seat cushions. There are two power seat Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
ward. The lower portion of the seatback will tilt rear- switches that are used to control the movement of the The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
ward. When you reach the desired position, release the seat cushion and the seatback. down using the power seat switch. The front of the seat
handle. cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Reclining The Seatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
Power Seat Switches • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle Locations Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
1 — Power Seat Switch control which could cause a collision and serious
NOTE: 2 — Power Seatback Switch injury or death.
This feature is not available if vehicle is equipped with (Continued)
rear bench seat.
WARNING! • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when

the driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat (2.27 cm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
seat belt. When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and 2
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your profile page 29.
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death. NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
through the programmable features in the Uconnect
Power Lumbar Switch system page 188.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to This feature provides automatic driver’s seat position-
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if ing to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting WARNING!
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s the vehicle.
path.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you place tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
Power Lumbar — If Equipped the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats • When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
position, the driver’s seat will move about burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
may also be equipped with a 2-way or a 4-way power
2.4 inches (6 cm) rearward if the driver’s seat posi- for long periods of time.
lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar switch is located
tion is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (6.77 cm)
on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
previously set position when you place the ignition ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
into the ACC or ON/RUN position. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
If equipped with a 4-way adjustment, pushing upward
or downward on the switch will raise and lower the posi- • When you remove the key fob from the ignition, the cause serious burns due to the increased surface
tion of the support. driver’s seat will move to a position 0.3 inches temperature of the seat.
(0.77 cm) forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat
position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7 inches
(2.27 cm and 6.77 cm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when
you place the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings. NOTE:
Indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
The heated seat control buttons are located
in use. operate.
on the center stack below the radio screen,
or within the Uconnect system. • Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI For information on use with the Remote Start system,
setting on. see page 22.
• Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI • Push the heated seat button a second time to turn
setting on. the MED setting on. Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
• Push the heated seat button a second time to turn • Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the If equipped, the two outboard rear seats will
the MED setting on. LO setting on. have ventilated seats. The rear ventilated
• Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn seat control switches are located on the rear
• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the
the heating elements off. of the center console.
LO setting on.
The fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED, and LO.
• Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn NOTE: Push the ventilated seat buttons to toggle through the
the heating elements off. The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator speeds, or to turn the feature off.
NOTE: changes it.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
within two to five minutes. operate.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to Front Ventilated Seats
operate. The ventilated seat control buttons are
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINERS
located on the center stack below the radio Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
• The level of heat selected will stay on until the screen, or within the Uconnect system. The handles are attached to the underside of the rear seat
operator changes it.
fans operate at three speeds, HI, MED and cushion. To access these hooks, lift the rear seat cush-
For information on use with the Remote Start system, LO. ion upward.
see page 22.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI. HEAD RESTRAINTS
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped • Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose MED. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
On some models, the two rear outboard by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
seats may be equipped with heated seats. • Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
There are two heated seat switches that choose LO.
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
allow the rear passengers to operate the • Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to
your ear.
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each turn the ventilation off.
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the 2
event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location Forward Adjustment
NOTE: To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, the
the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull center head restraint is not adjustable or removable.
additional clearance to the back of your head. the top of the head restraint to the forward most posi-
tion and release. The head restraint will return to the
Front Head Restraints rear most position. WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver and • All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
passenger head restraints. ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
event of a crash.
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint. • Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
NOTE: restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
The head restraints should only be removed by quali- cause serious injury or death in the event of a
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of collision.
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
Upright Position
Rear Head Restraints NOTE: If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
The head restraints should only be removed by quali- menu of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
The outboard head restraints are non-adjustable, but
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If any of the Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect
can be folded down for improved rearward visibility.
head restraints require removal, see an authorized 5 with 8.4-inch display system.
Push the button on the outboard side of the head
restraint to release. To return the head restraint to its dealer.
upright position, push up on the head restraint until it For child restraint tethering, see page 262. BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
locks back into place. The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — Push the VR button or for the Uconnect 5/5 NAV,
IF EQUIPPED say the vehicle’s Wake Up word, “Hey Uconnect”. After
the beep, say:
INTRODUCING VOICE • “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session.

• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
RECOGNITION • “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help- Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and Recognition system’s status.
tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system. This system is only available NOTE:
on the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Uconnect 5 NAV On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake Up
Release Button word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be repro-
With 8.4-inch Display, and the Uconnect 5 NAV With
12-inch Display. grammed through the Uconnect Settings.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head
restraints are in their upright positions when the seat
is to be occupied.
The center head restraint is not adjustable or

removable.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display

GET STARTED • Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or

call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your (French)
Voice Recognition system.
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
• US residents visit
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device www.driveuconnect.com/sirius-xm-guardian or call: 2
and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing 1-844-796-4827
instructions. • Canadian residents visit
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passen- https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en/
ger conversations are examples of noise that may sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while Uconnect Voice Command Buttons DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
facing straight ahead. The microphone is located in
the headliner and aimed at the driver. 1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call IF EQUIPPED
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first 2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice Recognition The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Climate,
the beep, then say your Voice Command. You can Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelera-
also say the vehicle “Wake Up” word and state your Text tor pedals to move toward or away from the driver to pro-
command. Some examples of “Wake Up” words 2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles Not vide improved position with the steering wheel.
include “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”. Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button To
Answer An Incoming Phone Call The adjustable pedal switch is located on the instru-
5. You can interrupt the help message or system 3 — Push The Hang-up Button To End A Call ment panel, below the headlight switch.
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and
saying a Voice Command from the current category.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2023 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Adjustable Pedals Switch

The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in NOTE:

REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system or Adap- MIRRORS The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
tive Cruise Control system is on. If there is an attempt the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear
to adjust the pedals when the system is locked out, the INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR view.
following messages will appear (on vehicles equipped
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
with an instrument cluster): Manual Mirror — If Equipped through the touchscreen.
• Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
• Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
NOTE:
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to
full movement of the pedal. the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find (toward the windshield). Automatic Dimming Mirror
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings CAUTION!
page 29, you can use your key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
return the adjustable pedals to saved positions. spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
WARNING! mirror clean.
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked. The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high definition,
wide and unobstructed view of the road behind while
Adjusting Rearview Mirror driving.
CAUTION! Position the mirror in the regular Automatic Dimming
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
Automatic Dimming Mirror — Mirror mode, then activate the Digital Rearview Mirror
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage If Equipped mode.
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim- The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/off
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the control lever on the bottom of the mirror rearward
adjustable pedal's path. view through the rear window. toward the driver.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR

To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
Digital Rearview Mirror
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button “Slide-On-Rod” Extender
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor
Push the menu button next to the on/off control/toggle Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror is against the windshield for additional sun blockage
to access the following mirror options: through the front of the vehicle.
• Brightness “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor —
• Tilt If Equipped OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through menu The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi- The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
options. tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
the sun.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward the NOTE:
windshield to return the mirror to the regular Automatic 1. Fold down the sun visor. If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps under the
Dimming Mirror. outside mirrors, they can be turned off through the
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
NOTE: Uconnect system page 188.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective during
nighttime driving in low light applications due to low 4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
ambient light levels. In the event that it provides the
user with less than expected vision, the mirror can be
reverted to a normal reflective Automatic Dimming Mir-
ror by pushing the control/toggle forward in the vehicle
and putting the mirror into Automatic Dimming Mirror
mode.
WARNING!
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex door trim panel.
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either Power Mirror Movement
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Driver Memory Settings feature
• Full forward position Power Mirror Controls page 29.
• Full rearward position
• Normal position 1 — Left Mirror Selection POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE
2 — Mirror Direction Control MIRRORS FOR STANDARD AND
CAUTION! 3 — Right Mirror Selection
TRAILER TOW — IF EQUIPPED
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward and
rearward position to resist damage when entering a tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a unfolded into the normal driving position.
car wash or a narrow location. mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING want the mirror to move. the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED the normal driving position.
The driver’s outside mirror and if equipped, the passen- If the mirror is manually folded after a powered cycle, a
ger’s outside mirror, will automatically dim for glare potential extra button push is required to get the mir-
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by rors back to the normal driving position. If the mirror
the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will does not fold automatically, check for ice or dirt buildup
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside at the pivot area, which can cause excessive drag.
mirror adjusts.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —

IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out- 2
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or
out).
Power Folding Mirror Switch Blindspot Mirror

Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
following occurs: This feature will be activated whenever you
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. turn on the rear window defroster
(if equipped) page 52.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power folding
mirror switch). Trailer Towing Position TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. NOTE:
IF EQUIPPED
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving Fold the trailer towing mirrors prior to entering an auto- This feature provides automatic outside mirror position-
speeds. mated car wash. ing which will assist with the driver’s ground visibility.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the main mir- the present position when the vehicle is shifted into
them by pushing the button (this may require multiple ror and can be adjusted manually.
attempts). This resets them to their normal driving REVERSE. The outside mirrors will then return to the
position. original position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, this feature will be linked to the program-
mable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system page 188.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER • The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE
center button.
A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:
CODE DEVICE
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is active page 207. Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
BEFORE YOU BEGIN device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
the Radio Frequency signal, it is recommended that a manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® button located where the antenna is attached to the
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is pro- device. The button may not be immediately visible when
grammed to activate the device you are trying to pro- looking at the device. The name and color of the button
gram your HomeLink® button to. may vary slightly by manufacturer.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
HomeLink® Buttons before you begin programming. NOTE:
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
Use this QR code to access your digital your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time. normally use to operate the device.
experience. Non-rolling Code Devices
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
• HomeLink® replaces up to three CHANNELS rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
hand-held transmitters that operate Scan me or “TRAIN” button.
devices such as garage door open- To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
ers, motorized gates, lighting, or
home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is pow-
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
ered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery. 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons GARAGE DOOR OPENER
• The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
overhead console or sunvisor designate the three HomeLink® indicator light flashes. your garage door opener motor, refer to the following
different HomeLink® channels. steps:
NOTE:
• To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
Erasing all channels should only be performed when NOTE:
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro-
will activate the devices they are programmed to
erase channels when programming additional buttons. cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
with each press of the corresponding HomeLink®
button. programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position. 3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con- PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
the garage door opener motor does not operate, MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure. The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a mis-
ton you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view. Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps cellaneous device follows the same procedure as pro-
gramming to a garage door opener page 42. Be 2
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to 1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
program while you push and hold the garage door and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
non-rolling code before beginning the programming
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate. HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
process.
gramming is complete.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con- NOTE:
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
happens, release both buttons. the garage door opener motor does not operate, ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
repeat the steps from the beginning. transmission, which may not be long enough for
NOTE: HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
WARNING! are designed to time-out in the same manner. The pro-
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps. • Your motorized door or gate will open and close cedure may need to be performed multiple times to
while you are programming the universal transmit- successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people or buttons.
NOTE: pets are in the path of the door or gate.
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code • Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con- REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1. fined area while programming the transmitter. HOMELINK® BUTTON
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usu- previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is refer to the following procedure. Be sure to determine
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly whether the new device you want to program the
killed.
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. HomeLink® button to has a rolling code, or non-rolling
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed code.
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
for two seconds each time). If the garage door starting the engine.
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Opener” page 42, and follow all remaining transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has Do not release the button.
steps. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR fully trained.
follow all remaining steps.
PROGRAMMING 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may SECURITY
take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
garage door may open and close while you are
several seconds of transmission: in your vehicle.
programming.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit- To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
transmission, which may not be long enough for and observe the indicator light. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. erased.
NOTE:
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
are designed to time-out in the same manner. ○ If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- the Vehicle Security system is active.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling should activate when the HomeLink® button is
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage pushed. TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
door or gate motor.
○ To program the two remaining HomeLink® but- If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. tons, repeat each step for each remaining but- here are some of the most common solutions:
ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
NOTE: • Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for held transmitter.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, programming, plug it back in at this time.
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure • Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button to complete the training for a rolling code.
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that • Did you unplug the device for programming and
the garage door remains open at all times. To reprogram a channel that has been previously remember to plug it back in?
trained, follow these steps: If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
light in view.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death. 2
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes Headlight Switch Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with- 1 — Rotate Headlight Control 1 — Rotate Headlight Control
out these safety features. 2 — Push Fog Light Switch 2 — Push Fog Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control 3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control 4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch 5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
NOTE:
HEADLIGHT SWITCH Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
(if equipped), instrument panel light dimming, cargo
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
light/trailer spotter lights (if equipped), and fog lights
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
(if equipped).
engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE: MULTIFUNCTION LEVER HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH

For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
steering column. panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
lights position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
parking lights, and instrument panel lights. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
HEADLAMP CONTROL —
CAUTION! IF EQUIPPED
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
Multifunction Lever
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
lenses. ing high beam control through the use of a camera
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) mounted on the inside rearview mirror or a windshield
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever mounted camera. These cameras detect vehicle spe-
NOTE: the engine is running, and the low beams are not on. cific light and automatically switch from high beams to
The lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and the OFF or ACC position, or the parking brake is
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and
engaged. NOTE:
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and NOTE: • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim
be followed. • For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running High Beams” within your Uconnect Settings
page 188, as well as turning the headlight
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses fog lights are turned on. switch to the AUTO position.
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap • If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail-
solution followed by rinsing. was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head-
turned on and off using the Uconnect system lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
page 188. Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the wind-
shield or camera lens will cause the system to func-
• On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may tion improperly.
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that • If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz- Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be
ard warning lights are activated). re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See a local
authorized dealer.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam Sensitiv- PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL NOTE:
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High Beam When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle the LIGHTS instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the
high beam lever six full on/off cycles within 10 sec- To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lower nighttime intensity.
onds of placing the ignition in the ON position. The lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off
system will return to the default setting upon placing the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to HEADLIGHT DELAY 2
the ignition in the OFF position. the O (off) position. To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
FLASH-TO-PASS NOTE: feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 sec-
onds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
in the OFF position while the headlight switch is on, and
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
can be canceled by either turning the headlight switch
remain on, until the lever is released. light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON position.
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The NOTE:
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
IF EQUIPPED engaged. • This feature can be programmed through the
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Uconnect system page 188.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH • The headlight delay feature is automatically acti-
rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position. WIPERS vated if the headlight switch is left in the AUTO posi-
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is tion when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to also has this customer-programmable feature. When
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the engine is running, they will automatically turn on when If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
headlight switch out of the AUTO position. the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
NOTE: through the Uconnect system page 188. vehicle will chime when the driver’s door is opened.
The engine must be running before the headlights will If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing Wiper
turn on in the Automatic Mode. system page 52, and it is activated, the headlights FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
wipe cycles within approximately one minute. They will or low beam headlights and push the fog light switch
turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers located within the headlight switch. Pushing the fog
completely stop. light switch a second time will turn the front fog lights
off.
when the headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) posi-

tion, or the high beam is selected.
If the fog lights are off, one of the fog lights will illumi-
nate depending on the direction in which the vehicle is
turning. This will provide increased visibility while turn-
ing, depending on the angle of the steering wheel.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
Fog Light Button NOTE: Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER

LIGHTS/TRAILER HITCH LIGHT
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch (Vehicles
WITH BED LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED Sold In Canada)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights The cargo light, bed lights, trailer spotter lights, and
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. trailer hitch light are turned on by pushing the cargo
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will light button located on the lower half of the headlight
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will switch.
turn off when the button is pushed a second time,
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn on NOTE:
for approximately 30 seconds when a key fob unlock Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry The headlights will automatically turn off after eight
feature. minutes while the ignition is in the OFF position.
When these lights are activated using the button on the
headlight switch the cargo lights, trailer spotter lights, 2
and trailer hitch light will remain illuminated when the INTERIOR LIGHTS
vehicle transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE.
The lights will turn off when the vehicle transmission is
placed in DRIVE.
COURTESY LIGHTS
When the vehicle is placed in the REVERSE position, Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the doors
the trailer hitch light will turn on automatically. The are opened or the Dome ON button is pushed on the
Cargo Lights trailer hitch light will turn off when the vehicle is placed overhead console. If your vehicle is equipped with
in the DRIVE position. Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can also be on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn
turned on using the switch located just inside the NOTE: on. When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
pickup box, on the lower part of the bed light lens. A The bed lights are not affected by gear selection. and the Dome Defeat button on the overhead console
telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster display is pressed, the interior lights will turn off.
when these lights are on. Pushing the switch a second NOTE:
time will turn the lights off. For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of Front Map/Reading Lights
California or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and mirror The overhead console lights can also be operated indi-
spotter lights will not work while the vehicle is in vidually as reading lights by pushing the corresponding
motion. In every other state, the cargo and mirror spot- buttons.
ter lights will turn off when the vehicle is in motion, but
the bed light will remain on.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any door is
left open or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the topmost position, the interior lights will automati-
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox) cally turn off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to the
headlight switch located on the left side of the instru-
ment panel.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons 1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button

2 — Dome Defeat Button 2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Dome ON Button 3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button Dimmer Controls
4 — Dome On Button 1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are avail-
able for your vehicle.
• Push button on/off
• Push lens on/off
• Push round puck lens on/off (if equipped with Dual
Pane Sunroof)
NOTE:
The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the
switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before exiting the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the ILLUMINATED ENTRY
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key
the ambient dimmer control will adjust the interior and fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
ambient light levels when the headlights are on. This feature also turns on the approach lamps located
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control downward beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).
2
to the O (off) position, and the interior lights will remain The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 sec-
off when the doors are open. onds, or they will immediately fade to off once the igni-
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer control all the tion switch is placed in the ON/RUN position from the
way upward, past the detent, will turn on the interior OFF position.
lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dim- The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
mer control is in this position. lights will not turn off if the Dome ON button on the
Dimming Of The Uconnect Touchscreen overhead console is pushed. The overhead and door Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
courtesy lights will turn off after 10 minutes when the
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen can be
ignition is placed in the OFF position to protect the 1 — Push End Inward (Hold For Washer Or Short Press
dimmed using the instrument panel dimmer control
battery. For Mist)
when the parking lights or headlights are on.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the 2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
When Display Mode is set to Auto within the Uconnect
Dome Defeat button on the overhead console is
system, the brightness will automatically adjust from
daytime intensity to nighttime intensity (and vice versa)
pushed. WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
based on ambient light levels outside of the vehicle. NOTE: Intermittent Wipers
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated Approach The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
lights under the outside mirrors, they will also be turned use when weather conditions make a single wiping
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen cannot be
off by pushing the Dome Defeat button. cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable.
adjusted when the instrument panel dimmer control is
For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control
rotated to the upper most detent, even when Display
knob upward to the first detent.
Mode is set to Auto within the Uconnect Settings. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob
When Display Mode is set to Manual, the brightness of
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on until it enters the low continual speed position. The
the Uconnect touchscreen will adjust to the set bright-
the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering delay can be regulated from a maximum of about
ness (1 - 6) when the headlights are either on or off. For
column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every one sec-
more information on these Uconnect Settings, see
switch, located on the end of the lever. ond. The delay intervals will double in duration when
page 188.
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers NOTE: • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob, The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; using the Uconnect system page 188.
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind- The Rain Sensing system has protection features for
and hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper shield. The wash function must be used in order to the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under
will operate for two to three cycles after the washer spray the windshield with washer fluid. the following conditions:
knob is released. For information on wiper care and replacement, see • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
If the washer knob is pushed while in the delay range, page 325. first placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the system will not operate until the wiper switch is
washer knob is released. It will then resume the inter- RAIN SENSING WIPERS — moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
mittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than
is pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on
IF EQUIPPED 32°F (0°C).
and cycle approximately three times after the washer This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
knob is released. and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system of the multifunction lever to one of four detent positions NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets to activate this feature. operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
rating information can be found on most washer fluid multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
containers. sensitive, and wiper delay detent position four is the
most sensitive.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with a Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
WARNING! Wiper delay position three should be used for normal are not operational when the vehicle is in the
rain conditions. Remote Start mode.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could Positions one and two can be used if the driver desires
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
less wiper sensitivity. Position four can be used if the
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
CLIMATE CONTROLS
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield the O (off) position when not using the system.
with the defroster before and during windshield The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
washer use. NOTE:
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
Mist • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the touchscreen, on the sides of the touchscreen, or on the
instrument panel below the radio.
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
briefly and release. The wipers will cycle one time and windshield.
automatically shut off. • Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL MAX A/C Button stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS Press and release the MAX A/C button on
may automatically adjust to optimize customer experi-
the touchscreen to change the current set-
ence for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
ting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may 2
operation to exit. be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fog-
ging on the inside of the windshield.
NOTE:
Auto Button
• MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling Set your desired temperature and press
performance.
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your
• The MAX A/C button is only available on the desired temperature by automatically adjust-
touchscreen. ing the blower speed and air distribution. Air
Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation
Uconnect 5 or 5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
A/C Button to improve performance. AUTO mode is highly recom-
Press and release this button on the touch- mended for efficiency.
Temperature Controls
screen, or push the button on the faceplate You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
to change the current setting. The A/C indi- • Press and release this button on the touchscreen.
cator illuminates when A/C is on.
• Push the button on the faceplate.
Recirculation Button Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode
Press and release this button on the touch- page 57.
screen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to change the system between Recirculation Front Defrost Button
mode and outside air mode. The Recircula-
tion indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Press and release the Front Defrost button
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be on the touchscreen, or push and release the
used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, button on the faceplate, to change the cur-
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be rent airflow setting to Defrost mode. The
used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Automatic on. Air comes from the windshield and side window
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions
Temperature Controls exist that could create fogging on the inside of the wind- demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
shield. The A/C can be deselected manually without blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
NOTE: mum temperature settings for best windshield and side
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
equipment.
window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the Driver And Passenger Temperature Up Blower Control
front defrost mode button, the climate system will
return to the previous setting.
And Down Buttons Blower Control regulates the amount of air
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with forced through the climate control system.
Rear Defrost Button independent temperature control. There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
Press and release the Rear Defrost button Push the red button (or rotate knob
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
on the touchscreen, or push and release the if equipped) on the faceplate, press the red
be selected using either the blower control knob on the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear button on the touchscreen, or press and
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
window defroster and the heated outside slide the temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer tempera- Faceplate
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illumi-
nates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear ture settings. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower con-
window defroster automatically turns off after Push the blue button (or rotate knob trol knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
10 minutes. if equipped) on the faceplate, press the blue blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control
button on the touchscreen, or press and knob counterclockwise.
slide the temperature bar towards the blue Touchscreen
CAUTION!
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to settings. and the large blower icon to increase the blower set-
the heating elements: ting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
NOTE:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- bar area between the icons.
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
• The numbers within the temperature display will Mode Control
only appear if the system is equipped with an auto-
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the matic climate control system. Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing the
soaking with warm water. • Up and down buttons are only available on vehicles
Mode button on the faceplate, to change the
equipped with a 12-inch display.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- airflow distribution mode. The airflow distri-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
SYNC Button bution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets,
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
and demist outlets.
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC Panel Mode
synchronizes the passenger temperature
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
automatically exit this feature.
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
NOTE: outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL NOTE:
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets. DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS • For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be turned off,
Bi-Level Mode but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent
fogging of the windows.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets 2
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
directed through the defrost and side win- glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
dow demister outlets. speed if needed.
NOTE: • If your air conditioning performance seems lower

than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumula-
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
air from the floor outlets.
spray from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature Recirculation Button
amount of air is directed through the defrost Controls Push the Recirculation button to change the
and side window demister outlets. system between recirculation mode and out-
MAX A/C Setting side air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Mix Mode Set the temperature control knob to the MAX
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be
A/C setting to change the current setting to
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and the coldest output of air. Moving the tem- used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors,
side window demister outlets. This setting perature control knob away from the MAX dust, or humidity are present. Recirculation can be
works best in cold or snowy conditions that A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit. used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may
require extra heat to the windshield. This be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fog-
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing A/C Button ging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
moisture on the windshield. deselected manually without disturbing the mode con-
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Condi-
trol selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
Climate Control OFF Button tioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
when A/C is on.
Press and release the OFF button on the ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the recommended.
faceplate (if equipped) to turn the Climate On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recircu-
Control on/off. lation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve
window cleaning operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Temperature Control regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the
control button to blink and then turn off. amount of airflow from these outlets.
air forced through the climate system.
Front Defrost Setting The temperature increases as you turn the Bi-Level Mode
temperature control knob clockwise.
Turn the mode control knob to the Front Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
windshield and side window demist outlets. directed through the defrost and side win-
When the defrost button is selected, the The temperature decreases as you turn the dow demister outlets.
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi- temperature control knob counterclockwise.
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side NOTE:
window defrosting and defogging. Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
Rear Defrost Button Blower Control air from the floor outlets.
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control Blower Control regulates the amount of air
button to turn on the rear window defroster forced through the climate control system. Floor Mode
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). There are seven blower speeds available. Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when The blower speed increases as you turn the amount of air is directed through the defrost
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower and side window demister outlets.
defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mix Mode
CAUTION! Mode Control Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to Turn the mode control knob or press the side window demister outlets. This setting
the heating elements: mode control button (if equipped) to adjust works best in cold or snowy conditions that
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- airflow distribution. The airflow distribution require extra heat to the windshield. This
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the mode can be adjusted so air comes from the setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets moisture on the windshield.
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the and demist outlets.
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water. Panel Mode
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
window. ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE Manual Operation Override centration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
CONTROL (ATC) — IF EQUIPPED This system offers a full complement of manual over- mended, because it may cause window fogging.
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display
Automatic Operation will be turned off when the system is being used in the Vacation/Storage
manual mode.
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys- 2
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tem- CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION — tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
perature Control (ATC) Panel. period of time, see page 360.
IF EQUIPPED
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep every- Window Fogging
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
one comfortable while you keep moving ahead. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
senger temperature control buttons. Once the
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
beep, say one of the following commands: Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
achieve and automatically maintain that
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
temperature. • “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees” for long periods, as fogging may occur.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it • “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
is not necessary to change the settings. You will Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be Outside Air Intake
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
the system to function automatically. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
seats or steering wheel if equipped. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
NOTE:
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings OPERATING TIPS the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug- intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed gested control settings for various weather conditions.
to provide comfort as quickly as possible. Cabin Air Filter
Summer Operation The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
• The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
units by selecting the US/Metric customer- The engine cooling system must be protected with a
programmable feature within Uconnect Settings high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro- your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
page 188. sion protection and to protect against engine overheat- needed.
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain recommended. Stop/Start System — If Equipped
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Winter Operation automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor- Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func- engine running condition.
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and con-
Operating Tips Chart INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS STORAGE in the open position. Driving with the glove compart-
Set the mode control to ment open may result in injury in a collision.
Hot Weather And
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on, and Glove Compartment
blower on high. Roll down the The glove compartment is located on the passenger
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
windows for a minute to flush out side of the instrument panel and features both an Door Storage — If Equipped
the hot air. Adjust the controls as upper and lower storage area. Front Door Storage
needed to achieve comfort.
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Turn (A/C) on and set the
Warm Weather mode control to (Panel Rear Door Storage
Mode). Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Center Storage Compartment —
Cool & Humid
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and turn (A/C)
If Equipped
Conditions The center storage compartment is located between
on to keep windows clear.
the driver and passenger seats. The storage compart-
Set the mode control to
ment provides an armrest and contains both an upper
(Floor Mode). If windshield fog-
Cold Weather and lower storage area.
ging starts to occur, move the
control to (Mix Mode).
Glove Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button

(If Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove compartment,

push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Center Storage Compartment
WARNING! WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
operation, or a collision. compartment lid open may result in injury in a
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight collision. 2
of the items stored exceeds about 10 lb (4.5 kg).
These items could be thrown about endangering Premium Center Console — If Equipped
occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not The premium center console is equipped with two front
exceed a total of 10 lb (4.5 kg). storage bins located in front of the center storage com-
partment. These storage bins may be equipped with
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to tandem doors. Push the front bin to access the cup-
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB Upper Storage USB Outlet holders. Or push the rear bin to access the coin holder/
power outlet that can be used to power small electrical With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to small storage bin.
devices. open the lower storage bin. The lower bin contains a
power inverter. There is also a “fill line” located along
the rear inside wall of the lower bin. Contents above the
“fill line” may interfere with cupholder placement
if equipped with a premium center console.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped

Center Storage Compartment
1 — Push Front Bin Access
1 — Upper Console Handle 2 — Push Rear Bin Access
2 — Lower Console Handle
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
Overhead Sunglass Storage

At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open
the compartment.
Tandem Doors Open Position Front Bench Seat Storage
1 — Front Bin Open With the seatback in the upright position, lift the center
2 — Rear Bin Open seat bottom to access additional storage underneath
the seat.
Push the release button at the front of the cupholder
bin to slide tray rearward to access the front lower stor- Overhead Sunglass Door
age bin, or forward to access the rear lower storage bin.
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, stor-
age can be found by folding down the center seatback.
A console storage area and cupholders are available.
Below Seat Bottom Storage
There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of

the instrument panel (if equipped). It can be released
Push Release Button To Slide Tray by pushing the access button above it. Pull drawer out-
ward to the fully open position.
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Storage Drawer Access Button In-Floor Storage Bin Latch
Rear Console Storage — If Equipped NOTE:

The center portion of the 40/20/40 rear seat will fold The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully
Seatback Storage open the lid.
forward for rear seat cupholders and a storage com-
partment. Lift up on the console latch to access the Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
storage compartment.
If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second
row seats and can be used for extra storage. The stor-
age bins have removable liners that can be easily
removed for cleaning.
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Each storage bin also contains two hooks for securing

Rear Console Latch Location
cargo. These hooks should be used to secure loads
safely when the vehicle is moving.
NOTE:
The rear seats do not need to be folded up to access
this feature.
USB/AUX CONTROL
Located on the center stack, just below the instrument
panel, is the main media hub. There are four total USB
ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C) and two Standard USBs
(Type A). There is also an AUX port located in the middle
of the USB ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
In-Floor Storage Bin Hooks Folding Down Front Of Seat Base if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Owner’s Manual
NOTE: 1 — Lock Mechanism Supplement.
The maximum load limit for each hook is 250 lb 2 — Front Of Seat Base
(113 kg). NOTE:
Flip the inside of the base upward into the upright posi- Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
Storage Under Rear Seat — If Equipped tion, locking into place, creating and extended storage both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
To access the storage under the rear seats, unlatch the area. port can transfer data to the system at a time. A pop-up
lock mechanism in the center of the seat base by rotat- will appear and allow you to select the device transfer-
ing it to either side, and fold the front of the seat base ring data.
forward. For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
Fully Extended Storage Area

Applicable to only Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Dis-

play, and Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display radios,
different scenarios are listed below when a non-phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller
and larger USB ports:
2
• “A new device is now connected. Previous connec-
tion was lost”.
• “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost”.
• “Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use the
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub second device”. Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — AUX Port NOTE: 1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2 Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB 2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media 3 — AUX Port
The third and fourth USB ports are located behind the USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
center console, above the power inverter. Both are that the device is not supported by the system. Some USB ports support media and charging. You can
charge only. Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause use features, such as Apple CarPlay®, Android Auto™,
the connection to a previous device to be lost. Pandora®, and others while charging your phone.
If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a USB port NOTE:
located on the top tray of the vehicle’s center console.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
If equipped, two Mini-USB ports (Type C), two Standard the connection to a previous device to be lost.
USB ports (Type A), and one AUX port may be located to
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
the left of the center stack, just below the climate
Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com.
controls.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigarette lighter” style plug. The 12 Volt
Rear USB Ports power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB Port (Charge
Only) have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V
1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2 DC”, together with either a key symbol, battery symbol,
or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be in the The auxiliary power outlet can be changed to battery
ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide powered at all times by switching the power outlet fuses WARNING!
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is in the Internal Power Distribution Center located under To avoid serious injury or death:
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all the driver’s side instrument panel.
times. • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
CAUTION!
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts vehicle.
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the tric shock and failure.
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power CAUTION!
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Power Outlet Fuse Locations power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
Warranty. use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
1 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Battery Fed discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray on top Position
of the center stack. This power outlet only works when and/or prevent the engine from starting.
2 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Ignition Fed
the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position. Position • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
3 — F48 Fuse 10 A Red Port Power or Rear USB (Charge vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
Only) battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to driven a sufficient length of time to allow the gen-
protect the battery against discharge. erator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) inverter may be
located inside the center console towards the right
hand side. This inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 400 Watts. Certain video game consoles 2
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet Center Stack Power Inverter
NOTE: To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in a device. The

400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet turns off when the device is unplugged.
outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts is shared
amongst the devices plugged in. NOTE:
If equipped with a front bench seat, there may be a • The Center Stack Power Inverter is only available on
115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) inverter located to the vehicles equipped with a front bench seat.
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet right of the center stack, just below the climate con-
trols. This inverter can power cellular phones, electron- • The power inverter only turns on if the ignition is in
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) the ACC or ON/RUN position.
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
power inverter located on the rear of the center con-
sole. This inverter can power cellular phones, electron-
400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed this • Due to built-in overload protection, the power
power limit, as will most power tools. inverter shuts down if the power rating is exceeded.
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools. WARNING!
All power inverters are designed with built-in overload To avoid serious injury or death:
protection. If the power rating of 400 Watts is
exceeded, the power inverter shuts down. Once the
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the • Do not touch with wet hands.
inverter should reset. • Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in • iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning ware to protect the device from overheating. When
IF EQUIPPED will prevent the phone from charging. the software is active, the rate of charge is slowed
LED Indicator Status: down to protect the device.
• No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a • Phones must always be placed on the wireless
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi® charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
standard. that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
• Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging. charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
• Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object • Having multiple applications open on the phone
is detected.
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
• Green Light: Device has completed battery charging and may even shut down an application that is
(if device is equipped to transmit this information). actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless cause the phone to overheat.
Charging Pad: • Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
• The presence of the Near-Field Communication to prevent the phone from overheating during charg-
Wireless Charging Pad (NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal ing such as slowing down the rate of charge. In cer-
malfunction anomalies. tain instances, the device may shut down for a brief
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi® wire- period of time (when the device reaches a certain
less charging pad located below the center stack, • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in temperature). If this happens, it does not mean
order for the phone to charge.
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is there is a fault with the wireless charging pad. This
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile • To avoid interference with the key fob search, the may just be a protective measure to prevent dam-
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
age to the phone.
of your mobile phone. door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
running. • The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay®, Android
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi® wireless • Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a spe- facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In this
cialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile the wireless charging pad.
case, it is recommended to connect the system
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please • If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light using the USB port.
see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
information. and placed back on the charging pad to resume • Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip charging.
or near the wireless charging pad.
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED • Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone • With a compatible device placed on the charging
indicator light. is connected to a wired charger.
pad, and the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, a
• The phone’s protective case must be removed when reminder message may appear on the instrument
placed on the wireless charging pad. cluster display to warn the driver.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-

CAUTION! The power window switches will remain active for up to closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi- Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. to close the window.
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Plac- The timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings
page 188. NOTE:
ing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the 2
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
prevents the vehicle from starting. WARNING! If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not the window manually.
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a loca-
WINDOWS tion accessible to children, and do not leave the Key- WARNING!
less Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
POWER WINDOWS become entrapped by the windows while operating almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
The window controls on the driver's door control all the the power window switches. Such entrapment may clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
door windows. result in serious injury or death. the window path before closing.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES RESET AUTO-UP

Auto-Down Feature Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
switch down briefly, then release, and the window will pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
go down automatically. additional two seconds after the window is closed.
To stop the window from going all the way down during 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the window completely and continue to hold the switch
switch briefly. down for an additional two seconds after the win-
Power Window Switches Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection dow is fully open.
Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the win-
The passenger door windows can also be operated by dow will go up automatically. WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
using the single window controls on the passenger door To stop the window from going all the way up during the The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
To open the window part way (manually), push the win- briefly and release it when you want the window to stop. push and release the window lockout button (the indi-
dow switch down briefly and release. cator light on the button will turn on). To enable the win-
dow controls, push and release the window lockout but-

ton again (the indicator light on the button will turn off).
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW — POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
IF EQUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window helps to SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF —
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the IF EQUIPPED
lock to release the window.
The power sunroof switches are located on the over-
head console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Window Lockout Switch
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW —

IF EQUIPPED Manual Rear Window Lock
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on
the overhead console. Push the switch rearward to open WIND BUFFETING Power Sunroof Switches
the glass. Pull the switch forward to close the glass.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
2 — Venting Sunroof
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- WARNING!
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buf- with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
feting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
Rear Window Switch operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
NOTE: Ignition Off Operation
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown or Manual Open operation is initiated the sunshade will approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could automatically open to the half open position prior to the placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten sunroof opening. will cancel this feature.
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- 2
gers are also properly secured. Pinch Protect Feature NOTE:
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an Uconnect system page 188.
object, to project through the sunroof opening. obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Injury may result. sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- Sunroof Maintenance
tion if this occurs. Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
Opening And Closing The Sunroof NOTE:
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
Express Open/Close If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and DUAL PANE POWER SUNROOF —
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
second and the sunroof will open automatically from IF EQUIPPED
any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop Venting Sunroof The power sunroof switches are located on the over-
automatically.
Push and release the Vent button within one half sec- head console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
second and the sunroof will close automatically from
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
automatically.
other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the Sunshade Operation
sunroof.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Manual Open/Close sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. NOTE:
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close opera-
tion will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened position until the switch is
operated and held again.
NOTE:
WARNING!
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. or Manual Open operation is initiated the sunshade will
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any automatically open to the half open position prior to the
object, to project through the sunroof opening. sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening And Closing The Power
Sunshade
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
The sunshade has two programmed positions: half
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for open and full open positions. When operating the sun-
the sunroof open position; a comfort stop position and shade from the closed position, the sunshade will
a full open position. The comfort stop position has been always stop at the half open position regardless of
Power Sunroof Switches optimized to minimize wind buffeting. express or manual open operation. The switch must be
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof Express Open/Close actuated again to continue on to full open position.
2 — Venting Sunroof Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade second and the sunroof will open automatically from be closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the
any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/
automatically. vented and the sunshade is at half open position will
WARNING! first automatically close the sunroof prior to the sun-
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or second and the sunroof will close automatically from shade closing.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop Express Open/Close
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location automatically. Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless During Express Open or Express Close operation, any within one-half second, the sunshade will open to the
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN posi- other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the half open position and stop automatically. Push and
tion. Occupants, particularly unattended children, sunroof. release the switch again from the half open position
can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
Manual Open/Close and the sunshade will open to the full open position
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap- and stop automatically.
ment may result in serious injury or death. To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Push the sunshade switch forward and release it within
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
one-half second and the sunshade will close
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could automatically.
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten forward position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- Any release of the switch during open or close opera-
other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
gers are also properly secured. tion will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
sunshade in a partially open position.
(Continued) remain in a partially opened position until the switch is
operated and held again.
Manual Open/Close Ignition Off Operation 2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the sun- hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to release it, before raising the hood.
shade will open to the half open position and stop auto- approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
matically. Push and hold the sunshade switch again placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
and the sunshade will open to the full open position. will cancel this feature.
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunshade will 2
close and stop at full closed position. NOTE:
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
will stop the sunshade in a partially open position. Uconnect system page 188.
Pinch Protect Feature Sunroof Maintenance

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
Safety Latch Location
tion if this occurs.
HOOD
NOTE: TO CLOSE THE HOOD
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in TO OPEN THE HOOD Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from the
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and point where the props no longer hold the hood open.
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steer-
Venting Sunroof ing wheel at the base of the instrument panel. WARNING!
Push and release the Vent button within one half sec- Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
is called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. injury or death.
NOTE:
If the sunshade was not already open, it will automati-
cally open prior to the roof opening to the vent position. CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Hood Release Lever Location
TAILGATE CLOSING Once the 60 split swing door is opened, pull the release
handle on the inboard side of the 40 split door to open.
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both sides are
OPENING securely latched.
The tailgate may be opened by pushing the tailgate LOCKING TAILGATE

release pad located on the tailgate door.
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to the button.
open position (if equipped).
Electronic Tailgate Release — MULTIFUNCTION TAILGATE —

If Equipped IF EQUIPPED
The key fob may be equipped with an elec- The 60/40 multifunction tailgate has two swing doors
tronic release feature for the tailgate, allow- to allow for closer access to the pickup box with the
ing hands-free tailgate opening. To activate, doors open.
40 Split Door Release Handle
push and release the Tailgate Release but- Opening
ton on the key fob twice within five seconds. The tail- The tailgate must be latched closed to open the swing Closing
gate door will unlatch, and slowly lower into the open doors. Push the paddle down, then pull the release Always close the 40 split door first, then close the
position. handle beneath the tailgate lowering handle. This 60 split door. The swing doors must be securely latched
If equipped, a button on the center overhead console opens the 60 split door. before the tailgate can be lowered.
inside the vehicle can be used to release the tailgate.
An indicator light may also signal when the tailgate is NOTE:
open.
For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be stationary
• When the swing doors are open, the maximum load
placed on a door cannot exceed 180 lb (82 kg).
and in PARK or NEUTRAL.
• Pull back on the swing doors firmly after closing to
NOTE: ensure they are securely latched. Similar to the side
The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover page 81 may door ajar light inside the cab, the bed light above
prevent electronic tailgate release. The Tonneau Cover the rear window will remain on if the tailgate doors
must be removed or folded up before releasing the are not fully closed.
tailgate.
60 Split Door Release Handle

WARNING!
To prevent serious injury or death:
• Always keep hands away from the hinge sides of
the swing doors and where the doors meet when
opening and closing the doors. Your hand or some- 2
one else’s hand could be pinched.
• Never operate the vehicle with the swing doors
open.
• Never hang from or sit on the swing doors.
Lift Right Side Off Of Pivot Slide Tailgate To The Right
CAUTION!
3. Without latching, rotate the tailgate to nearly closed. 4. Let the tailgate rest on the support cables while hav-
• Always check both swing doors are latched before Then, while providing support to the tailgate, slide it ing the tailgate naturally slide forward on the
starting vehicle. slowly to the right, removing the tailgate from the bumper.
• Vehicle damage may occur if doors are not left pivot.
securely latched.
NOTE:
Rest the tailgate on the bumper so that the entire
TAILGATE REMOVAL tailgate is secure and supported.
NOTE:
WARNING!
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview camera
function. For vehicles equipped with a multifunction tailgate,
To remove the tailgate, refer to the following the tailgate weighs 115 lb (52 kg) and should be
instructions: removed by at least two people. Injury to the cus-
tomer or damage to the tailgate may occur if one per-
1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle. son tries to remove the multifunction tailgate.
Tailgate Only Supported By Cables
2. Lift up on the right side of the tailgate, lifting it off of
the pivot. 5. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by push-
ing inward in the locking tab.
Connector Bracket Location Connected Wiring Harness Body Side Plug (One Piece)
1 — First Release Tab 8. Connect the tailgate plugs (provided in the glove
2 — Second Release Tab compartment) to the tailgate wiring harness to
ensure that the terminals do not corrode.
Locking Tab
6. Disconnect the wiring harness by pushing on the
two release tabs, ensuring the connector bracket Tailgate Plugs (Two Pieces)
does not fall into the sill. Disconnected Body Side Harness
7. Connect the body side plug (provided in the glove 1 — Large Plug
compartment) to the body side wiring harness and 2 — Small Plug
insert the bracket back into the sill.
9. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the

forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will pre- WARNING!
vent damaging the connector and bracket when To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
storing or reinstalling the tailgate. the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
10. Raise the tailgate slightly, and remove the support or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the over-
cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot. hanging camper compartment and be free of leaks. 2
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported by you and/or a BED STEP — IF EQUIPPED
second person when removing support cables.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable bed
step to provide easier entry and exit into the truck bed.
If your vehicle is equipped with a standard tailgate, the Bed Step Components (Standard Tailgate)
step will be located on the driver’s side of the tailgate.
If equipped with a multifunction tailgate, the step will
be located below the center of the tailgate. 1 — Bed Step
2 — Foot Tab
Bed Step For Standard Tailgate
Locking Tang
11. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup
box.
Bed Step Location
Bed Step Extended
• If the tailgate is closed with the wire harness discon-
nected, the tailgate can only be opened by removing To extend the bed step, place your foot on the protrud-
NOTE:
the inside panel and unlatching the locking mecha- ing foot tab located on the left edge of the bed step,
nism manually. and push rearward. A small amount of force will release Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will
the spring load and extend the bed step out and away extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position that
from the tailgate. will avoid coming into contact with the step as it
extends.
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push the
bed step forward with your foot until the bed step is PICKUP BOX
retracted by the spring load. The pickup box has many features designed for utility
and convenience.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your hands.
The low clearance space between the bed step and
the rear bumper as the bed step returns to the
stowed position could result in injury to your hands or
fingers.
Bed Step For Multifunction Tailgate Bed Step Extended
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will
extend out quickly. Be sure to stand in a position that
Pickup Box Features
will avoid coming into contact with the step as it
extends.
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push the
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
bed step forward with your foot until the bed step is
3 — Cleats
retracted by the spring load.
NOTE:
WARNING! If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or Head-
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your hands. ache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must use
Bed Step Location Mopar® Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available
The low clearance space between the bed step and
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the top cen- the rear bumper as the bed step returns to the from an authorized dealer.
ter of the bed step, and push down while pulling rear- stowed position could result in injury to your hands or You can carry wide building materials (sheets of ply-
ward. A small amount of force will release the spring fingers. wood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber
load and extend the bed step out and away from the across the box in the indentations provided above the
tailgate. wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form
the floor.
WARNING!
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts. CAUTION!
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
2
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds
250 lb (113 kg), or 500 lb (227 kg) total per rail, and
may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough
the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed
roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo
45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to the cleat
that may result in vehicle damage. If wide building
or cleat rail may occur.
materials are to be frequently carried, the installa-
tion of a support is recommended. This will
restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed Adjustable Cleat Assembly
pickup box floor. that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lb (272 kg) of 1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
material suspended above the wheelhouse, sup-
ports must be installed to transfer the weight of 3 — Utility Rail Cleat
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage
may result. The use of proper supports will permit Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail)
loading up to the rated payload. To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide the cleat
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an forward to access the cut out at the end of the box rail,
accident causing serious or fatal injury. then remove the cleat.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner

side bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both
wheel housings. Place wooden boards across the box
from side to side to create separate load compartments Adjustable Cleats
in the pickup box.
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
of the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1,000 lb properly secure.
(450 kg) total.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the
nut counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then
pull out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest
the desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in
the detent and tighten the nut.
Slide Cleat Forward To Remove
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)

CAUTION!
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the
end cap screw located in the center of the end cap,
using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched
before moving or driving vehicle.
slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to
vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential for
damage, secure all cargo to prevent movement
and protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy/
Pull End Cap Away From Rail sharp objects with appropriate padding.
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of three Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the
End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight,
features:
lockable, illuminated storage for up to 150 lb (68 kg) of
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover) • Cargo storage bins evenly distributed cargo.
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the release
button located beneath the end cap while pulling the
• Cargo divider
cap away from the rail. The cleat can now be removed • Bed rail tie-down system page 77
by sliding it off the end of the rail. NOTE:
Bed rail tie-down system is also available for
vehicles not equipped with a RamBox.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

RAMBOX
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key
fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the
RamBox page 17. To unlatch the storage bin manu-
ally, insert the emergency key into the keyhole and turn RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
clockwise. Always return the key to the upright (vertical)
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover position before removing it from the keyhole.
electronics and other low power devices requiring

CAUTION! CAUTION! power up to 400 Watts. Certain video game consoles
Failure to follow the following items could cause dam- Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
age to the vehicle: could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is is required to stay open for extended periods of time,
properly secured. it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off 2
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb manually using the on/off switch.
(68 kg) per bin.
The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push when the lid is opened. The timing can be adjusted
and release the button located on the lid. The RamBox within Uconnect Settings page 188.
lid will open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
fully open. water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install, push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if the RamBox Power Inverter
RamBox is locked.
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only
found on vehicles equipped with a RamBox. The switch
only controls on/off operation of the power outlet in the
RamBox; it does not control on/off operation of the
power outlets located inside the cabin of the vehicle.
RamBox Drain Plug Removal

NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers.
RamBox Button And Keyhole Lock These accessories (in addition to other RamBox acces-
sories) are available from Mopar®.
1 — Keyhole Lock If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) inverter
2 — Button may be located inside the RamBox of your vehicle. The
inverter can be turned on by the Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
Power Inverter switch located to the left of the steering
wheel. The RamBox inverter can power cellular phones,
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING

Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage
bin, children can die from suffocation or heat Emergency Release Lever Center Handle And Lock
stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED 1 — Center Handle Lock
storage bin covers are not properly latched. 2 — Handle
The bed divider has two functional positions:
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers 3 — Unlocked Position
open. • Divider Position 4 — Locked Position
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched • Storage Position
while the vehicle is in motion. 2. With the side gates open, position the divider so the
Divider Position outboard ends align with the intended slots in the
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie-down.
The divider position is intended for managing your sides of the bed.
cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving
RamBox Emergency Release Lever around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along the
bed inner panels which allow for various positions to
As a security measure, an Emergency Release Lever is
assist in managing your cargo.
built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
To install the bed divider into a divider position, perform
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
the following:
storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever 1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism. vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the divider side gates.
Aligning Gate To Slots

3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard

ends are secured into the intended slots of the bed. TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER —
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the
side gates in the closed position.
IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on the
truck bed to protect your gear and cargo. 2
TONNEAU COVER COMPONENTS
Storage Position
The outboard ends should be positioned in front of the

cargo tie-down loops.
Side Gates Closed

5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into
place.
Storage Position Folded Tonneau Cover Components

The storage position for the bed divider is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area 1 – Stowage Strap
when not in use. 2 – Tonneau Cover Bumper Folded
To install the bed divider into the storage position, per-
form the same steps as you would for the divider posi-
tion, except position the divider fully forward in the bed Cargo Tie-Down Loop
against the front panel.
Tonneau Cover Latch Components Position Two (Front And Rear Latches Latched) Location Of Rear Latches
1 — Handle 1 — Panel 1
2 — Slide Locking Lever 2 — Panel 2
3 — Locating Bumper 3 — Panel 3
4 — Truck Flange Bead
5 — Latch Bumper
6 — J Hook
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
FOLDING FOR DRIVING OR
REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover use the following steps:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear pair of Tonneau
Cover latches located on the underside of the Cover.
Slide Locking Lever Inward
2. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of the truck

bed to release the J Hook and pull the handle down-
ward into the released position.
Position One (Front Latches Latched And Stowage Straps

Secured)
Unlatching Latch Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up Lift Panel 3 And Fold Onto Panel 2
3. Holding the bumper, push the fully released latch to 4. Lift up on Panel 3 and fold it onto Panel 2.
the center and push up. Push the handle firmly,
locking it into the stowed position. Repeat Steps
2 and 3 for the opposite side latch.
Released Position
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
NOTE:
Stowed Position When folding the second and third panels, the sec-
tions MUST be held together to avoid damage to the
cover material. Fold the panel gently. Do not allow
the panels to drop under their own weight.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage Position One (Front Latches Latched And Stowage Straps Fully Folded Tonneau Cover
Secured)
5. Lift up on the second and third panel and fold them NOTE:
onto the first panel. NOTE: The vehicle can be driven with the Tonneau Cover in
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded com- the folded position or can be completely removed.
pletely, and the stowage straps are engaged, before
removing.
CAUTION!
The folded Tonneau Cover must be latched by both
front latches and both front stowage straps or dam-
age to the Tonneau Cover or vehicle may occur while
driving.
Stowage Strap Clipped

Slide Locking Lever Inward
6. Unsnap the stowage strap and clip. Repeat for both
straps to prevent the Tonneau Cover panels from 7. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of the truck
unfolding. bed to release the J Hook and pull the handle down-
ward into the released position.
Unlatching Latch Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up Location of Front Latches
9. With two people, remove the cover.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER

INSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow these steps:
1. Position the Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and
center using the locating bumpers.
2. Locate the front pair of Tonneau Cover latches on
the underside of the Cover. Slide the locking lever
toward the inside of the truck bed and release the
latch from the stowed position, and pull the handle
Released Position downward into the released position. Do this for Slide Locking Lever Towards Inside Of Truck
both the left and right side.
8. Holding the bumper, push the fully released latch to
the center and push up. Push the handle firmly,
locking it into the stowed position. Repeat Steps 2 &
3 for the opposite side latch.
4. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide Locking

Lever is fully engaged. Do this for both the left and
right side.
5. Unclip the stowage straps, and re-snap them to the
bow.
6. Unfold the Tonneau Cover to the second panel
position.
Unlatching Latch J Hook Under Truck Flange
1 — Front Of Truck
2 — J Hook
NOTE:
Make sure the bumper is in front of the truck flange
bead.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
NOTE:
When folding the second and third panels, the sec-
tions MUST be held together to avoid damage to the
cover material. Fold the panel gently. Do not allow
Released Position the panels to drop under their own weight.
3. Swing the J Hook from the handle and push the

handle to the center and up, ensuring that the J
Hook is under the truck flange. Push up on the
handle firmly, locking it into the latched position.
Pull Handle Downward
8. Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the rear pair of

latches. WARNING!
9. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide Locking You must ensure the Tonneau Cover is properly
Lever is fully engaged. Do this for both the left and installed on the vehicle before driving. An unsecured
right side. Tonneau Cover can fly off of the vehicle while in
motion, resulting in a collision, personal injury, and 2
NOTE: death. Failure to follow this procedure can also dam-
Also check to ensure the latch yellow bumpers are age the vehicle and the Tonneau Cover.
forward of the bead on the underside of the truck
flange. Make sure that the Tonneau Cover is posi-
tioned fully forward, so that the bumper clears the
CAUTION!
bead.
Second Panel Position It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
NOTE: Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
Unfold the panel gently, and do not allow the panels follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
to drop under their own weight. Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to
the vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
CAUTION! TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER

The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau CLEANING
Cover is in the second panel position. For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use Mopar®
Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar® Leather &
Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
Pull Up On Tonneau Cover Corners
10. Gently pull up on all four corners of the Tonneau

Cover to ensure that it is properly latched.
Position Two (Fully Unfolded)

88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT NOTE: 7. Fuel Gauge
CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS — In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, an oil pres- ○ The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
sure indication of zero is normal during an Autostop. tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
GASOLINE 5. Speedometer position.
1. Tachometer ○ Indicates vehicle speed. ○ The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
○ Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per 6. Temperature Gauge door is located.
minute (RPM x 1000).
○ The pointer shows engine coolant temperature.
2. Voltmeter The pointer positioned within the normal range 3
○ When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the gauge indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
indicates the electrical system voltage. The ating satisfactorily.
pointer should stay within the normal range if ○ The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
the battery is charged. If the pointer moves to ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
either extreme left or right and remains there grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
during normal driving, the electrical system allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
should be serviced. operating range.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, a reduced volt-
WARNING!
age may be present during an Autostop. A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
3. Instrument Cluster Display ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
○ When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis- service if your vehicle overheats page 328.
play shows the instrument cluster display mes-
sages page 95.
○ The display always shows one of the main menu CAUTION!
items after ignition on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
○ The pointer should always indicate the oil pres- pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
sure when the engine is running. A continuous
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
high or low reading under normal driving condi-
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
tions may indicate a lubrication system malfunc-
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
tion. Immediate service should be obtained
authorized dealer for service.
from an authorized dealer.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING!

5. Fuel Gauge
DESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE ○ The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth- tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
1. Tachometer ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool- position.
○ Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per ant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for ○ The fuel pump symbol points to the
minute (RPM x 1000). service if your vehicle overheats page 328. side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
○ When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis- CAUTION! 3
sages page 95. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
○ The display always shows one of the main menu age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
items after ignition on.
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
3. Speedometer back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
○ Indicates vehicle speed. the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
4. Temperature Gauge
○ The pointer shows engine coolant temperature.
The pointer positioned within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
○ The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT 3. Instrument Cluster Display ○ The DEF gauge may also not immediately update
○ When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis- after a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is
CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL play shows the instrument cluster display mes- below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line heater will
sages page 95. possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
1. Tachometer
gauge to update after a period of run time. Under
○ Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per ○ The display always shows one of the main menu very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge
minute (RPM x 1000). items after ignition on.
may not reflect the new fill level for several
2. Engine Coolant Temperature 4. Oil Pressure Gauge drives.
○ This gauge shows the engine coolant tempera- ○ The pointer should always indicate some oil ○ Outside temperature can affect DEF consump-
ture. The gauge pointer will likely show higher pressure when the engine is running. A continu- tion. In cold conditions, 12°F (-11°C) and below, 3
ous high or low reading under normal driving the DEF gauge needle can stay on a fixed posi-
temperatures when driving in hot weather, up
conditions may indicate a lubrication system tion and may not move for extended periods of
mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go traf-
malfunction. Immediate service should be time. This is a normal function of the system.
fic. If the red Warning Light turns on while driv-
ing, safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and turn obtained from an authorized dealer. 7. Fuel Gauge
off the engine. DO NOT operate the vehicle until 5. Speedometer ○ The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
the cause is corrected. tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
○ Indicates vehicle speed. position.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
WARNING! ○ The fuel pump symbol points to the
○ The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Die- side of the vehicle where the fuel
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth- sel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is filler door is located.
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool- required to maintain normal vehicle operation
ant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for and emissions compliance. If something is
service if your vehicle overheats page 328. wrong with the gauge, a DEF Warning Message
or Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be dis-
played page 103.
WARNING! NOTE:
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam- ○ The gauge may take up to five seconds to update
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” after adding a gallon or more of Diesel Exhaust
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with Fluid to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops to the DEF system, the gauge may not update to
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the new level. See an authorized dealer for
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an service.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ○ The gauge may take up to five seconds to update Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
after adding a gallon or more of DEF to the DEF ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL tank. If you have a fault related to the DEF sys- you how systems are working and give you warnings
tem, the gauge may not update to the new level. when they are not. The steering wheel mounted con-
1. Tachometer
See an authorized dealer for service. trols allow you to scroll through the main menus and
○ Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per ○ The DEF gauge may also not immediately update submenus. You can access the specific information you
minute (RPM x 1000). after a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is want and make selections and adjustments.
2. Instrument Cluster Display below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line heater will
○ When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis- possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
gauge to update after a period of run time. Under
LOCATION AND CONTROLS 3
very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge
sages page 95.
may not reflect the new fill level for several The instrument cluster display features a driver interac-
○ The display always shows one of the main menu drives. tive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
items after ignition on. ○ Outside temperature can affect DEF consump-
3. Speedometer tion. In cold conditions, 12°F (-11°C) and below,
the DEF gauge needle can stay on a fixed posi-
○ Indicates vehicle speed. tion and may not move for extended periods of
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge time. This is a normal function of the system.
○ The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Die- 5. Fuel Gauge
sel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is
required to maintain normal vehicle operation ○ The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
and emissions compliance. If something is
position.
wrong with the gauge, a DEF Warning Message
or Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be dis- ○ The fuel pump symbol points to the
played page 103. side of the vehicle where the fuel
filler door is located.
NOTE: Premium Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
○ The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with 1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
a large amount of full reserve. So the level sen-
sor will indicate a full reading even before the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY 2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
tank is completely full. To put it another way, Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
there’s additional storage capacity in the tank display, which offers useful information to the driver. The system allows the driver to select information by
above the Full mark that’s not represented in the With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a pushing the following instrument cluster display control
gauge. You may not see any movement in the door will activate the display for viewing, and display the buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel.
reading – even after driving up to 2,000 miles total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instru-
(3,219 km) in some cases. ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu To reset the oil change indicator system (after perform-
screen viewed within that main menu will be ing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
displayed. procedure:
OK Button: 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
For Digital Speedometer: START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
• Pushing the OK button changes units (mph ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
or km/h). 2. Push and release the down arrow button to
For Screen Setup: scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle
• OK button allows user to enter menu and Info.”
submenus. 3. Push and release the right arrow button to
• Within each submenu layer, the up and down access the ”Oil Life” screen.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons arrow buttons will allow the user to select the
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If con-
item of interest.
ditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
1 — Left Arrow Button • Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
2 — Up Arrow Button confirmation screen will appear (returning the user pop-up message of “To reset oil life engine must be
3 — Right Arrow Button to the first page of the submenu). off with ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button • Pushing the left arrow button will exit each sub- seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life
menu layer and return to the main menu. screen.
Up And Down 5. Push and release the up or down arrow but-
Arrow Buttons: OIL LIFE RESET ton to exit the submenu screen.
Using the up or down arrow button allows you
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
to cycle through the Main Menu Items. NOTE:
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
Left And Right Arrow Buttons: display in the instrument cluster display for five sec- If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
Using the left or right arrow button allows you onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
to cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil necessary, repeat this procedure.
item. change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
NOTE: dependent upon your personal driving style. Push and release the up or down arrow button
• Holding the up / down or left / right Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
until the desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in
arrow button will loop the user through the currently the instrument cluster display.
selected menu or options presented on the screen. turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or arrow buttons.
• Main menu and submenus wrap for continuous
scrolling.
Speedometer Off Road – If Equipped Driver Assist — If Equipped

Push and release the up or down arrow button Push and release the up or down arrow button The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC
until the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the instru- and LaneSense systems.
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK ment cluster display. Push and release the left or Push and release the up or down arrow button
button to cycle the display between mph and km/h. right arrow button to scroll through the information until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instru-
submenus. ment cluster display.
Vehicle Info • Drivetrain Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
Push and release the up or down arrow button ○ Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the numerical value of calculated average front
system settings. The information displayed depends on 3
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left wheel angle from the steering wheel orientation.
ACC system status.
or right arrow button to scroll through the infor- ○ Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
mation submenus and push and release the OK button graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part Push the ACC on/off button (located on the steering
to select or reset the resettable submenus. Time, 4WD Low status. wheel) until one of the following displays in the instru-
• Tire Pressure Monitor System ○ Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped): dis- ment cluster display:
plays front and rear or rear only axle locker Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Air Suspension — If Equipped graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
• Coolant Temperature — If Equipped text message (connected or disconnected). Cruise Control Off.”
• Trans Temperature • Pitch And Roll Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• Oil Temperature ○ Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
graphic with the angle number on the screen.
• Oil Pressure — If Equipped has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
• Oil Life NOTE: Cruise Control Ready.”
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steer-
ing wheel) and the following will display in the instru-
• Gauge Summary — If Equipped pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers,
○ Coolant Temp and the graphic will be grayed out. A message indicat- ment cluster display:
○ Trans Temp ing the necessary speed for the feature to become ACC SET
○ Oil Temp available will also display. When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instru-
○ Oil Pressure ment cluster page 144.
• Engine Hours The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activ-
ity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off WARNING!

• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
LaneSense — If Equipped mance Features is intended for off-highway or track
use only and should not be done on any public road-
The instrument cluster display displays the current ways. It is recommended that these features be used
LaneSense system settings. The information displayed in a controlled environment and within the limits of
depends on LaneSense system status and the condi- the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
tions that need to be met page 113. by the performance pages must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopar-
Performance Features — If Equipped dize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a
Push and release the up or down arrow button safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
until the Performance icon/title is highlighted in the accidents.
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to scroll through the per-
formance feature submenus.
The Performance Features include the following:
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer

• Best
• Last
Speed Timers • Current
0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) Timer
• Best
• Last
• Current
0-60 feet (0-20 meters)/Reaction Timer

• Best
• Last
• Current
NOTE:
Reaction Time result is shown only on the 60 ft timer tab.
0-330 feet (0-100 meters) Timer
• Best
• Last 3
• Current
Drag Timers 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
• Best
• Last
• Current
0-1000 feet (0-300 meters) Timer
• Best
• Last
• Current
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
• Best
• Last
• Current
Braking Distance • Distance
• From Speed
G-Forces • Current
• Peak
Lap Timer Shows times for Last, Best, and Current laps ran.
Lap History Will list the last four laps with the best lap highlighted in green.
Top Speed Shows the top speed of the vehicle.
Fuel Economy Push and release the right or left arrow button Stored Messages
to cycle through the following trailer tow information:
Push and release the up or down arrow button Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the • Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This fea-
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK button OK button to reset the distance. ture shows the number of stored warning messages.
to reset Average Fuel Economy. • Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM): Push and release the right or left arrow button
• Current Fuel Economy ○ Braking Output to cycle through stored messages.
○ Trailer Type
• Average Fuel Economy ○ ITBM Gain Settings
• Range To Empty • Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK button to Head Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped
begin the Trailer Light Test sequence page 179.
Trip Info NOTE:
Push and release the up or down arrow button
• Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instrument The HUD feature Settings are available at any vehicle
Cluster Display will display the Trailer Tire Pressure
until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument for a connected trailer with sensors that match the speed page 101.
cluster display. Push and release the right or left active trailer profile. When a low tire is present, the Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
arrow button to enter the submenus of Trip A and low tire value will be displayed in red, and the
Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information will display the Push and release the up or down arrow button
affected low tire will have a red glow. “Trailer Tire until the Settings Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the
following: Low“ will be displayed on the center bottom of the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
• Distance Instrument Cluster Display screen. button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
• Average Fuel Economy Audio
on the screen as needed. The Settings feature allows
• Elapsed Time you to change what information is displayed in the
Push and hold OK button to reset all information. Push and release the up or down arrow button instrument cluster as well as the location that informa-
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the tion is displayed.
Stop/Start — If Equipped instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
NOTE:
audio source information, including the Song name,
Push and release the up or down arrow button Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying The Settings feature is only available when the vehicle
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the graphic. speed is less than 5 mph.
instrument cluster display. The screen will display the
Stop/Start status. Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will Upper Left or Right
Trailer Tow — If Equipped display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the None Time Current Econ
Push and release the up or down arrow button phone is answered or ignored.
Compass Range Trip A Distance
until the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the NOTE: Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
instrument cluster display.
The call status will temporarily replace the previous Trailer Trip – Oil Pressure – Oil Temperature
media source information displayed on the screen. If Equipped If Equipped – If Equipped
When the pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will
return to the last used screen.
Upper Left or Right Lower Left and Lower Right – If Equipped • Content and Layout
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will display
Trailer Brake – Coolant Temp – Battery Voltage Coolant Oil Temperature Battery Voltage
on the windshield. When it is not selected, no dis-
If Equipped If Equipped – If Equipped Temperature
play on the windshield.
Transmission Oil Life – Transmission Oil Life
Temperature – If Equipped Temperature
If Equipped
Current Gear
Favorite Menus • Off (D)

• On (D1, D2, D3,...) 3
Speedometer Vehicle Info Performance
Odometer
Off Road Driver Assist Fuel Economy
(show/hide) – (show/hide) • No Decimal Point
If Equipped • Decimal Point
Trip Info Trailer Tow – Audio Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
(show/hide) If Equipped (show/hide) • Cancel
(show/hide) • Restore HUD ON/OFF
Messages Settings Diagnostics
(Stored) HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) — ○ Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
IF EQUIPPED ○ Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD
Left Side and Right Side – If Equipped image is split into thirds with the speed limit
NOTE:
None Range To Empty Average Econ indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the
The HUD feature Settings are available at any vehicle center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right.
Oil Temp Transmission Coolant Temp
Temp
speed. Some information like speed limit or Driver
Assist may not appear on the HUD unless your vehicle
○ Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, LaneSense, Highway Assist/
Oil Life Menu Icon is equipped Traffic Sign Assist or Driver Assist systems. Highway Assist+), Gear
Push and release the up or down arrow button
Lower Left and Lower Right – If Equipped until the Settings Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
None Time Current Econ or right arrow button until the HUD Menu icon/
Compass Range To Empty Trip A Distance title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance Push and release the OK button to enter HUD. Use the
up or down arrow button to select a setting,
Trailer Trip – Trailer Brake – If Oil Pressure then push and release the OK button to adjust the
If Equipped Equipped setting.
○ Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver

Assist (ACC/Cruise, LaneSense, Highway Assist/ WARNING!
Highway Assist+) A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
○ Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and
Assist (ACC/Cruise, LaneSense, Highway Assist/ those items that come into contact with your exhaust
Highway Assist+), Gear system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
• Display Height where your exhaust system can contact anything that
• Brightness can burn.
NOTE: Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional

maintenance required on your vehicle or engine. Refer
• The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display Height to the following messages that may be displayed on
and Non Custom layouts), are controlled through the
Advanced Mode Settings Screen in the Instrument Cluster your instrument cluster:
When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD page 95. • Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway
Speeds to Remedy — This message will be dis-
displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn naviga- • HUD custom content layout preferences can be played in the instrument cluster if the exhaust par-
tion, speed limit, driver assist function(s), and selected through your touchscreen. For more infor-
ticulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage
current gear. mation, please refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
capacity. Under conditions of exclusive short dura-
○ Custom Manual Supplement.
tion and low speed driving cycles, your diesel engine
and exhaust after-treatment system may never
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) reach the conditions required to cleanse the filter to
MESSAGES remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, the “Exhaust
Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions
Remedy” message will be displayed in the instru-
standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your
ment cluster display. If this message is displayed,
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and
you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of
exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly inte-
this condition. By simply driving your vehicle at high-
grated into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain
way speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy
Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine com-
the condition in the particulate filter system and
bustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap
allow your diesel engine and exhaust after-
and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no
treatment system to cleanse the filter to remove the
input or interaction on your part.
Custom HUD Layout trapped PM and restore the system to normal oper-
ating condition.
○ Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
○ Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
• Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process Exhaust NOTE: • Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer
Filter XX% Full — This message indicates that the Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing • Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF See
DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by Dealer
condition until regeneration is completed. 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed — This
• Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See
• filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will Dealer
message indicates that the DPF self-cleaning is shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
completed. If this message is displayed, you will and reduced engine power. Only an authorized DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)
hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this dealer will be able to correct this condition.
condition. WARNING MESSAGES
• Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now — This CAUTION! Your vehicle will begin displaying warning messages 3
messages indicates regeneration has been disabled when the DEF level reaches a driving range of approxi-
due to a system malfunction. At this point the See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust mately 500 miles (800 km). If the following warning
engine Powertrain Control Module (PCM) will regis- system could occur soon with continued operation. message sequence is ignored, your vehicle may not
ter a fault code, the instrument panel will display a restart unless DEF is added with in the displayed mile-
MIL light. age shown in the cluster message.
DISPLAYS • Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low Refill
CAUTION! When the appropriate conditions exist, the instrument Soon — This message will display when DEF driving
cluster display displays the following messages: range is less than 500 miles, DEF fluid top off is
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust required within the displayed mileage. The message
system could occur soon with continued operation. • System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle Not in Park will be displayed in the cluster during vehicle start
• System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle in Motion up with the current allowed mileage and accompa-
• Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer — • Exhaust Filter Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds To nied by a single chime. The remaining mileage can
This message indicates the PCM has derated the Remedy be pulled up anytime in the “Messages” list within
engine to limit the likelihood of permanent damage • Exhaust Filter XX% Full – Power Reduced See Dealer the instrument cluster display.
to the after-treatment system. If this condition is not • Exhaust Service Required – See Dealer Now • Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF —
corrected and a dealer service is not performed, This message will display when DEF driving range is
extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can • Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service Required less than 200 miles. It is also displayed at
See Dealer
occur. To correct this condition it will be necessary 150 miles and 100 miles. DEF fluid top off is
to have your vehicle serviced by an authorized • Exhaust System – Regeneration In Process Exhaust required within the displayed mileage. The message
dealer. Filter XX% Full will be displayed in the instrument cluster display
• Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed during vehicle start up with an updated distance
• Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low Refill mileage, and it will be accompanied by a single
Soon chime. Starting at 100 miles, remaining range will
be continuously displayed while operating the
• Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF vehicle. Chimes will also accompany the 75, 50 and
• Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF 25 mile remaining distances. The DEF Low telltale
• Service DEF System See Dealer will be on continuously until DEF fluid is topped off.
• Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF — This message If not corrected in 30 miles, vehicle will enter the accompanied by a single chime. Your Malfunction
will display when the DEF driving range is less than “Engine Will not restart in XXX mi Service DEF See Indicator Light will be continuously illuminated. If
one mile, DEF fluid top off is required or the engine dealer” warning stage and message. the message appears and you can not start the
will not restart. The message will be displayed in the • Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF See engine, we recommend having your vehicle towed to
instrument cluster display during vehicle start up, Dealer — This message is first displayed if the fault the nearest authorized dealer immediately.
and it will be accompanied by a single chime. The detected is not serviced after 50 miles of operation.
DEF Low telltale will be illuminated continuously It is also displayed at 150 miles, 125 miles and BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY
until DEF fluid tank is filled with a minimum of two
gallons of DEF.
100 miles. System service is required within the SAVER MODE MESSAGE —
displayed mileage. The message will be displayed
during vehicle start up with an updated distance ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) mileage, and it will be accompanied by a single ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
FAULT WARNING MESSAGES chime. Starting at 100 miles, remaining range will
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
be continuously displayed while operating the
There are different messages which are displayed if the vehicle. Chimes will also accompany the 75, 50 and sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
vehicle detects that the DEF system has been filled with 25 mile remaining distances. We recommend you cal system and status of the vehicle battery.
a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component drive to the nearest authorized dealer and have your In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
failures, or when tampering has been detected. vehicle serviced immediately. or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, elec-
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the follow- • Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See trical load reduction actions will take place to extend
ing warnings will display: Dealer — This message will display if DEF system the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is
• Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will issue detected is not serviced during the allowed done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential
display when the fault is initially detected and each period. Your engine will not restart unless your electrical loads.
time the vehicle is started. The message will be vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer. This Load reduction is only active when the engine is run-
accompanied by a single chime and the Malfunction message will be displayed when under 1 mile until ning. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
Indicator Light. We recommend you drive to the engine will not start and each time the vehicle is depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle started, and will be continuously displayed. The to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
serviced immediately. If not corrected in 50 miles, message will be accompanied by a single chime. current drive cycle.
vehicle will enter the “Engine Will not restart in XXX Your Malfunction Indicator Light will be continuously When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
mi Service DEF See dealer” warning stage and illumined. We highly recommend you drive to the Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power” will
message. nearest authorized dealer if the message appears appear in the instrument cluster.
• Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This message while engine is running.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
will display if the DEF system has detected the incor- • Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
rect fluid has been introduced to the DEF tank. The Dealer — This message will display when the fault at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
message will be accompanied by a single chime. We detected is not serviced after the Engine will not
recommend you drive to your nearest authorized restart Service DEF System See Dealer message is
dealer and have your vehicle serviced immediately. displayed on the next subsequent restart. Your
engine will not start unless your vehicle is serviced
by an authorized dealer. The message will be
NOTE: • The vehicle was parked for an extended period of

time (weeks, months). WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
• The charging system is independent from load • The battery was recently replaced and was not The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos-
charged completely. ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
tic on the charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi- • The battery was discharged by an electrical load left acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
on when the vehicle was parked.
cate a problem with the charging system considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
page 106. • The battery was used for an extended period with information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char-
The electrical loads that may be switched off gers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a 3
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
affected by load reduction: failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
What to do when an electrical load reduction action applicable. The system check menu may appear differ-
• Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery ent based upon equipment options and current vehicle
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors Saver Mode”) status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
• HVAC System During a trip:
• 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: RED WARNING LIGHTS
• Audio and Telematics System ○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior).
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets Air Bag Warning Light
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports. This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
the following conditions:
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature). fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electri- ○ Check the audio settings (volume). four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
cal loads are larger than the capability of charging After a trip: the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
system. The charging system is still functioning • Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single
properly. (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents). either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, • Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving dealer as soon as possible.
USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city time and parking time).
driving, towing, frequent stopping). • The vehicle should have service performed if the Brake Warning Light
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec- message is still present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern This warning light monitors various brake
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi-
did not help to identify the cause. functions, including brake fluid level and
lar devices.
parking brake application. If the brake light
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System Door Open Warning Light
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
ajar/open and not fully closed.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to NOTE:
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti- the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control approximately two seconds. The light should then turn chime.
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run light inspected by an authorized dealer.
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
Warning Light
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
may be felt during each stop. applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. This warning light will turn on when there's a
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking fault with the EPS system page 140.
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the NOTE:
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which It does not show the degree of brake application.
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master WARNING!
cylinder has dropped below a specified level. Battery Charge Warning Light
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. This warning light will illuminate when the safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE: while the engine is running, there may be a
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering malfunction with the charging system. Con-
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical Light
system or a related component.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
necessary. problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
WARNING! the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger- vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the trans-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will mission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli- turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately. your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE: Hood Open Warning Light Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped- This warning light will illuminate when the This warning light indicates when the driver
als are pressed at the same time. hood is ajar/open and not fully closed. or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is run- the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ning, immediate service is required and you may experi- ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
ence reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The NOTE: will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passen-
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single ger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly chime. Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during a chime will sound page 262.
3
starting, have the system checked by an authorized Oil Pressure Warning Light
dealer. This warning light will illuminate, and a Tailgate Open Warning Light
chime will sound, to indicate low engine oil This warning light will illuminate when the
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning pressure. If the light and chime turn on while tailgate is open.
Light driving, safely stop the vehicle and turn off
This warning light warns of an overheated the engine as soon as possible. After the vehicle is
engine condition. If the engine coolant tem- safely stopped, restart the engine and monitor the Oil
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi- Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning NOTE:
nate and a single chime will sound. If the Light is still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and con- If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous tact an authorized dealer for further assistance. Do not chime.
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. If the
able to cool, whichever comes first. lamp is no longer illuminated, the engine can be oper- Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
ated but it is recommended to take the vehicle to an Light
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is This warning light will illuminate when the
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi- engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
ately and call for service page 301. hood.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and high transmission fluid temperature. This
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait may occur with strenuous usage such as
for oil temperature to return to normal levels. trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
If Equipped comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
drive normally. This light will illuminate when a fault is function has been detected in the ESC system. If this
detected with the air suspension system. warning light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilome-
WARNING!
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans- authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the prob-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning lem diagnosed and corrected.
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact Light • The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a This warning light monitors the ABS. The Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
fire. light will turn on when the ignition is placed placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
may stay on for as long as four seconds. sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
CAUTION! If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-

then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not • This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
functioning and service is required as soon as possible. event.
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
not also on. Warning Light — If Equipped
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
If Equipped the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer. Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security Electric Park Brake Warning Light even if it was turned off previously.
system is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
This warning light will illuminate to indicate Service LaneSense Warning Light —
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
If Equipped
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS authorized dealer. This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active requires service. Please contact an autho-
Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped rized dealer.
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a This warning light will indicate when the ESC
fault in the ACC system. Contact an autho- system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
rized dealer for service page 144. the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
Low Fuel Warning Light When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert Service Forward Collision Warning
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
When the fuel level is less than a quarter
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
tank, and the Distance to Empty is less than This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
50 miles, this light will turn on and remain fault in the FCW System. Contact an autho-
soon as possible if this occurs.
on until fuel is added. rized dealer for service page 255.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning. WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced Service Stop/Start System Warning
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal Light — If Equipped 3
If Equipped operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive This warning light will illuminate when the
This warning light will illuminate when the slowly or park over flammable substances such as Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
windshield washer fluid is low. dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in and service is required. Contact an autho-
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or rized dealer for service.
others.
Service 4WD Warning Light —
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator If Equipped
Warning Light (MIL) CAUTION! This warning light will illuminate to signal a
The MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
System called OBD II that monitors engine (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control on or comes on during driving, it means that
and automatic transmission control systems. system. It also could affect fuel economy and drive- the 4WD system is not functioning properly
This warning light will illuminate when the ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter and that service is required. We recommend you drive
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate to the nearest service center and have the vehicle ser-
the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition service is required. viced immediately.
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly. Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — This warning light will illuminate to indicate
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after If Equipped the Cruise Control System is not functioning
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light properly and service is required. Contact an
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most This warning light will illuminate to indicate
authorized dealer.
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not when a rear axle locker fault has been
require towing. detected.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
CAUTION!
ure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
Warning Light tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
The warning light switches on and a mes- stopping ability. aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
pressure is lower than the recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec-
value and/or that slow pressure loss is maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
consumption may not be guaranteed. TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
above, the display will show the indications correspond- function indicator to indicate when the system is not YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
ing to each tire. operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
CAUTION! system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for Indicator Light— If Equipped
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, sion system is set to the Aerodynamic
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture setting.
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
as possible. occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the Light— If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after sion system is set to the Normal setting
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to page 133.
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.
CAUTION! Light — If Equipped
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip- This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning sion system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres-
have been established for the tire size equipped on page 133.
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check damage may result when using replacement equip-
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated (Continued)
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Cargo Light On Indicator Light — Entry/Exit Indicator Light — If Equipped
Light — If Equipped If Equipped This light will illuminate when the vehicle is
This light will illuminate when the air suspen- This indicator light will illuminate when the automatically lowered from ride height posi-
sion system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo tion downward for easy entry and exit of the
page 133. light button on the headlight switch. vehicle page 133.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light

Air Suspension Payload Protection Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off This indicator light will illuminate when TOW/
Indicator Light — If Equipped Indicator Light — If Equipped HAUL mode is selected. 3
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that the maximum payload may have been that Forward Collision Warning is off.
exceeded or load leveling cannot be
achieved at its current ride height. Protection
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
Mode will automatically be selected to “protect” the air If Equipped
suspension system, air suspension adjustment is lim- Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
ited due to payload.
Light — If Equipped when Trailer Merge Assist has been acti-
vated page 250.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if the
Indicator Light— If Equipped vehicle is low on DEF page 169.
This light will blink and alert the driver that 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
the vehicle is changing to a higher ride This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
height. NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD together forcing the front and rear wheels to
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode rotate at the same speed.
and the front and rear driveshafts are disen-
Indicator Light— If Equipped gaged from the powertrain. 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver that
the vehicle is changing to a lower ride height. Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
This light indicates when the rear axle lock driveshafts are mechanically locked together
has been activated. forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels page 130.
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped CAUTION!

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is This indicator light will illuminate when the
in the 4WD High mode. The front and rear The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may front fog lights are on.
driveshafts are mechanically locked together cause severe damage to the injection system and
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at irregular engine operation. If the indicator light is illu-
the same speed. minated, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to bleed the system. If the above indications LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Wait To Start Indicator Light — come on immediately after refuelling, water, or
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
If Equipped Adblue® UREA has probably been poured into the
tank: switch the engine off immediately and contact
solid green when both lane markings have
This indicator light will illuminate for approxi- been detected and the system is “armed”
an authorized dealer.
mately two seconds when the ignition is and ready to provide visual and torque warn-
turned to the RUN position. Its duration may ings if an unintentional lane departure occurs
page 159.
be longer based on colder operating condi- GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
tions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
longer displayed. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
This indicator light will illuminate when the
NOTE: Target Light — If Equipped parking lights or headlights are turned on.
The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the This will display when the ACC is set and a
intake manifold temperature is warm enough. vehicle in front is detected page 144.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — Turn Signal Indicator Lights

If Equipped When the left or right turn signal is activated,
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illumi-
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
nate when there is water detected in the fuel No Target Detected Indicator Light — dently and the corresponding exterior turn
filter. If this light remains on, DO NOT start If Equipped signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
the vehicle before you drain the water from activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET (left) or up (right).
the fuel filter to prevent engine damage, and please
and there is no vehicle in front detected
see an authorized dealer.
page 144. NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
ECO Mode Indicator Light driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
This light will turn on when ECO mode is
active. • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
• If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the side Cruise Control Ready Indicator BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
of the activated turn signal will also illuminate to
This indicator light will illuminate when the
provide additional light when turning.
cruise control is ready, but not set High Beam Indicator Light
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — page 142. This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
If Equipped With Premium Instrument that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
Cluster Display Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator tion lever forward (toward the front of the
This light will turn on when the cruise control Light — If Equipped vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
is set page 142. This indicator shows when the HDC feature tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to 3
is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull
HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
the transfer case is in the “4WD Low” posi- “flash to pass” scenario.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — tion and the vehicle speed is less then 20 mph
If Equipped (32 km/h). If these conditions are not met while ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
This indicator light will illuminate when the attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode light will flash on/off. Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
page 140. Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped the performance of the emissions, engine, and trans-
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not mission control systems. When these systems are oper-
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped armed, the LaneSense indicator light illumi- ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent perfor-
nates solid white. This occurs when only left, mance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is well within current government regulations.
in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and the right, or neither lane line has been detected.
front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to If any of these systems require service, the OBD II sys-
is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane tem will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses departure occurs on the detected lane line will also store diagnostic codes and other information
a loss of traction page 130. page 159. to assist your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
If Equipped With Base/Midline soon as possible.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Instrument Cluster Display
Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when the cruise control
This light will illuminate when the vehicle is set page 142.
equipped with ACC has been turned on but
not set page 144.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON

CAUTION! WARNING! position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur- ○ Access, or allow others to access, information (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
ther damage to the emission control system. It stored in your vehicle systems, including per- check.
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The sonal information. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions will happen:
tests can be performed.
○ The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
will soon occur. Immediate service is required. MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass station.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control sys- ○ The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
tem. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
For states that require an Inspection and position or start the engine. This means that
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
port to allow access to information related to the perfor- Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is function- can proceed to the I/M station.
mance of your emissions controls. Authorized service ing and is not on when the engine is running,
technicians may need to access this information to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle
and emissions system page 188. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
WARNING! replacement. If the OBD II system should be deter- system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
mined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con- the test. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle. you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the following: your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
running.
tracking device, it may: 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety not crank or start the engine.
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an NOTE:
accident involving serious injury or death. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
(Continued) this test over.
115
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! WARNING!
GASOLINE ENGINE • Do not leave children or animals inside parked • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may in a location accessible to children, and do not
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat cause serious injury or death. leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
belt. less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
DIESEL ENGINE A child could operate power windows, other con-
The starter should not be operated for more than trols, or move the vehicle.
10-second intervals. Waiting at least 10 to 15 seconds Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both
between such intervals will protect the starter from inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
4
overheating. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
The starter is allowed to crank for up to 25-second
cause serious injury or death.
intervals. Waiting at least two minutes between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
NOTE:
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the WARNING! Engine start-up in very low ambient temperature could
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove result in evident white smoke. This condition will disap-
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com- pear as the engine warms up.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to into PARK and apply the parking brake.
CAUTION!
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num- • Always make sure the ENGINE START/STOP button
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously is in the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to vehicle and vehicle is locked.
• The engine is allowed to crank as long as 25 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start during this period,
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with please wait at least two minutes for the starter to
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in cool before repeating start procedure.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of • If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO
in a location accessible to children, and do not reasons. A child or others could be seriously or NOT START engine before you drain the water from
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key- fatally injured. Children should be warned not to the fuel filter to avoid engine damage
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear page 320.
A child could operate power windows, other con- selector.
trols, or move the vehicle. (Continued)
(Continued)
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
ENGINE START/STOP button once. Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position. Position)
Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range. 3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
NOTE: 10 seconds. ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions without start-
• This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to ing the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these
interlocking system. The brake pedal must be the engine starting, push the button again. directions:
pressed to shift out of PARK. To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
Button
• If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, starting 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
Manual Park Release has been activated the ignition to the ACC position.
release the ENGINE START/STOP button. The igni-
page 302. tion will return to the OFF position. 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
TIP START FEATURE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed return the ignition to the OFF position.
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut
motor will continue to run and will automatically disen- off. The ignition will remain in the ACC position until AUTOPARK
gage when the engine is running. the gear selector is in PARK and the button is
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with plac-
pushed twice to the OFF position.
ing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE following pages occur. It is a back-up system and
IGNITION START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle should not be relied upon as the primary method by
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument clus- which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote ter will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger the engine will remain running. Never leave a outlined on the following pages.
compartment. vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: WARNING!
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP BUTTON — GASOLINE START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle • Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off
ENGINE and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
Button vehicle may AutoPark page 116. (Continued)
1. The transmission must be in PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 117
• Vehicle is not in PARK 4WD LOW — If Equipped

WARNING!
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle
display and near the gear selector. If the “P” indi-
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled in 4WD LOW.
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an The message “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
added precaution, always apply the parking brake • Driver’s door is ajar the instrument cluster.
when exiting the vehicle. • Brake pedal is not pressed Additional customer warnings will be given when all of
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not The message “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift
these conditions are met:
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
into PARK. It is a back up system and should not • Vehicle is not in PARK
be relied upon as the primary method by which the NOTE: • Driver’s door is ajar
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
in the instrument cluster, causing the “ AutoPark
• Vehicle is in 4WD LOW
Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” message to not The message “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis-
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
be seen. In these cases, the gear selector must be played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will 4
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
returned to “P” to select desired gear.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are driver’s door is closed.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
met:
may AutoPark. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster
8-speed transmission display and near the gear selector. As an added precau-
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
• Vehicle is not in PARK tion, always apply the parking brake when exiting the
The message “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P” vehicle.
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
• Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
NOTE: If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine WARNING! “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
position. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle there while the engine is cranking. This should clear
automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
OFF. in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added pre- The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the caution, always apply the parking brake when exiting 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may the vehicle. release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait
AutoPark. 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are procedure.
met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
8-speed transmission
WARNING!
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
START/STOP BUTTON — DIESEL
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the NOTE:
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to ENGINE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire Observe the instrument panel telltales when starting obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
causing serious personal injury. the engine. pedal.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic NOTE:
Button
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
the engine has started, ignite and damage the con- pedal. release the ENGINE START/STOP button. The igni-
verter and vehicle. To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP tion will return to the OFF position.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster Button 2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
cables may be used to obtain a start from a START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp- 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut
erly page 299. ENGINE START/STOP button once. off. The ignition will remain in the ACC position until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button is
NOTE:
pushed twice to the OFF position.
A delay of the start, up to five seconds is possible
CAUTION! under very cold conditions. The Wait to Start telltale 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the will be illuminated during the pre-heat process. START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 When the engine Wait To Start light goes off the speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument clus-
to 15 seconds before trying again. engine will automatically crank. ter will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and
the engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but CAUTION!
not have enough power to continue running when the NOTE:
ignition button/key is released. If this occurs, continue If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO
NOT START the engine before you drain the water If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the igni- from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage
page 320. speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off
tion button/key once the engine is running smoothly. and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 sec- vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
ond period of engine cranking with the accelerator 3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to vehicle may AutoPark page 116.
pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then start, the starter will disengage automatically after
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. 25 seconds.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL WARNING! module. Glow plug heater operation can run for several
Position) minutes, once the heater operation is complete the
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked voltmeter needle will stabilize.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and cause serious injury or death.
ON/RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C)
wireless ignition node is in the OFF position,
directions: remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the may require special considerations. The following
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position. vehicle. charts suggest these options:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
Fuel Operating Range
the ignition to the ACC position. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time NOTE: 4
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position. or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
return the ignition to the OFF position. selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
COLD WEATHER OPERATION in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C) less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use A child could operate power windows, other con-
of an externally powered electric engine block heater trols, or move the vehicle.
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE

The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up. Observe the following when the diesel engine is
operating.
STARTING FLUIDS — DIESEL • All message center lights are off.
ENGINE ONLY • Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off. Fuel Operating Range Chart
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating • Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
system. If the instructions in this manual are followed, • Voltmeter operation: *Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where
extended arctic conditions below (0°F/-18°C) exist.
the engine should start in all conditions and no type of The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various
starting fluid should be used. engine temperatures. This is caused by the glow plug
heating system. The number of cycles and the length of
NOTE: Winter Front Cover Engine Warm-Up

• Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD Fuel Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold.
results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to
operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabi-
• Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number 2 ULSD lize as the engine warms up.
and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which reduces the tem-
perature at which wax crystals form in fuel. If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the
engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before full
• The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the loads are applied.
pump at the fuel station.
• The engine requires the use of ULSD Fuel. Use of ENGINE IDLING
incorrect fuel could result in engine and exhaust Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may be
system damage page 367. harmful to your engine because combustion chamber
temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not
• If Climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD Fuel is not burn completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon
available, and you are operating below (20°F/-6°C), Winter Front Cover
in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium and varnish to form on piston rings, cylinder head
Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recom- valves, turbochargers, and injector nozzles. Also, the
A Winter front or cold weather cover can be used in unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
mended to avoid gelling (see Fuel Operating Range ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C), especially
Chart). and causing rapid wear to the engine.
during extended idle conditions. This cover is equipped
with four flaps for managing total grille opening in vary-
Engine Oil Usage ing ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold
STOPPING THE ENGINE
For the correct engine oil viscosity page 371. weather cover is to be used the flaps should be in the After full load operation, idle the engine for a few min-
full open position to allow air flow to the cooling module utes before shutting it down. This idle period will allow
and automatic transmission oil cooler. When ambient the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away
temperatures drop below 0°F (-17°C) the four flaps from the turbocharger. Refer to the following chart for
need to be closed. A suitable cold weather cover is proper engine shutdown.
available from a Mopar® dealer.
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shut-
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
down
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shut-

Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
down
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine Stop/Start func- CAUTION! ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
tionality may be temporarily disabled and the engine If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut
fan will run after the engine is turned off to protect the the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could
engine. These conditions are under high load and high result in immediate and severe engine damage.
temperature conditions.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed 4
Pressure Parts
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Light turns on while All engine failures give some warning before the parts
driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the engine as fail. Some important observations are:
soon as possible. After the vehicle is safely stopped,
restart the engine and monitor the lamp. If the lamp is • Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
still illuminated, shut the engine off, contact an autho- • Sudden loss of power
rized dealer, and do not operate the vehicle until the • Unusual engine noises
cause is corrected. If the lamp is no longer illuminated, • Fuel, oil or coolant leaks Engine Block Heater Cord Location
the engine can be operated, but should be taken to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible for further • Sudden change, outside the normal operating The engine block heater warms engine coolant and per-
range, in the engine operating temperature mits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the heater
inspection.
• Excessive smoke cord to a ground-fault interrupter protected 110–115
NOTE: • Oil pressure drop Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. extension cord.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. For diesel engines, its use is recommended for environ-
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. ments that routinely fall below -10°F (-23°C). It should
be used when the vehicle has not been running for long
periods of time and should be plugged in two hours
prior to start. Its use is required for cold starts with tem-
peratures under -20°F (-28°C).
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood NOTE: NOTE:
on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the engine A new engine may consume some oil during its first few NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST
coolant reservoir. thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should NEVER BE USED.
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
WARNING! interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level
with the engine oil indicator often during the break-in PARKING BRAKE
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater period. Add oil as required.
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt elec-
trical cord could cause electrocution.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — DIESEL ENGINE parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
The diesel engine does not require a break-in period vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
— GASOLINE ENGINE due to its construction. Normal operation is allowed,
providing the following recommendations are followed:
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
• Warm up the engine before placing it under load. You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
• Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged • Manually, by applying the parking brake switch.
periods.
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature • Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. ture in the Customer Programmable Features sec-
indicators. tion of the Uconnect settings.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. • Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. The parking brake switch is located on the instrument
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- • Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carry- panel to the left of the steering wheel (below the head-
mental and should be avoided. ing or towing significant weight. lamp switch).
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a NOTE:
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
load operation will extend the time before the engine is
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
be seen at this time.
page 371.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
CAUTION! changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
the engine or damage may result. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
page 371.
The parking brake will release automatically when the

ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, WARNING!
the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
to drive away. or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot selector.
on the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
down momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring in a location accessible to children, and do not
sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
brake disengages. You may also notice a small amount Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
of movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking operate power windows, other controls, or move
brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the the vehicle.
Electric Park Brake Switch instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch 4
will extinguish. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the failure and a collision.
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight sound from NOTE:
the back of the vehicle while the parking brake When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
engages. Once the park brake is fully engaged, the wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster and an from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other- PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake, you wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism and cause damage or injury.
may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
The parking brake can be applied even when the igni- PARK.
tion switch is OFF but the BRAKE telltale light will not CAUTION!
illuminate, however, it can only be released when the WARNING!
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
NOTE: parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch is when parked to guard against vehicle movement an authorized dealer immediately.
held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released and possible injury or damage.
or applied position. The light will extinguish upon If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
releasing the switch.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE tell-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
sion is placed into PARK. If your foot is on the brake tale light will illuminate, and a continuous chime will
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
(Continued) automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
movement while the parking brake is engaging.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in SafeHold Service Mode has requirements that must be met in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a order to be activated:
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
complete stop using the parking brake, when the • The vehicle must be at a standstill.
(EPB) system that will engage the parking brake auto-
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the
parking brake will remain engaged.
matically if the vehicle is left unsecured while the igni- • The parking brake must be unapplied.
tion is in ON/RUN. • The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of the While in Service Mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
WARNING! following conditions are met: continuously while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or • The vehicle is at a standstill. When brake service work is complete, the following
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle, • There is no attempt to press the brake pedal and steps must be followed to reset the park brake system
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be accelerator pedal. to normal operation:
sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driv-
ing; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a • The seat belt is unbuckled. • Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
collision. • The driver door is open. • Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the • Apply the EPB Switch.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB sys- EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once manu-
ally bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the
tem, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This may be WARNING!
accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light flashing. In this vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is
event, urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do turned to the OFF position and back to ON again. You can be badly injured working on or around a
not rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
stationary. Brake Service Mode have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
Auto Park Brake authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed to be which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
applied automatically whenever the vehicle is at a You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
standstill and the automatic transmission is placed in
PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by cus-
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
tomer selection through the Customer Programmable for you or your technician to push the rear piston into You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
Features section of the Uconnect Settings the rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake (EPB) out of PARK.
page 199. system, this can only be done after retracting the EPB
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed WARNING!
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through the
the transmission is placed in PARK. Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu-based
system will guide you through the steps necessary to
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
service. movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
NOTE:
WARNING! WARNING!
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the igni-
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with tion is in the ACC position (even though the engine will
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num- the ignition is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously the vehicle.
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle. or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans- BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
mission gear selector.
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
that the transmission gear position indicator sol- in a location accessible to children), and do not
idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the child could operate power windows, other controls,
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal
4
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting or move the vehicle.
the vehicle. must be pressed.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
CAUTION!
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the stopped or moving at low speeds.
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and ing precautions are not observed: 8-SPEED AUTOMATIC
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the TRANSMISSION
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Rotary Shifter — If Equipped
firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
gear selector located on the instrument panel. The
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmis-
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK sion out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple
vehicle against unwanted movement. which requires the transmission to be in PARK before gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the igni-
(Continued) tion is in the OFF position.
NOTE: position indicator will blink continuously until the

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector selector is returned to the proper position, or the
position and the actual transmission gear (for example, requested shift can be completed.
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
the proper position, or the requested shift can be ronmental and road conditions.
completed. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi- stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
ronmental and road conditions. The transmission elec- when shifting between these gears.
tronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and SPORT (S) (AutoStick) shift
normal condition, and precision shifts will develop Electronic Transmission Gear Selector positions. Manual shifts can be made using the
within a few hundred miles (kilometers). AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector for-
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the Console Shifter — If Equipped ward (-) or rearward (+) while in the SPORT (AutoStick)
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is The transmission gear range is displayed both beside position (beside the DRIVE position), or tapping the
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To paddle shifters (+/-) (if equipped), will manually select
when shifting between these gears. select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear the transmission gear, and will display the current gear
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To in the instrument cluster page 128.
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the engine must
downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You
Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL
“+” switches (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE (N) into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is
position will select the highest available transmission stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE
gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument range for normal driving.
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. page 128. Some models will
NOTE:
display both the selected gear limit, and the actual cur-
rent gear, while in ERS mode. • The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few hun-
dred miles (kilometers). Gear Selector
• In the event of a mismatch between the gear selec-
tor position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the
NOTE: • Turn the engine off. WARNING!

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, • Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission CAUTION!
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE posi- or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can have a collision.
tion) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. damage the drivetrain.
Gear Ranges • Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press CAUTION!
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. selector could result. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause 4
NOTE: severe transmission damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow For Recreational Towing page 184.
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
PARK position: For Towing A Disabled Vehicle page 303.
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P) • Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is DRIVE (D)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking not blinking.
the transmission. The engine can be started in this This range should be used for most city and highway
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in • With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
selector will not move out of PARK. shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range. REVERSE (R) automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau- REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill stop. tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. NEUTRAL (N) while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or
use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
NOTE: longed periods with the engine running. Apply the park-
select a lower gear range page 128. Under these
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer conditions, using a lower gear range will improve perfor-
ing brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
case is in a drive position. must exit the vehicle. sive shifting and heat buildup.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

below), transmission operation may be modified
5. Restart the engine.
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suit- no longer detected, the transmission will return to
able level. normal operation.
Transmission Limp Home Mode NOTE:

Transmission function is monitored electronically for Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest pos-
could result in transmission damage, Transmission sible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the trans- equipment to assess the condition of your transmis-
mission may operate only in certain gears, or may not sion. If the transmission cannot be reset, an authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
Electronic Range Select (ERS) 1 — Shift Up “+”
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Operation — If Equipped 2 — Shift Down “–”
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instru- The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the high- To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the “+” button
ment cluster will inform the driver of the more serious est available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE until the gear limit display disappears from the instru-
conditions, and indicate what actions may be and ERS mode is not active. For example, if you set the ment cluster.
necessary. transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmis-
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission sion will hold that gear and not shift above FOURTH
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally. WARNING!
the following steps: Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
NOTE:
NOTE: slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
ERS will only upshift during a FIRST to SECOND gear
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
In cases where the instrument cluster message indi- shift when in 4WD LOW. All other ranges will hold the
personal injury.
cates the transmission may not re-engage after engine gear.
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer). vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is AutoStick — If Equipped
1. Stop the vehicle. in DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically,
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the “-”
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, providing manual shift control, giving you more control
button (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
turns off. mode, tapping the “-” or “+” button will change the top
available gear.
can also provide you with more control during passing, • The transmission will automatically downshift to WARNING!
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
trailer towing, and many other situations. driver should manually upshift “+” the transmission Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
as the vehicle is accelerated. slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
• You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
gear (or THIRD gear, in 4WD LOW). Tapping “+” (at a personal injury.
stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out
in SECOND or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions. When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to Select TOW/HAUL mode when driving in conditions
overspeed, that shift will not occur. such as: driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low heavy load, etc. This mode will improve performance
of a vehicle speed. and reduce the potential for transmission overheating 4
or failure due to excessive shifting.
• Holding the “-” paddle pressed, or holding the gear
selector in the “-” position, will downshift the trans-
Paddle Shifters mission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
1 — “-” Paddle
2 — “+” Paddle
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
Operation • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a

fault or overheat condition is detected.
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the
SPORT position), or the paddle shifters, to manually NOTE:
shift the transmission. To activate AutoStick mode, When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled,
move the gear selector into the SPORT (S) position AutoStick is not active.
(beside the DRIVE position), or tap one of the paddle To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the
shifters on the steering wheel. Tapping the “-” shift DRIVE position, or press and hold the “+” paddle shifter TOW/HAUL Switch
paddle to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the trans- (and the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until "D" is
mission to the next lower gear, while tapping “+” to once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The shift in or out of AutoStick at any time without taking instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
current transmission gear will be displayed in the your foot off the accelerator pedal. has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time
instrument cluster. restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
AutoStick mode has the following operational benefits: the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pushed each time the
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the engine is started.
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four

WARNING! positions: WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving in icy • Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This range is vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK.
or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking for normal street and highway driving on dry hard The parking brake should always be applied when
can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have the driver is not in the vehicle.
swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control, greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is • The transmission may not engage PARK if the
which may cause an accident possibly resulting in not engaged in 2WD. vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
personal injury or death. • Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) — This complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
range provides torque to the front driveshaft that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
(engages four-wheel drive) which allows front and idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — rear wheels to spin at the same speed. This pro-
vides additional traction for loose or slippery road PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
surfaces only. the vehicle.
IF EQUIPPED • Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) — This
range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maxi-
NOTE:
FOUR-POSITION ELECTRONICALLY mizes torque (increased torque over 4WD HIGH) to
SHIFTED TRANSFER CASE — the front driveshaft; allowing front and rear wheels • The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
to rotate at the same speed. This range provides designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driv-
IF EQUIPPED additional traction and maximum pulling power for ing in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions on
loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated
25 mph (40 km/h) in this range. wear and damage to the driveline components.
by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch),
located on the instrument panel. • N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front • The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located in
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed
used for flat towing behind another vehicle by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The trans-
page 184. fer case N (Neutral) position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only page 184.
WARNING! Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD HIGH
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in
the N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging and indicate the current and desired transfer case
the parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) selection. When you select a different transfer case
position disengages both the front and rear drive position, the indicator lights will do the following:
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the 1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
(Continued)
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case 2. The selected position indicator light will flash until
the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the NOTE: FIVE-POSITION ELECTRONICALLY
selected position will stop flashing and remain on. Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
If the transfer case does not shift into the desired posi- rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to SHIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
tion, one or more of the following events may occur: driveline components. IF EQUIPPED
1. The indicator light for the current position will When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated
remain on. speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch),
4WD HIGH positions at a given road speed. Take care which is located on the instrument panel.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con- not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
tinue to flash. (40 km/h).
3. If the transfer case will not shift, a message will Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
appear on the cluster stating the 4WD shift has on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
canceled. wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the drivetrain. 4
NOTE: Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
case position have been met. To retry the selection,
push the current position, wait five seconds, and retry Shifting Procedure
selection.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have not been met, then the transfer Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on case will not shift. The position indicator light for the
after engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it previous position will remain on and the newly
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function- selected position indicator light will continue to flash
ing properly and that service is required. until all the requirements for the selected position
have been met.
WARNING! • If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, then the current position
Always engage the parking brake when powering indicator light will turn off and the selected position
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is indicator light will flash until the transfer case com-
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may pletes the shift. When the shift is complete, the
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal position indicator light for the selected position will
injury or death. stop flashing and remain on.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — GT Models

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
positions: WARNING! The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD HIGH,
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This range is • You or others could be injured or killed if you leave 4WD LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instru-
for normal street and highway driving on dry hard the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in ment cluster and indicate the current and desired
surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have the N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging transfer case selection. When you select a different
greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is the parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the
not engaged in 2WD. position disengages both the front and rear drive following:
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO) shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the 1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
— This range sends power to the front wheels auto- vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK.
matically when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. The parking brake should always be applied when 2. The selected position indicator light will flash until
This range may be used during varying road the driver is not in the vehicle. the transfer case completes the shift.
conditions. • The transmission may not engage PARK if the 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
• Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) — This vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a selected position will stop flashing and remain on.
range provides torque to the front driveshaft complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify If the transfer case does not shift into the desired posi-
(engages four-wheel drive) which allows front and that the transmission gear position indicator sol- tion, one or more of the following events may occur:
rear wheels to spin at the same speed. This pro- idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
vides additional traction for loose or slippery road that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the 1. The indicator light for the current position will
surfaces only. PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting remain on.
the vehicle.
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) — This 2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maxi- tinue to flash.
mizes torque (increased torque over 4WD HIGH) to NOTE: 3. If the transfer case will not shift, there will be a clus-
the front driveshaft; allowing front and rear wheels
ter message stating the 4WD shift has canceled.
to rotate at the same speed. This range provides • The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
additional traction and maximum pulling power for designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driv- NOTE:
loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed ing in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions on dry Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
25 mph (40 km/h) in this range. hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
• N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and damage to the driveline components. case position have been met. To retry the selection,
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle
• The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located in push the current position, wait five seconds, and retry
selection.
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed
page 184. by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The trans- The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic
fer case N (Neutral) position is to be used for recre- shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
ational towing only page 184. after engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Shifting Procedure
Always engage the parking brake when powering
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have not been met, then the transfer
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is case will not shift. The position indicator light for the
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may previous position will remain on and the newly
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal selected position indicator light will continue to flash
injury or death. until all the requirements for the selected position
have been met.
NOTE: • If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, then the current position
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
indicator light will turn off and the selected position
rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
indicator light will flash until the transfer case com-
driveline components.
pletes the shift. When the shift is complete, the Air Suspension Switch 4
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine position indicator light for the selected position will
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, stop flashing and remain on. 1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer Selectable)
4WD AUTO or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road 2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer Selectable)
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do 3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR 4 — Aero Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends 5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to • Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
the drivetrain. 2 inches [51 mm]) – This position is intended for
DESCRIPTION off-road use only where maximum ground clearance
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
The air suspension system provides full-time load- is required. To enter OR2, push the height selector
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
leveling capability along with the benefit of being able switch up twice from the NRH position or once from
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
to adjust vehicle height by using the toggle switch. the OR1 position while vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height
will be automatically lowered to OR1. Off-Road
2 may not be available due to vehicle payload, an
instrument cluster message will be displayed when
this occurs page 95.
between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) Entry/Exit change will be canceled. To return to Nor-
CAUTION! for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed mal Height Mode, push the height selector switch
If the vehicle is in Off-Road 1 or Off-Road 2 setting, be falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). up once while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over
aware of your surroundings, you may not have the 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
clearance required for certain areas and vehicle dam- NOTE:
age may occur. ○ Automatic Aero mode will be disabled if a trailer
is detected to prevent shifting loads. Entry/Exit Height may be achieved using the Remote
○ Speed thresholds for raising/lowering the vehicle Lowering feature on your key fob for easier entry/
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately automatically at higher speeds only apply if Auto- loading page 17.
1 inch [26 mm]) – This position should be the pri- matic Aero Mode is enabled in your Uconnect
mary position for all off-road driving until Off-Road 2 Radio settings.
(OR2) is needed. A smoother and more comfortable CAUTION!
To enter Aero Height manually push the height
ride will result. To enter OR1, push the height selec- When in Entry/Exit Height, be aware of your surround-
selector switch down once from NRH at any vehicle
tor switch up once from the NRH position while the ings, you may not have the clearance required for
speed. To return to NRH push the height selector
vehicle speed is below 35 mph (56 km/h). When in certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
switch up once while vehicle speed is less than
the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains
56 mph (90 km/h).
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h)
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed The system requires that the ignition be in the ON/RUN
NOTE: position or the engine running for all user requested
exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be auto-
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through changes. When lowering the vehicle, all of the doors
matically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may not be
vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while
available due to vehicle payload, an instrument clus-
page 95 or through your Uconnect Radio the vehicle is lowering, the change will not be com-
ter message will be displayed when this occurs
(if equipped) page 188. pleted until the open door(s) is closed.
page 95.
• Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
2 inches [51 mm]) – This position lowers the vehicle keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lower- oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of
driving.
ing the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When
• Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the height lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and
0.6 inch [15 mm]) – This position provides selector switch down once from the NRH while the then the rear.
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle speed is below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the
vehicle will automatically enter Automatic Aero After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the
Mode when the vehicle speed remains between air suspension system operates briefly; this is normal.
vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle
62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to
speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed ensure a proper appearance.
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or
exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains system has a feature which allows the automatic level-
ing to be disabled page 95.
NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system
• Default Ride Height: has a feature which will put the vehicle into Aero Height
MESSAGES
○ Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the automatically at higher speeds page 95. When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
default for all vehicle speeds and operation. This
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle appear in the instrument cluster display page 95.
is the selected height that the suspension will
level for speed changes (e.g. raising from Entry/ settings in the Uconnect Radio (if equipped) An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
Exit Height at speed, lowering from Off-Road page 188. has been detected.
Height at speed, etc.). Tire Jack Mode See an authorized dealer for system service if normal
○ Default ride height can be changed by manually To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension sys- operation does not resume.
adjusting the Air Suspension switch to Normal tem has a feature which allows the automatic leveling
Ride Height or Aero Ride Height and staying in to be disabled page 188. OPERATION
the selected height for 2.5 seconds. It will be
Transport Mode 4
stored as the default ride height and the height
will be maintained until a new default ride For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road,
height is selected. the air suspension system has a feature which will put
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/ the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the auto-
disabling of air suspension features must be done matic load leveling system page 188.
through the radio page 188. Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must
WARNING! be enabled which will put the vehicle into NRH and dis-
able automatic leveling page 188.
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol- Protection Strategy
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see an authorized In order to protect the air suspension system, the
dealer for service. vehicle will disable load leveling as required (suspen-
sion overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling Air Suspension Switch
will automatically resume as soon as system operation
AIR SUSPENSION MODES requirements are met. See an authorized dealer if sys- The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to show
tem does not resume. the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
The air suspension system has multiple modes to pro- lamps will show a position which the system is working
tect the system in unique situations. The engine should NOTE: to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
be running to change between Air Suspension Modes. For towing with air suspension page 172. flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the posi-
tion the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indica-
tor lamp is the position the system is working to
achieve.
Pushing the height selector up once will move the sus- below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash
pension one position higher from the current position, and indicator lamp 5 will remain solid until Entry/
assuming all conditions are met (i.e., ignition in Exit is achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will
ON/RUN position, engine running, speed below thresh- turn off.
old, etc.). The height selector switch can be pushed up • Automatic Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4 will
multiple times, each push will raise the requested level be illuminated.
by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the
highest position allowed based on current conditions • Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the
(i.e., vehicle speed, etc.).
vehicle or disabling in the Uconnect settings.
Pushing the height selector down once will move the
suspension one position lower from the current level, • Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 1 will be
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving
assuming all conditions are met (i.e., ignition in
the vehicle or disabling in the Uconnect settings.
ON/RUN position, engine running, doors closed, speed Rebel Air Suspension Controls
below threshold, etc.). The height selector switch can • Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3, 4, and
be pushed down multiple times, each push will lower 5 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is dis-
abled by driving the vehicle or disabling in the 1 — Off-Road Indicator (Customer Selectable)
the requested level by one position down to a minimum
Uconnect settings. 2 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)
of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position allowed based 3 — Aero Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)
on current conditions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.). 4 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR
• Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approximately
lamps and instrument cluster display messages will
operate the same for automatic changes and user
SUSPENSION SYSTEM (OFF-ROAD 1 inch [26 mm]) – This position is intended for off-
roading use only where maximum ground clearance
requested changes. GROUP) — IF EQUIPPED is required. To enter OR, push the height selector
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3, 2 and switch up once from the NRH position while vehicle
1 will be illuminated. speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR, if
DESCRIPTION the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3 and vehicle height will be automatically lowered to NRH.
2 will be illuminated. The air suspension system provides full-time load-
leveling capability along with the benefit of being able Off-Road may not be available due to vehicle pay-
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 5, to adjust vehicle height by using the toggle switch. load, an instrument cluster display message will be
4 and 3 will be illuminated.
shown when this occurs page 95.
• Aero Height– Indicator lamps 5 and 4 will be
illuminated.
• Entry/Exit – Indicator lamp 5 will be illuminated.
Entry/Exit can be requested up to 33 mph
(53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept
CAUTION!
• Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which
vehicle settings on your Uconnect Radio. keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware of your • Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of
surroundings, you may not have the clearance 3 inches [73 mm]) – This position lowers the the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When
required for certain areas and vehicle damage may vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and
occur. as lowering the vehicle for easier loading and then the rear.
unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
the height selector switch down twice from the NRH air suspension system operates briefly; this is normal.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph (53 km/h). The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving. Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph ensure a proper appearance.
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
• Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
0.6 inches [15 mm]) – This position provides system has a feature which allows the automatic level-
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than ing to be disabled page 188. 4
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
vehicle will automatically enter Automatic Aero (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be canceled. NOTE:
Mode when the vehicle speed remains between To return to Normal Height Mode, push the height
62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for selector switch up twice while in Entry/Exit or drive • Default Ride Height:
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit ○ Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the
exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return Height may not be available due to vehicle payload, default for all vehicle speeds and operation. This
to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains an instrument cluster display message will be is the selected height that the suspension will
between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) shown when this occurs page 95. level for speed changes (e.g. raising from Entry/
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed Exit Height at speed, lowering from Off-Road
falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). Height at speed, etc.).
CAUTION! ○ Default ride height can be changed by manually
NOTE: adjusting the Air Suspension switch to Normal
When in Entry/Exit Height, be aware of your surround-
Ride Height or Aero Ride Height and staying in
• Automatic Aero mode will be disabled if a trailer is ings, you may not have the clearance required for
the selected height for 2.5 seconds. It will be
detected to prevent shifting loads. certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
stored as the default ride height and the height
• Speed thresholds for raising or lowering the vehicle The system requires that the ignition be in the ON/RUN
will be maintained until a new default ride
only apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled height is selected.
through vehicle settings on your Uconnect Radio. position or the engine running for all user requested If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
changes. When lowering the vehicle, all of the doors disabling of air suspension features must be done
• To enter Aero Height manually push the height must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while through the radio page 188.
selector switch down once from NRH at any vehicle the vehicle is lowering, the change will not be com-
speed. To return to NRH push the height selector pleted until the open door(s) is closed.
switch up once while vehicle speed is less than
56 mph (90 km/h).
Protection Strategy The indicator lamps 1 through 4 will illuminate to show

WARNING! the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
In order to protect the air suspension system, the
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol- vehicle will disable load leveling as required (suspen- lamps will show a position which the system is working
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal sion overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling to achieve. When raising or lowering, the flashing indi-
injury or damage to the system, see an authorized will automatically resume as soon as system operation cator lamp is the position the system is working to
dealer for service. requirements are met. See an authorized dealer if sys- achieve.
tem does not resume. Pushing the height selector switch up once will move
the suspension one position higher from the current
AIR SUSPENSION MODES NOTE: position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e., key in
For towing with air suspension page 172. ON/RUN position, engine running, speed below thresh-
The air suspension system has multiple modes to pro- old, etc.). The height selector switch can be pushed up
tect the system in unique situations: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY multiple times, each push will raise the requested level
Automatic Aero Mode by one position up to a maximum position of OR or the
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system
MESSAGES highest position allowed based on current conditions
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Aero height When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.).
automatically at higher speeds page 95. appear in the instrument cluster display page 95. Pushing the height selector switch down once will move
Tire Jack Mode An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error the suspension one position lower from the current
has been detected. level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e., key in
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension sys-
tem has a feature which allows the automatic leveling See an authorized dealer for system service if normal ON/RUN position, engine running, doors closed, speed
to be disabled page 188. operation does not resume. below threshold, etc.). The height selector switch can
be pushed down multiple times, each push will lower
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road,
OPERATION the requested level by one position down to a minimum
of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position allowed based
the air suspension system has a feature which will put on current conditions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.).
the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the auto- Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
matic load leveling system page 188. speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator
Wheel Alignment Mode lamps and instrument cluster display messages will
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must operate the same for automatic changes and user
be enabled which moves the vehicle to normal ride requested changes.
height and disables the automatic leveling • Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4, 3, 2, and
page 188. 1 will be illuminated.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 4, 3,
and 2 will be illuminated.
• Aero Height– Indicator lamps 4 and 3 will be
illuminated.
Air Suspension Switch
• Entry/Exit – Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated. Operating in 4WD LOW the locker can be engaged up to
Entry/Exit can be requested up to 33 mph 40 mph (64 km/h) and will remain engaged throughout
(53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept the 4WD LOW speed range.
below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 will flash Operating the locker in 2WD, 4WD AUTO, and 4WD
and indicator lamp 4 will remain solid until Entry/ LOCK/HIGH, the locker can be engaged up to 20 mph
Exit is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will (32 km/h). While driving with the locker engaged, if
turn off. speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h), the locker will auto-
• Automatic Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4 will matically disengage, but will automatically re-engage at
be illuminated. 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
NOTE:
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle or disabling through the Uconnect settings. Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary
to allow the rear axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 1 will be AXLE LOCK Button
flashing after selecting the rear axle lock mode, drive
4
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the
the vehicle or disabling through the Uconnect CAUTION! locking action.
settings.
The axle locker could become torque locked due to side
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 2, 3, and • Do not lock the rear axle on hard surfaced roads.
to side loads on the rear axle. Driving slowly while turn-
4 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is dis- The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and dam-
age to the drivetrain may occur when the axle is ing the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right
abled by driving the vehicle or disabling through the
locked on hard surfaced roads. hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance
Uconnect settings.
may be required to release the torque lock and unlock
• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is the axles.
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can damage
AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED drivetrain components. Lock the rear axle before To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK button.
attempting situations or navigating terrain, which The AXLE LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically locking axle is unlocked.
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
rear differential. When engaged, this differential locks
the axle shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal
rate. The locking of the rear differential should only be The locking rear axle is controlled by the AXLE LOCK
button.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL —
engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the Under normal driving conditions, the rear axle should IF EQUIPPED
ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with be unlocked.
the differentials locked on pavement due to the The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
During the command to lock the rear axle, the indicator
reduced ability to turn and speed limitations. on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
light will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock
there is a difference between the traction characteris-
command has been successfully executed, the light will
tics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels.
remain on solid.
During normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip
unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the NOTE:
slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is This system may take some time to return to full func-
more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. tionality after a battery disconnect.
better traction. If the steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a instrument cluster screen, this indicates an over tem- STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator perature condition in the power steering system. Once The Stop/Start function, included with eTorque
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle equipped vehicles, is developed to save fuel and reduce
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn emissions. The system will stop the engine automati-
slight momentary application of the parking brake may off page 95. cally as the vehicle decelerates at low speeds if the
be necessary to gain maximum traction. If the steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal
POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed or shifting out of DRIVE will automatically restart the
WARNING! on the instrument cluster screen, this indicates the engine.
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service Vehicles equipped with eTorque contain a heavy-duty
When servicing vehicles equipped with a limited-slip page 95. motor generator and an additional hybrid electric bat-
or locking differential, never run the engine with one
NOTE: tery to store energy from vehicle deceleration used to
rear wheel off the ground as the vehicle may drive
expand engine off energy storage and for engine
through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and
result in unintended movement. • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer startup after a stop, as well as providing engine torque
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. assist when conditions are met to enable this.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations
when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds AUTOSTOP MODE
and during parking maneuvers.
could cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a • If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START
road or in a turn. for service. NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed
greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). At that time, the system
will go into STOP/START READY and if all other condi-
POWER STEERING FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES tions are met, the system may go into STOP/START
AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ONLY — IF EQUIPPED To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting Occur:
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverabil- off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load 1. The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
ity. The power steering system adapts to different driv- and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
ing conditions. driver inputs or additional driving skills required. the instrument cluster within the Stop/Start section
page 95.
2. The vehicle must be decelerating and likely coming • TOW/HAUL mode is selected Conditions That Force An Automatic Shift To Park
to a complete stop. While In Autostop Mode
• Accelerator pedal input
3. The transmission gear selector must be in DRIVE • Excessive 12 Volt loads The engine will not start automatically and the trans-
and the brake pedal pressed. mission will be placed in PARK if:
• Brake application is adequate to obtain and main-
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to tain a stop • The driver door is open and brake pedal released
the zero position and the stop/start telltale will illumi- It may be possible to operate the vehicle several con- • The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is
nate indicating you are in an Autostop. While in an secutive times in extreme conditions and not meet all unbuckled
Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automati- criteria to enable an Autostop state. • The engine hood has been opened
cally adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer
settings will be maintained upon return to an engine TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN • A Stop/Start system error is present
running condition. The engine may then be restarted by moving the trans-
AUTOSTOP MODE mission shift selector out of PARK (e.g., to DRIVE) or, in
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the brake
some cases, only by a key start. The instrument cluster 4
will display a “SHIFT OUT OF PARK” message, or a
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed and
“STOP/START KEY START REQUIRED” message, to indi-
the transmission will automatically reengage upon
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many cate which action is required page 95.
engine restart.
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto- TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
In following situations, the engine will not Autostop:
matically While In Autostop Mode
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled The engine will start automatically when:
STOP/START SYSTEM
• Driver’s door is not closed • The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to
• The vehicle is on a steep grade REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or PARK
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an • To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC
acceptable cabin temperature has not been settings
achieved
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower • 12 Volt demand requires engine restart
speed
• Engine has not reached normal operating • Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
temperature • Transfer case is in 4WD LOW
• Engine or exhaust temperature is too high • The emissions system override is present
• The battery is charging • A Stop/Start system error is present
• The transmission is not in DRIVE
Stop/Start OFF Switch
• Hood is open
• Transfer case is in 4WD LOW
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch

bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
“STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and the Autostop mode will be dis- IF EQUIPPED
abled page 95.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
NOTE: system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON • Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
position every time the ignition is turned OFF and back preset speed.
ON. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE with the vehicle ahead.
STOP/START SYSTEM NOTE: Cruise Control Buttons
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off. • In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled, 1 — SET (+)/Accel
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles 2 — CANC/Cancel
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the fea-
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION ture selected.
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the 5 — RES/Resume
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE • Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
instrument cluster display page 105.
and vice versa. WARNING!
The system will need to be checked by an authorized
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
dealer. CRUISE CONTROL cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelera- go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
tor operations at speeds greater than 20 mph trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
(32 km/h). in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
To Activate U.S. Speed (mph) The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
• Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subse- normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster dis-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
play will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
1 mph. Control.
on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light
will turn off. The system should be turned off when not • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
in use. will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the WARNING!
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display. Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
WARNING! cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
Metric Speed (km/h) go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
• Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subse- in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of snow-covered or slippery.
4
control and have an accident. Always ensure the sys- 1 km/h.
tem is off when you are not using it.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed To Resume Speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
To Set A Desired Speed the button is released. The new set speed is To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
reflected in the instrument cluster display. and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
Turn the Cruise Control on.
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push NOTE:
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the When you override and push the SET (+) or SET (-) but- To Deactivate
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected ton, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle. A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
speed.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
NOTE: To Accelerate For Passing vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control system with-
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and out erasing the set speed from memory.
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
button. Control system without erasing the set speed from
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
memory:
To Vary The Speed Setting USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS • Vehicle parking brake is applied
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the • Stability event occurs
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by vehicle set speed. • Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push- • Engine overspeed occurs
ing the SET (-) button.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position, erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) WARNING! Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con- The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi- operate the Adaptive Cruise Control system.
venience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on tions. Your complete attention is always required
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a while driving to maintain safe control of your
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
The Cruise Control function performs differently in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
page 142.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in • The ACC system:
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a ○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed. tions into account, and may be limited upon
NOTE: adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed distance warnings.
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a ○ Will bring your vehicle to a complete stop while
preset following distance, while matching the speed following a vehicle ahead and hold your vehicle 1 — Distance Setting Increase
of the vehicle ahead. for approximately three minutes in the stop posi- 2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
tion. If the vehicle ahead does not start moving 3 — Distance Setting Decrease
• Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to within three minutes the parking brake will be
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adap-
tive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning
activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
You should switch off the ACC system:
system. The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, system settings. The information it displays depends on
• Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
ACC system status.
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be in highway construction zones).
aware of the feature selected page 207. Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
• When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; until one of the following appears in the instrument
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill cluster display:
WARNING!
slopes. Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
system. It is not a substitute for active driver Cruise Control Off.”
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi- constant speed.
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive • When the vehicle speed is below the minimum SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
Cruise Control Ready.” speed range instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
• When the brakes are overheated NOTE:
display will read “ACC SET.” • When the driver’s door is open at low speeds Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instru- • When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
ment cluster display. speeds
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the • When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
following ACC activity occurs: vehicle in close proximity on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
• System Cancel • When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off 4
• Driver Override mode is active WARNING!
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning To Activate/Deactivate In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
• ACC Unavailable Warning Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
displays “ACC Ready.” neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity. To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) the system will turn off and the instrument cluster dis- the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
play will show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” selected.
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, WARNING! If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
the instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.” (32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on (32 km/h).
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. NOTE:
You could lose control and have a collision. Always Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
NOTE: leave the system off when you are not using it. 20 mph (32 km/h).
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
• When in 4WD Low 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
• When the brakes are applied
• When the parking brake is applied
NOTE: To Turn Off WARNING!

• Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond memory if:
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “ACC • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument pushed
cluster display. road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
• The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
• If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed pushed follow these warnings can result in a collision and
while ACC is enabled, the system will not control the • The ignition is placed in the OFF position death or serious personal injury.
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
• 4WD Low is engaged
the position of the accelerator pedal. To Resume To Vary The Speed Setting
To Cancel If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
(resume) button and then remove your foot from the After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push-
Cruise Control systems: show the last set speed. ing the SET (-) button.
• The brake pedal is applied Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph U.S. Speed (mph)
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
• Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates being used. result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subse-
• The trailer brake is applied manually (if equipped) Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
(0 km/h) when ACC is active. 1 mph.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position NOTE: • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates • If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than two button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the the instrument cluster display.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal Metric Speed (km/h)
• The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates to reengage the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the
• The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode existing set speed. • Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subse-
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
(overheated) vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. 1 km/h.
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
system: will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
• Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds
NOTE: The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed set speed.
of the vehicle.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
When ACC Is Active the sensor.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the • The distance setting is changed.
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
• The system disengages.
will automatically slow the vehicle. The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full necessary.
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, NOTE:
after two seconds the driver will either have to push
Distance Settings
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys-
4
the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator tem applies the brakes.
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed. 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving 3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to main-
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift- “BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is maximum braking capacity.
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem- NOTE:
perature exceeds normal range (overheated). (longer).
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
Setting The Following Distance In ACC Decrease button and release. Each time the button is mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar applying the brakes autonomously.
The specified following distance for Adaptive Cruise
(shorter).
Control (ACC) can be set by varying the distance setting
between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain Overtake Aid
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance set- the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC engaged, and following a vehicle, the system will pro-
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the sys- vide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed
displays in the instrument cluster display. tem adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional accel-
distance setting, regardless of the set speed. eration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the left
hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop Display Warnings And Maintenance • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to “WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF and require a sensor realignment.
a standstill while following the vehicle in front, if the
vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds of VEHICLE” WARNING • Do not attach or install any accessories near the
your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” sensor, including transparent material. Doing so
resume motion without the need for any driver action. warning will display and a chime will sound when condi- could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two tions temporarily limit system performance. When the condition that deactivated the system is no
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such simply reactivating it.
the existing set speed. as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument clus- NOTE:
ter display will display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill
Front Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate. • If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
for approximately three consecutive minutes, the park- once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
ing brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
canceled. at an authorized dealer.
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
• Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
opened, the parking brake will be activated, and the its path this warning may temporarily occur. mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC system will be canceled. ACC/FCW operation.
NOTE:
WARNING! If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” “CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must available. shield” warning will display and a chime will sound
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
these warnings can result in a collision and death or of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the camera as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
serious personal injury. in the center of the windshield, on the forward side of also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
the rearview mirror. such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is impor- into the sun and fog on the inside of glass. In these
tant to note the following maintenance items: cases, the instrument cluster display will show “ACC/
FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear the the system will have degraded performance.
windshield.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving Precautions While Driving With ACC
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system
will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under NOTE:
rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may tempo- • Aftermarket add-ons such as snowplows, lift kits,
rarily occur. and brush/grille bars can hinder module perfor-
mance. Ensure the radar/camera has no obstruc-
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
tions in the field of view.
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may • Height modifications can limit module performance
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. and functionality.
When the condition that created limited functionality is • Do not put stickers or easy passes over the camera/
no longer present, the system will return to full radar field of view.
functionality. Offset Driving Condition Example 4
• Any modifications to the vehicle that may obstruct
NOTE: the field of view of the radar/camera are not TURNS AND BENDS
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- recommended.
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stabil-
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect- ity, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is
obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to out of the curve, the system will resume your original
camera inspected at an authorized dealer. intervene. The following are examples of these types of set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
situations:
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING functionality.
TOWING A TRAILER
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis- NOTE:
plays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes USING ACC ON HILLS
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still when ACC is braking. ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again OFFSET DRIVING ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is steepness of the hill.
see an authorized dealer. offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may Narrow Vehicle Example
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane- STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to and/or front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle
apply the brakes if necessary. ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a park-
example, ACC will not react in situations where the ing maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped with the auto-
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle matic braking function, the vehicle brakes may be auto-
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this matically applied and released when the vehicle is in
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ- REVERSE if the system detects a possible collision with
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and an obstacle.
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
NOTE:
• The driver can disable the automatic braking func-
tion by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense
switch. The driver can also override automatic brak-
ing by changing the gear or by pressing the gas
pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking
Lane Changing Example event.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if the vehicle • The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
is in 4WD Low. acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a For limitations of this system and usage precautions,
instrument cluster display page 95. It provides
fault in the brake module. visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
see page 154.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or the detected obstacle.
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
Assist system or the Braking System.
is placed in the ON/RUN position. PARKSENSE DISPLAY
• The automatic braking function may only be applied ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled while in
colliding with a detected obstacle. status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
one of these gears, the system will remain active until
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear (11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instru- The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing 4
ment cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is a single arc in the left, right, or center regions based on
of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
above ParkSense operating speed while in REVERSE. the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/ The system will become active again if the vehicle vehicle.
disabled from the Customer Programmable Fea- speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
tures section of the Uconnect system. 6 mph (9 km/h). display will show a single solid arc in the center front
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration region with no chime. As the vehicle moves closer to
state for the automatic braking function through PARKSENSE SENSORS the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving
ignition cycles. closer to the vehicle and a fast chime will be heard and
The four ParkSense sensors (six if equipped with Active
will change from fast to continuous.
• Trailer hitch ball assembly may cause false braking ParkSense), located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor
the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sen- If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
events if left attached after towing.
sors’ field of view, and the four ParkSense sensors, region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected chime. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. display will show the single arc moving closer to the
view. The front sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
NOTE:
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sen- continuous.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not sors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
to substitute the driver. (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm). These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the sys-
tem is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Rear Distance Greater than 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than
(inches/cm) 79 inches (200 cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches
(30cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2 Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
(Chime) Second Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6thFlashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Solid
4
Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance (inches/cm) Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime) None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: Front Park Assist Audible Alerts Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible The Front and Rear chime volume settings are program-
when the system is sounding an audio tone. alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when mable through the Uconnect system page 188.
an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is station-
ary, and brake pedal is applied.
ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK CLEANING THE PARKSENSE
AND/OR REAR PARKSENSE ASSIST SYSTEM SYSTEM
Front ParkSense can be enabled and dis- During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
abled with the Front ParkSense switch. has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and dis- will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and not scratch or poke the sensors.
abled with the Rear ParkSense switch. it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed to
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
disable the system, the instrument cluster display
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When
PRECAUTIONS
page 95 will show a vehicle graphic of the Front or
the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
Rear ParkSense on/off state for two seconds. NOTE:
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the display will display a "WIPE OFF" message on the corre-
Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster sponding blocked system while the vehicle is in
• Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
display will show a vehicle graphic with “OFF” on the REVERSE. The system will continue to provide arc alerts ParkSense system operating properly.
corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be dis- for the side that is functioning properly.
played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
NOTE: "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will appears in the instrument cluster display make sure • When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
interrupt the five second messages, and the instrument
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear graphic of the Front or Rear ParkSense on/off state
cluster display will show the vehicle graphic with the
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then for two seconds. Furthermore, once you turn Front
corresponding arcs and “OFF” message.
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on see an authorized dealer. on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires
service. The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be NOTE: • When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
off when the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off,
Water from a car wash or road slush in freezing weather
Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and the sys- the instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
may also cause sensors to become blocked.
tem requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense graphic with "OFF" in the corresponding side. This
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see vehicle is in REVERSE.
be on.
your authorized dealer.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care WARNING! CAUTION!

not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not • Drivers must be careful when backing up even
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
working properly. The ParkSense system might not behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/ to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. ParkSense.
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. You are responsible for safety and must continue
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, so can result in serious injury or death.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
trailer hitches, etc. are placed near the rear fascia/ • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor prob-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED 4
lem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SER- vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
VICE REQUIRED” message to be appear in the result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
instrument cluster display. because the hitch ball will be much closer to the ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the providing audible/visual instructions through the instru-
• ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen- ment cluster display, and controlling the steering wheel.
in the lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as
behind the vehicle and could also cause a false assembly, depending on its size and shape, and “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains control of
braking event. give a false indication that an obstacle is behind the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending
the vehicle, and could cause false braking. on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the
• The Rear ParkSense system will automatically dis- ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of
able when the system detects that a trailer with maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular
trailer brakes has been connected to the Integrated parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passen-
Trailer Brake Module. CAUTION!
ger side).
• The Front ParkSense system will automatically dis- • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
NOTE:
able if a snowplow has been connected to the recognize every obstacle, including small
vehicle. obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located • The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects,
above or below the sensors will not be detected and must intervene as required.
when they are in close proximity.
(Continued) • The system is provided to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch ate and search for a parking space when the following
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time conditions are present:
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to will disable the system (LED turns off). • Gear selector is in DRIVE.
manually complete the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi- • The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., • Parking maneuver is completed. activated.
or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces • Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves). when searching for a parking space.
• Driver's door is closed.
• Tailgate is closed.
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least • Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) dur- • Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ing active steering guidance into the parking space.
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali- • Steering wheel is touched during active steering • The outer surface and the underside of the front
brated and performs accurately. This is due to the and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of
guidance into the parking space.
system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.
performance of the feature. • ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist switch is pushed.
• Driver's door is opened. NOTE:
• The driver must control the vehicle’s brakes. The • Tailgate is opened. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
automatic emergency braking feature is NOT (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct
intended to substitute for the driver during REVERSE • Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking Sys- the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above
maneuvers. tem intervention.
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will can-
• Vehicle is in 4WD Low. cel. The driver must then reactivate the system by push-
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE • Axle Locker is active. ing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST • Trailer is connected. When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
SYSTEM • Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is active. will turn off if any of the above conditions are not
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system • Snowplow is connected. present.
can be enabled and disabled with the NOTE:
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR
on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. PARKING SPACE ASSISTANCE
If the maneuver cannot be completed within eight
shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster
OPERATION
NOTE:
display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect dis-
manually. enabled, the messages “Active ParkSense Searching -
play, the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is located
Press OK To Switch To Perpendicular Park” or “Active
above the display.
ParkSense Searching - Press OK to Switch to Parallel
Park” will appear in the instrument cluster display. Push
the OK button on the left side of the steering wheel to NOTE:

change your parking space setting. You can switch
between perpendicular and parallel parking • When searching for a parking space, use the turn
maneuvers. signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle
you want to perform the parking maneuver. The
ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automati-
cally search for a parking space on the passenger's
side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected Space Found — Keep Moving Forward 4
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail- stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular Park gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles). from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a
standstill (your hands still removed from the steering
• When searching for a parking space, the driver wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending into the REVERSE position.
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
possible. steering to complete before then instructing to check
• The feature will only indicate the last detected park- surroundings and move backward.
ing space (example: if passing multiple available
parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last
detected parking space for the maneuver). A parking
space is considered invalid after the vehicle is 32 ft
(10 m) or more away from it.
When an available parking space has been found, and
the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to
Press OK to Switch to Parallel Park move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneu- • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for
ver is complete and the driver will be instructed to any reason, the driver must take control of the
check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle.
vehicle into PARK. The message "Active ParkSense
Complete - Check Parking Position" will be displayed
WARNING!
momentarily.
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
NOTE: perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
• It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver. look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space • It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and and blind spots before backing up and moving for-
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their sur- ward. You are responsible for safety and must con-
roundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either tinue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is do so can result in serious injury or death.
required.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should CAUTION!
check their surroundings and begin to back up
slowly. • The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and might be temporarily detected or not detected at
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors’
within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the field of view will not be detected when they are in
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to close proximity.
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space complete the maneuver manually.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
The system may instruct several more gear shifts • The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steer- able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
(DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering
ing guidance into the parking space. The system will It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
wheel, before instructing the driver to check surround-
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) her shoulders when using the ParkSense Active
ings and complete the parking maneuver.
that tells them to slow down. The driver is then Park Assist system.
responsible for completing the maneuver if the sys-
tem is canceled.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF

The LaneSense button is located on the
LANESENSE OPERATION switch panel below the Uconnect display.
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above

37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera NOTE:
to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect Dis-
within the lane boundaries. play screen, the LaneSense button is located above the
When both lane markings are detected and the driver display.
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the Lane- To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
Sense system provides a haptic warning in the form of button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
torque applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual shown in the instrument cluster display.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale 4
warning in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. button again (LED turns on).
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by • When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
applying force into the steering wheel at any time. NOTE: Telltale is solid white when only the left lane
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state marking has been detected and the system is ready
When only a single lane marking is detected and the to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position. display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual the left side.
warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane. LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic or The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane tion, the visual warning in the instrument cluster
a torque warning will not be provided. drift condition through the instrument cluster display. display will show the left lane line flashing yellow
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are (on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes from
NOTE:
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been solid white to flashing yellow.
• When operating conditions have been met, the detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands
are on the steering wheel and provide an audible
and visual warning to the driver if removed. The sys-
tem will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
• LaneSense will disable when a snowplow is con-
nected to the vehicle.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid Yellow
Telltale Telltale
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
NOTE: situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow. The • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
for a right lane departure when only the right lane solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the tion, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The
marking has been detected. steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected boundary. flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
• When the LaneSense system is on and both the the steering wheel will turn to the right. boundary.
lane markings have been detected, the system is
"armed" to provide visual warnings in the instrument For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
cluster display and a torque warning in the steering the steering wheel will turn to the right.
wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. The
lane lines turn from gray to white and the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid green.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA following conditions occur: The vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the
an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your user presses image defeat X to exit out of the camera
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. video display.
The image will be displayed on the Navigation/ Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is
The ParkView Camera is located in the center of the initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until
tailgate handle. the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE: NOTE:
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With 4
Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View Cam-
Flashing Yellow Telltale
era function. • If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be dis-
NOTE: Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera: played continuously until deactivated via the touch-
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior screen button X, the transmission is shifted into
for a right lane departure. 1. Press the Vehicle button located on the bottom of PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
the Uconnect display and then select the Controls
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS menu. • The touchscreen button X to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the inten- 2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the Rear vehicle is not in REVERSE.
sity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensi- View Camera system on.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
tivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system page 188. NOTE: image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro-
jected back up path based on the steering wheel posi-
NOTE: • The Rear View camera can also be turned on manu- tion. A dashed centerline overlay indicates the center of
ally through the Apps menu within the Uconnect the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph system. receiver. Different colored zones indicate the distance
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the
• The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program- approximate distances for each zone:
• The warnings are disabled with use of the turn mable modes of operation that may be selected
signal. through the Uconnect system page 188. Zones Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam- Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
• The system will not apply torque to the steering era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
and the previous screen appears. When the vehicle is
Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability 6.5 ft or greater
shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on, Green
Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.). (2 m or greater)
the camera image will continue to be displayed for up
to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the
WARNING!
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the stan-
dard view. Pressing the icon a second time will return SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
the view to the standard Back Up Camera display.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
IF EQUIPPED
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view The Surround View Camera system allows you to see an
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the on-screen image of the surroundings and the Top View
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, of your vehicle. This occurs whenever the gear selector
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings the Zoom View selection will automatically resume. is in REVERSE or when enabled through the Uconnect
and must continue to pay attention while backing up. system. The Top View of the vehicle will also show if any
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. NOTE: doors are open. The image will be displayed on the
The Zoom View button and AUX button (if equipped) will touchscreen along with a caution note “Check Entire
not be available when the vehicle is shifted into Surroundings”. After five seconds, this note will disap-
REVERSE and the Trailer Reverse Steering Control pear. The Surround View Camera system is comprised
CAUTION! (TRSC) feature (if equipped) is activated. of four cameras located in the front grille, rear tailgate
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the and side mirrors.
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
unable to view every obstacle or object in your is below 8 mph (13 km/h). NOTE:
drive path. If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until • Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and Camera function.
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom- • The Surround View Camera system has program-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/ NOTE: mable settings that may be selected through the
her shoulder when using ParkView. Uconnect system page 188.
• If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, Press this button on the touchscreen to
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
NOTE: the Uconnect system.
will appear grey.
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and • While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. visible. View and Top View is the default view of the system.
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), see If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image will
Zoom View
page 167. display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
REVERSE. The camera image will stop displaying, close,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
and display the previous screen if the vehicle speed
in any gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the
“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into Top View Plus Front View
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. The The Front View will show you what is immedi-
X button on the touchscreen disables the display of the ately in front of the vehicle and is always
camera image. paired with the Top View of the vehicle.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image will
close and display the previous screen after shifting out Front Cross Path View
of REVERSE.
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will give
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are overlaid
the driver a wider angle view of the front
on the image in the Rear View and Top View to illustrate
camera system. The Top View will be dis-
the width of the vehicle and its projected path based on
abled when this is selected.
steering wheel position.
Back Up Camera View
The guidelines have different colored zones to indicate
the distance an object in the view is from the rear of the Surround View Camera View Pressing the Back Up Camera button will 4
vehicle. Refer to the chart below: provide a full screen rear view with the ability
NOTE: to access a Zoom View.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of • Front tires will be seen in the image when the tires
The Vehicle are turned. NOTE:
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) • Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image • If the Back Up Camera was selected through the
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) will appear distorted.
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of screen
Green
6.5 ft or greater • The Top View will show which doors are open. display will return to the Surround View menu. If the
(2 m or greater) Back Up Camera was manually activated through
• Open front doors will block the outside image. the Controls menu of the Uconnect system, exiting
Modes Of Operation Top View Plus Rear View out of the display screen will return to the Controls
Standard Rear View can be manually activated by This is the default view of the system in menu.
selecting “Back Up Camera” through the Controls menu REVERSE and is always paired with the Top
within the Uconnect system. View of the vehicle with optional active • When the Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC)
feature (if equipped) is activated, the following but-
Top View guidelines for the projected path when tons on the touchscreen will be unavailable:
enabled. ○ Back Up Camera
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. There Rear Cross Path View ○ Front Facing Camera with Tire Lines
are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will give ○ All Surround View Camera Views
and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from the driver a wider angle view of the rear cam-
yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the era system. The Top View will be disabled
oncoming object. when this is selected.
Zoom View PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

There is a touchscreen button X to disable the dis- WARNING!
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom play of the camera image. Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
View is available. By pressing the “magnifying glass” • When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with using the Surround View Camera. Always check care-
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the image camera delay turned off, the Surround View Camera fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
will zoom in two times the standard view. Pressing the mode is exited and the last known screen appears pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
icon a second time will return the view to the standard again. blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
Back Up Camera display. The system is deactivated in the following conditions if the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in it was activated manually from the Uconnect controls pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view menu via Surround View button or Back Up Camera result in serious injury or death.
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the button:
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, • The X button on the display is pressed
the Zoom View selection will automatically resume. CAUTION!
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
• Vehicle is shifted into PARK
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle • Ignition is placed in the OFF position • To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
is below 8 mph (13 km/h). • Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
10 seconds camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
in your drive path.
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and NOTE:
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h). If the Surround View Camera is activated manually, and
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
NOTE: the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation meth- to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is rec-
ods for automatic activation are assumed. ommended that the driver look frequently over
• If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, The camera delay system is turned off manually his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph through the Uconnect settings menu page 188.
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
will appear grey. NOTE: For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), see
page 167.
• While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be • If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
visible. on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with FORWARD FACING CAMERA WITH
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
Deactivation
lenses.
TIRE LINES — IF EQUIPPED
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view image
it was activated automatically: • If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see of the road ahead, along with tire lines to guide the
an authorized dealer.
• When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with driver when driving on narrow roads. Tire lines can be
camera delay turned on, the camera image will con- activated/deactivated through the Uconnect Settings.
tinue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
Activation tem. The image will be displayed on the Uconnect dis- • If a trailer is not connected and any soft button is
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in the play along with a caution note “Check Entire Surround- selected, a message will appear: “Connect Trailer
following ways: ings”. After five seconds, this note will disappear. Equipped With Trailer Surround View System”.
• Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button in the Inputting Trailer Values
NOTE:
Controls screen or Apps menu For the Trailer Surround View Camera system to func-
• Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button located • Trailer Surround View Camera kit is only available for tion, all fields must be entered. When a value is needed
in the upper left corner of the Back Up camera vehicles equipped with the Surround View Camera the screen will display “Required”.
display system.
Once activated, the camera image will remain on as • The Trailer Surround View Camera system has pro- Setting Description
long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h). grammable settings that may be selected through Input the total length of the
the Uconnect system page 188. Trailer Length
Deactivation trailer
Set Up
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the follow- Trailer Width
Input the total width of the 4
The Trailer Surround View Camera system includes an trailer
ing conditions:
installation kit with a Trailer Surround View Module and
• The vehicle exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), except when four Trailer Surround View Cameras that must be Camera Height
Input the height of the
mounted camera
vehicle is in 4WD Low. installed on your trailer prior to connecting to your
• The X button on the display is pressed. vehicle. See the installation instructions included with Trailer Type
Choose the trailer type
the Trailer Surround View installation kit for more infor- from menu
• The vehicle is shifted into PARK. mation. Once the Trailer Surround View Module and
• The ignition is placed in the OFF position. cameras are installed and the trailer is connected to
When the Trailer Type soft button is selected two
options are available: Conventional or Gooseneck/5th
NOTE: the vehicle via the 12-way connector, the settings
Wheel.
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing Cam- Trailer Surround Camera settings can be accessed. The
Trailer Surround Camera settings can be accessed Activation
era image will be displayed until the X button is pressed
or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. through Uconnect Settings by pressing the Trailer soft The Trailer Surround Camera can be activated through
button in the Trailer Settings or the Camera Settings. the Uconnect system when the vehicle is in PARK, NEU-
The system requires input of the trailer dimensions TRAL, OR DRIVE.
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED prior to use of the system. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, Surround
View Camera showing the Top View and Back Up Cam-
NOTE:
TRAILER SURROUND VIEW era is the default view of the system. Press the More
CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • If a trailer is connected but the trailer dimensions Cams soft button and press the Trailer tab to access
the Trailer Cameras. Press Trailer Surround Camera soft
have not been entered in the Trailer Surround set-
The Trailer Surround View Camera system allows you to tings page, the system will default to the settings button to access Top View and Rear View of the trailer.
see an on-screen image of the surroundings and the page. If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image will
Top View of a trailer using four mountable cameras. display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
This occurs whenever the More Cams soft button is REVERSE. The camera image will not display for 10 sec-
selected, or when enabled through the Uconnect sys- onds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed NOTE: NOTE:
in the OFF position. The X button on the touchscreen Due to wide angle cameras, the image will appear If the Trailer Surround Camera was selected through
disables the display of the camera image. distorted. the More Cameras menu, an option to return to the
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image will Rear View More Cameras menu will display. If the Trailer Surround
close and display the previous screen after shifting out Camera was manually activated through the Controls
Pressing the Rear View soft button will show menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the display
of REVERSE.
the Top View and Rear View in a split screen screen will return to the Controls menu.
Modes Of Operation display.
The Trailer Surround View Camera system offers two Deactivation
different camera displays: Front View The system is deactivated in the following conditions if
it was activated automatically:
• Top View split screen with one selected mounted Pressing the Front View soft button will show
camera you what is immediately in front of the trailer • When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
and is paired with the Top View of the trailer. camera delay turned on, the camera image will con-
• Full screen view of a selected mounted camera tinue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds, unless
Press the More Cams soft button on the Surround View the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
screen and select the Trailer tab to access the Trailer Left View
vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed
Cameras. Press Trailer Surround Camera soft button to Pressing the Left View soft button will give in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button
access the default Top View and Rear View of the the driver a wider angle view of the left side to disable the display of the camera image.
trailer. trailer camera and is paired with the Top
Top View View of the trailer. • When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Trailer Surround View
The Trailer Top View will show in the Uconnect system Right View Camera mode is exited and the last known screen
with Top View and Rear View in a split screen display. Pressing the Right View soft button will give appears again.
the driver a wider angle view of the right side The system is deactivated in the following conditions if
trailer camera and is paired with the Top it was activated manually from the Uconnect controls
View of the trailer. menu via the Trailer Surround Camera soft button:
Full Screen Camera View • The X button on the display is pressed
To display a full screen image of the Trailer Surround • Vehicle is shifted into PARK
View mounted cameras, select one of the following
options from the Trailer Cameras screen: Trailer Left,
• Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Trailer Right, Trailer Front, Trailer Rear. Exiting out of the • Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
full screen view will return the system to the previous 10 seconds
screen. NOTE:
If the Trailer Surround Camera is activated manually,
Trailer Top and Rear Camera View and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation
methods for automatic activation are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED Deactivation
through the Uconnect system page 188. The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the X in the
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two AUX Cam-
upper right corner of the touchscreen. This will return
NOTE: eras, which display rearview and side view images from
the display back to the previously displayed screen.
the trailer on the touchscreen.
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up NOTE:
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with NOTE:
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles with • If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera is
lenses. NAV equipped radios if the vehicle is not equipped with connected, the touchscreen will display a blue
• If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see a Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) and Sur- screen along with the message “Camera System
an authorized dealer. round View Camera system. Unavailable.” The screen can be exited out by press-
ing the X in the upper right hand corner. This will
Activation return the display back to the previously displayed
WARNING! The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the Back screen. 4
Up Camera or Cargo Camera (if equipped) button on
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
the touchscreen, followed by the AUX button located in • Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
using the Trailer Surround View Camera. Always feature.
the upper left corner of the rearview display. On
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
vehicles with Surround View Camera (if equipped), the • The display will always default to the Trailer Camera
AUX Camera can be activated when the vehicle is in display AUX 1.
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
REVERSE by first pressing the More Cams button in the
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
Surround view screen, followed by the AUX tab. The AUX
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
camera can also be activated when the vehicle is in REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch ENGINE
between each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or AUX
CAUTION! The capless fuel filler is located on the left side of the
2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
vehicle.
• To avoid vehicle damage, Trailer Surround View AUX 1 Camera Button
The capless system is sealed by two flapper doors.
should only be used as a parking aid. The Trailer
Surround View Camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path. WARNING!
AUX 2 Camera Button
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
driven slowly when using Trailer Surround View to vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It being filled.
is recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using Trailer Surround • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
View. tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
(Continued)
WARNING! WARNING!
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a por- • Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the con-
table container that is inside of a vehicle. You tainer when you are filling it.
could be burned. Always place gas containers on • Use only approved containers for flammable liquid.
the ground while filling.
• Do not leave container unattended while filling.
• A static electric charge could cause a spark and
fire hazard.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL
the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler ENGINE
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the ignition off. 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full. The capless fuel filler is located on the left side of the
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door vehicle.
(3 o'clock position) and release to open. 5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after The capless system is sealed by two flapper doors.
nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the ignition off.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear
edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and
then release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the ice
build up.
Fuel Filler Door

WARNING!
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the Static electricity can cause an ignition of flammable
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce Diesel Fuel And Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
refueling.
risk of serious injury or death when filling containers: 1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
• Always place container on the ground before filling. 2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
(Continued)
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the BULK FUEL STORAGE — DIESEL DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID STORAGE
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling. FUEL Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable
product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept in tempera-
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of the
tures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and 32°C), it will
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated with
last a minimum of one year.
water will promote the growth of “microbes.” These
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. microbes form “slime” that will clog the fuel filtration DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below 12°F
system and lines. Drain condensation from the supply (-11°C). The system has been designed to operate in
tank and change the line filter on a regular basis. this environment.
WARNING!
NOTE: NOTE:
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel, air is
being filled. pulled into the fuel system. • Any containers or parts that come into contact with 4
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is If the vehicle will not start page 321. DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or stainless
in violation of most state and federal fire regula- steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator stainless steel should be avoided as they are sub-
Light (MIL) to turn on. WARNING!
ject to corrosion by DEF.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
• If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
burned. Always place fuel containers on the pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious ADDING DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
ground while filling. injury or death.
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) gauge (located on the
instrument cluster) will display the level of DEF remain-
CAUTION!
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID ing in the tank page 92.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic NOTE:
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” Reduction (SCR) system to meet diesel emissions stan-
the fuel tank after filling. dards required by the Environmental Protection Agency. • Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used in
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of
your vehicle.
oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emitted from engines that are
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL harmful to our health and the environment to a near- • Outside temperature can affect DEF consumption.
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can cause zero level. A small quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid In cold conditions, 12°F (-11°C) and below, the DEF
severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper main- (DEF) is injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst gauge may take longer to operate as intended. This
tenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is essen- where, when vaporized, converts smog-forming NOx into is a normal function of the system.
tial page 317. harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe.
• There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank that NOTE: ○ If containers which can be screwed to the filler
automatically works when necessary. If the DEF sup- ○ The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to are used, the reservoir is full when the DEF level
ply does freeze, the truck will operate normally until update after adding a gallon or more of (DEF) to in the container stops pouring out. Do not pro-
it thaws. the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the ceed further.
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Procedure new level. See an authorized dealer for service. CAUTION!
NOTE: ○ The DEF gauge may also not immediately update
For the correct fluid type page 371.

after a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is • To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to the
below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line heater will DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF
1. Remove cap from Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) tank possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the tank after filling.
which is located next to the diesel fuel filler. gauge to update after a period of run time. Under • DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
may not reflect the new fill level for several temperatures below the DEF freezing point, how-
drives. ever, if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the sys-
Refilling With Nozzles tem could be damaged.
You can fill up at any DEF distributor. • When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately
with water and use an absorbent material to soak
Proceed as follows: up the spills on the ground.
○ Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start refilling • Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is acci-
and stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut- dentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it can
off indicates that the DEF tank is full). Do not result in severe damage to your engine, including
proceed with the refilling, to prevent spillage of but not limited to failure of the fuel pump and
DEF. injectors.
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill ○ Extract the nozzle. • Never add anything other than DEF to the tank –
especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel
Refilling With Containers
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location Proceed as follows: petroleum-based product. Even a very small
○ Check the expiration date. amount of these, less than 100 parts per million or
less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will con-
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF tank filler ○ Read the advice for use on the label before taminate the entire DEF system and will require
neck. pouring the content of the bottle into the DEF
replacement. If owners use a container, funnel or
tank.
nozzle when refilling the tank, it should either be
○ If systems which cannot be screwed in (e.g. new or one that has only been used for adding
tanks) are used for refilling, after the indication DEF. Mopar® provides an attachable nozzle with
appears on the instrument panel display its DEF for this purpose.
page 95 fill the DEF tank with no more than
2 gallons (8 liters).
(Continued)
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any of PAYLOAD CURB WEIGHT
the following happen: DEF stops flowing from the fill
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
bottle into the DEF tank, DEF splashes out the filler
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
neck, or a DEF pump nozzle automatically shuts off.
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo. fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank. or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF heating (GAWR) are added.
system. This allows the DEF injection system to operate
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
properly at temperatures below 12°F (-11°C). If your
vehicle is not in operation for an extended period of
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the LOADING
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
time with temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
exceeded.
the tank may freeze. Do not overfill the DEF tank. If the rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter- 4
tank is overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged. Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, operation.
Extra care should be taken when filling with portable
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
containers to avoid overfilling. Keep an eye on the DEF The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
gauge in your instrument cluster. You may safely add a cial scale to insure that the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
increased durability does not necessarily increase the
maximum of 2 gallons (7.6 Liters) when your DEF gauge (GVWR) has not been exceeded. The weight on the front
vehicle's GVWR.
is reading at the half mark. and rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly distrib-
TIRE SIZE uted over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle
VEHICLE LOADING The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre- may show that the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of
sents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight
must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
(GVWR) RIM SIZE appropriate until the specified weight limitations are
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
listed.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front securely before driving.
and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load
must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are
INFLATION PRESSURE Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
not exceeded. This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle the way the brakes operate.
for all loading conditions up to full Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
WARNING!
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) Tongue Weight (TW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its “loaded and on your vehicle.
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way ready for operation” condition.
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your Trailer Frontal Area
control. Overloading can shorten the life of your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
vehicle. of the trailer must be supported by the scale. the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
WARNING!
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TRAILER TOWING If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can
be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
In this section you will find safety tips and information more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
review this information to tow your load as efficiently control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
and safely as possible. The electronic TSC (If equipped) recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
age, follow the requirements and recommendations in Gross Combination Weight Rating brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle Weight-Carrying Hitch
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS and trailer when weighed in combination. A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
you in understanding the following information: Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear medium sized trailers.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue front or rear GAWR page 171. Weight-Distributing Hitch
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
not exceed the GVWR page 171. through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
WARNING!
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose con- it provides for a more level ride, offering more consis-
trol of the vehicle and have a collision. tent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing tow-
ing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway con-
trol also dampens sway caused by traffic and RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and ADJUSTMENT
trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control and a weight-
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended Towing With Air Suspension — If Equipped
for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required 1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride height.
depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading
to comply with GAWR requirements. NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
WARNING! with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for
proper leveling of the air suspension system.
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch 2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision. trailer (do not connect the trailer).
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) 4
• Weight-distributing systems may not be compatible 3. Enable tire jack mode through the instrument clus-
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch ter or touchscreen radio settings. Tire jack mode will
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recre- be canceled and the procedure must be restarted if
ational Vehicle dealer for additional information. the vehicle is driven at speeds above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
4. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to ground; this is height H1.
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch

(Incorrect)
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
Measuring Height (H)

5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight- TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND
distributing bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
H2. a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and
should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight- trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s recommen-
dations so that the height of the front fender is
approximately (H2-H1)/3+H1 (about 1/3 the differ- Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
ence between H2 and H1 above normal ride height Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max.
[H1]). Tongue Weight
8. Use the instrument cluster or touchscreen radio Class III Bumper 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) / 500 lb Class III Bumper Hitch Access
settings and switch off tire jack mode. Make sure Hitch - 1500 Model (226 kg)
the truck returns to normal ride height. Perform a Class IV - 12,750 lb (5,783 kg) / TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS
visual inspection of the trailer and weight- 1500 Model 1,275 lb (578 kg)
distributing hitch to confirm the manufacturer’s rec- (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
ommendations have been met.
Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer RATINGS)
9. The truck can now be driven. Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
NOTE:
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight
Measurement Example Example Height (mm) your vehicle. ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
H1 925 Class III Bumper Hitch Access
H2 946
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
Remove the cap with a trim stick or screwdriver to
H2-H1 21 access the Class III hitch attachment. • ramtruck.ca (Canada)
(H2-H1)/3 7 NOTE:
• rambodybuilder.com
(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932 Be careful not to scratch the bumper step pad.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
Tow/Haul mode engaged.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT TRAILER REVERSE STEERING NOTE:

The 90 degree turns could be in either the left or right
CONTROL direction.
Feature Overview When the vehicle is not in Reverse, press the TRSC but-
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is a feature that ton while at a standstill. A “Calibrate Trailer” message
will assist the driver when backing up a trailer. By turn- will display.
ing the knob located on the center stack, you can more
accurately control the direction the trailer will go.
The driver controls the accelerator and the brake while
steering with the use of the Trailer Reverse Steering
Control knob. The trailer is steered according to the
direction the knob is turned.
This feature will also allow the driver to back up a 4
vehicle and trailer in a straight line when the knob is
Weight Distribution rested in its center position.
Minimal setup is required to use this feature.
Consider the following items when computing the Set Up:
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To use the system, hitch your trailer to the truck and Trailer Reverse Steering Control Calibration
• The tongue weight of the trailer. ensure all electrical wiring is connected page 179.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment The system will automatically calibrate an attached 1. Drive straight 100 ft (30 m). A “Calibrating Trailer”
put in or on your vehicle. trailer during normal forward driving with no additional message will display when vehicle is in motion.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. action needed from the driver. If the vehicle has not
2. Perform intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft (15-
had enough time to automatically calibrate after con-
NOTE: necting a trailer, you will see a “Calibrate Trailer” mes-
20 m) in either direction.
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer sage in the instrument cluster when pressing the TRSC 3. Drive straight 100 ft (30 m).
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional button to activate the system. If this is the case, per-
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options 4. Perform intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft (15-
form the following maneuver to calibrate the trailer:
must be considered as part of the total load on your 20 m) in either direction.
Drive forward at least 100 ft (30 m), perform a
vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information plac- 5. Drive straight 100 ft (30 m).
90 degree turn and return to a straight position for at
ard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
least another 100 ft (30 m). Perform another 6. Drive straight 100 ft (30 m), making sure to align
and cargo for your vehicle.
90 degree turn, followed by another straight drive of at vehicle/trailer to path center line.
least 100 ft (30 m). Check that the system has cali-
brated by pushing the TRSC button.
7. Once calibration is complete, feature will be avail- right. Turning the knob counterclockwise will cause the • “Trailer Steering Active” will display after the driver
able for use. For calibration runs under 30 mph trailer to turn left. If you release the knob, it will return shifts to REVERSE and indicates the feature is
(48 km/h) a “To Enable Trailer Steering Shift to P” to its center position, and the trailer will back up in a active.
message will appear to indicate calibration straight line. • “Trailer Steering Unavailable” will display if there is a
completion. Continue to control the accelerator and brake while fault in the system preventing activation, the driver’s
Using TRSC backing the trailer up. door is open, the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, or
the tailgate is open.
NOTE:
CAUTION! Other reasons the feature may cancel:
While active, TRSC will automatically disable the Rear
Always observe the position of the trailer and sur- Park Assist system if it was previously enabled. • The driver overrides steering by placing hands on
the steering wheel.
roundings using the camera and mirrors to avoid The system will limit the top speed your vehicle can
damage to the truck or trailer. travel in REVERSE while using the feature. If needed, • Trailer tracking is lost.
you can shift to DRIVE or NEUTRAL to pull forward to get • If the trailer angle becomes excessive, the brakes
more room or straighten out the trailer, and shift back apply bringing the vehicle to a stop and then apply-
to REVERSE without the need to reactivate the feature. ing the parking brake.
The feature will cancel after 30 seconds in DRIVE or • Trailer steering button is pushed while active.
when the vehicle speed reaches 8 mph (12 km/h). • Vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h).
To cancel out of the feature, come to a stop and shift to • Driver door is open and seat belt is unbuckled.
PARK, or push the TRSC activation button.
• Transmission shifted to PARK.
Instrument Cluster Messages: Trailer Memory
• “Calibrate Trailer ” will display when a trailer is The trailer steering system will automatically retain the
not calibrated and the vehicle is at a standstill while calibration of the previous five trailers connected, so
the button is pushed. recalibration will not be necessary when hooking up.
• “Calibrating Trailer” will display when the trailer is The next time the vehicle is started, place the vehicle in
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Knob not calibrated and the vehicle is moving while the DRIVE and drive a short distance. The TRSC system can
button is pushed. then be activated.
To use the system, place the gear selector in PARK and • “To Activate Trailer Steering Shift To P” will display NOTE:
put your foot on the brake. Push the activation button when the trailer is calibrated successfully, the TRSC
located above the TRSC knob in the center stack. The activation button is pushed and the vehicle is not in Trailers may look different during day and night condi-
LED on the button will glow solid and the instrument PARK. tions. In such cases, the trailer may need to recalibrate.
cluster display will direct you to shift to REVERSE. Once • “Trailer Steering Ready, Shift To Reverse” will display Some trailers (such as boat trailers) will need to recali-
in REVERSE the system is active. Remove hands from when the button is pushed, trailer is calibrated and brate while loaded and unloaded.
the steering wheel and slowly back up while turning the the vehicle is in PARK.
TRSC knob in the direction you want the trailer to go.
Turning the knob clockwise will cause the trailer to turn
NOTE:
WARNING!
Towing Requirements — Tires
• The system may not detect a trailer in low light con- Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-
ditions. In sunny conditions, the performance may pact spare tire.
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as pos-
be degraded as shadows pass over the trailer.
sible:
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
• The driver is always responsible for safe operation • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
of truck and trailer.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
• The driver is always in control of the truck as well as cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
the trailer and is responsible for controlling the can occur that may be difficult for the driver to con-
throttle and brakes. sures before trailer usage.
trol. You could lose control of your vehicle and have
• The system may not function when the camera lens a collision. • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
is blocked, blurred (covered with water, snow, ice, • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over- 4
dirt, etc) and will not work unless the tailgate is load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause • Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
upright and fully latched. a loss of control, poor performance or damage to will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus- limits.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS pension, chassis structure or tires. • For further information page 345.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- • Safety chains must always be used between your Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
train components, the following guidelines are vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
recommended. the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
slack for turning corners. trailer.
CAUTION!
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged. PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or electronic brake controller is not required.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
"chock" the trailer wheels.
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. • GCWR must not be exceeded. 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
This helps the engine and other parts of the • Total weight must be distributed between the tow of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled Ser- ○ GVWR
vicing section for the proper maintenance intervals ○ GTW
page 306. When towing a trailer, never exceed the ○ GAWR
GAWR or GCWR ratings. ○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Manual Brake Control Lever

WARNING!
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to acti-
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's vate power to the trailer's electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
brakes when you need them and could have an greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
accident. the trailer brakes.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis- The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come on
when braking normally with the vehicle brake pedal.
tance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle Only the trailer stop lamps will come on when the
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an manual brake control lever is applied.
accident. Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
CAUTION! 1 — GAIN (-) Adjustment Button
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition
2 — GAIN (+) Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Sta-
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead The user interface consists of the following:
tus Indicator Light will not be displayed.
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
effort, and longer stopping distances. If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Inte-
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control grated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the Trailer Brake
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. Status Indicator Light will flash.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of
10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
Adjusting GAIN
(ITBM) — If Equipped GAIN NOTE:
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for electric and Electric The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control This should only be performed in a traffic free environ-
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. for the specific towing condition and should be changed ment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condi- (30–40 km/h).
NOTE:
tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
This module has been designed and verified with elec-
and weather. condition, functioning normally and properly
tric trailer brakes and new EOH systems. Some previous
EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM. adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec-
tions according to the trailer manufacturer's
instructions.
3. When a trailer is plugged in with electric or EOH 6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake 9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
brakes, the trailer connected message should Type appears on the screen. tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
appear in the instrument cluster display (if the con- turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
nection is not recognized by the ITBM, braking func- Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type
tions will not be available), the GAIN setting will illu- just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
appears on the screen.
minate and the correct type of trailer must be trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
selected from the instrument cluster display options. 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
(30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake con-
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
trol lever completely.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH 4
Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Brakes Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb
*The suggested selection may change depending on NOTE:

the customer preferences for braking performance. WARNING!
Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use
may also affect the selection. with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems. To
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the
Display Messages of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop- availability of controllers, check with your trailer
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument ping distance or trailer instability which could result in manufacturer or dealer.
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single personal injury.
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is deter- • Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
mined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or cause damage to the electrical system and elec-
on the trailer page 95. tronic modules of the vehicle. See an authorized
CAUTION! dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop- And Wiring
ping distance or trailer instability which could result in Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property. size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and • Low Beams
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer • Fog Lamps (if equipped)
harness and connector.
• Daytime Running Lamps
NOTE: During this time the following lights will sequence, each
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring activating for three seconds:
harness. 1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
The electrical connections are all complete to the
2. Left turn signal
vehicle but you must connect the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 3. Right turn signal
NOTE: 4. Reverse Lamps
5. High Beam
• Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the Seven-Pin Connector
This light check sequence will continue for a total of five
vehicle (or any other device plugged into the vehi-
cle's electrical connectors) before launching a boat 1 — Backup Lamps minutes.
into water. 2 — Running Lamps The sequence will only activate if the following condi-
3 — Left Stop/Turn tions are met:
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area. 4 — Ground
5 — Battery • Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Package
6 — Right Stop/Turn • Vehicle is in PARK
7 — Electric Brakes • Vehicle is not in motion
• Ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN
Trailer Light Check
• Remote start is inactive
This feature will run the trailer lights through a
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is avail-
• Brakes are not applied
able in the Instrument Cluster under the Trailer Tow • Left turn signal is not applied
menu page 100. • Right turn signal is not applied
When activated the feature will enable all of the exterior • Hazard switch is not applied
lights sequentially for up to five minutes for time to walk The sequence will cancel if any of the following condi-
Four-Pin Connector around and verify functionality. The following exterior tions occur:
lights will remain on for the entirety of the sequence:
• Brakes are applied
1 — Ground • Park/Running Lamps • Vehicle is shifted from PARK
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn • Side Marker Lamps (if equipped) • Vehicle is no longer stationary
4 — Right Stop/Turn • License Lamp • Left turn signal activated from stalk
• Signature Lamp (if equipped) • Right turn signal is activated from stalk
• Hazard switch is activated Cruise Control — If Equipped unique electrical systems that must be connected to
• Any button on the key fob is pushed properly ensure operator safety and prevent overload-
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads. ing vehicle systems.
• Ignition button is pushed • When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
• High Beam stalk position is changed speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
WARNING!
• Sequence is canceled in the instrument cluster gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
TOWING TIPS to maximize fuel efficiency. affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing Air Suspension System described earlier in this manual.
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the
Automatic Transmission vehicle, the air suspension system can be used
page 133. Selecting Tow/Haul or connecting a
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The trailer with an Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
CAUTION! 4
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid will disable Automatic Aero mode to avoid height The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent changes while towing and shifting loads or tongue lamps are not properly installed.
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL weights.
mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control). NOTE: BEFORE PLOWING
The vehicle must remain in the engine running position
NOTE: • Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper
while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear range suspension system. fluid level.
(using the ERS shift control) while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
tightness.
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- SNOWPLOW • Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also pro-
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory wear. The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ inches
vide better engine braking.
installed option. These packages include components (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing
Tow/Haul Mode necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow. position.
To reduce potential for automatic transmission over- NOTE: • Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
heating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom-
areas, or select a lower gear range (using the (ERS) mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow the
shift control) on more severe grades. recommendations contained within the current Body
Builder’s Guide. See an authorized dealer, installer or
snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE OVER THE ROAD OPERATION WITH • Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use
4WD LOW when plowing deep or heavy snow for
MODEL AVAILABILITY SNOWPLOW ATTACHED extended periods of time to avoid transmission
For Information about snowplow applications visit The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes overheating.
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Build- the engine to operate at higher than normal tempera- • Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
er’s Guide. tures. Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
blade completely and position it as low as road or sur- practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shift-
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
face conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph ing the transmission.
should not exceed two.
(64 km/h). The operator should always maintain a safe
2. The total GVWR, Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR stopping distance and allow adequate passing clear-
should never be exceeded. ance.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc. OPERATING TIPS
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow sys- Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
tem, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, (32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed. The
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross operator should be familiar with the area and surface
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com- when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
pliance Certification Label on the driver's side door
opening. GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with
NOTE:
the plow manufacturer's instructions.
Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica- terminals clean and free of corrosion.
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drive-
reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the train damage, the following precautions should be
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire observed:
wear. • Operate with transfer case in 4WD LOW when plow-
ing small or congested areas where speeds are not
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds
parked.
operate in 4WD HIGH.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Two-Wheel Drive
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Models
See Instructions
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED • Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in N (Neutral)
• Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED 4
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS 5. Turn the ignition OFF.
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details. 6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
will result.
• Vehicles equipped with Active-Level Four Corner Air ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
Suspension must be placed in Transport mode position.
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
or flatbed truck page 133. If the vehicle cannot trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: CAUTION!
be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine
will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the NOTE: Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
cause loss of proper tie-down tension. Warranty.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — CAUTION! CAUTION!

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
requirements can cause severe transmission the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before recre-
NOTE: and/or transfer case damage. Damage from ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral) for improper towing is not covered under the New
recreational towing. The transmission must be shifted Vehicle Limited Warranty.
into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to the following 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
for the proper transfer case N (Neutral) shifting proce- • Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
with the engine running. Apply the parking brake.
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing dam-
dure for your vehicle.
age to internal parts. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted clamp-on 3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. The driver's door
tow bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face must be closed (or the driver's seat belt buckled) so
bar will be damaged. that the transmission will remain in NEUTRAL when
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with the brake pedal is released.
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
Shifting Into N (Neutral) NOTE:
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
trailer). recreational towing. the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this 4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to WARNING! hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
the transfer case. (at the center of the transfer case switches). The N
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave (Neutral) indicator light will illuminate, and remain
• Before recreational towing, the transfer case must
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N lit, when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete. After
be in N (Neutral). To be certain the transfer case is
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park- the shift is completed and the N (Neutral) light stays
fully in N (Neutral), perform the procedure outlined
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis- on, release the N (Neutral) button.
under “Shifting Into N (Neutral)”. Internal transmis-
engages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
sion damage will result, if the transfer case is not 5. Release the parking brake.
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
in N (Neutral) during towing.
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake 6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational should always be applied when the driver is not in the
towing. vehicle. 7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
and remains released, while being towed. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with the transmission in
(Continued) DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Apply the park- • If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the NOTE:
ing brake. Turn off the engine. For vehicles with Key- engine should be started and left running for a mini-
less Enter ‘n Go™, push and hold the ENGINE mum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at • Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off. The least once every 24 hours. This process allows the before pushing the button to shift out of N (Neutral),
transmission will automatically select PARK when air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride height to and must continue to be met until the shift has
the engine is turned off. compensate for temperature effects. been completed. If any of these requirements are
not met before pushing the button or are no longer
10. Turn the ignition off. Shifting Out Of N (Neutral) met during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
11. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suit- will flash continuously until all requirements are met
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for or until the button is released.
able tow bar. normal usage:
12. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift
start the engine. to take place and for the position indicator lights to
nected to the tow vehicle. be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN
13. Release the parking brake. mode, the shift will not take place and no position
4
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Turn the ignition OFF. indicator lights will be on or flashing.
3. Start the engine. Apply the parking brake. Shift the
NOTE:
transmission into NEUTRAL. • A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
• Steps 2 and 3 are requirements that must be met hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been com-
(at the center of the transfer case switches). DRIVING TIPS
pleted. If any of these requirements are not met 5. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off,
before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are no lon- release the N (Neutral) button. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
ger met during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator 6. Turn the engine off. The transmission will automati-
light will flash continuously until all requirements cally select PARK when the engine is turned off. Acceleration
are met or until the N (Neutral) button is released.
7. Release the brake pedal. Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift 8. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
to take place and for the position indicator lights to erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN 9. Press and hold the brake pedal. when there is a difference in the surface traction under
mode, the shift will not take place and no position the rear (driving) wheels.
indicator lights will be on or flashing. 10. Start the engine.
• A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi- 11. Release the parking brake.
cates that shift requirements have not been met. 12. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle operates
normally.
WARNING! WARNING! CAUTION!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and pos- (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
sibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis- • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). tances. Therefore, after driving through standing cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake internal damage to the engine. Such damage is
pedal several times to dry the brakes. not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER • Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
Driving through water more than a few inches/ ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure gers, and others around you. OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natu-
Flowing/Rising Water CAUTION!
ral obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a
hill, choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as
WARNING! • Always check the depth of the standing water possible. Keep the vehicle moving and make turns
before driving through it. Never drive through slowly and cautiously.
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water standing water that is deeper than the bottom of If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-
water can wear away the road or path's surface and • Determine the condition of the road or the path nally across the hill.
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further- that is under water and if there are any obstacles When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your in the way before driving through the standing shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelera-
vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may water. tor slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects. After Driving Off-Road
Shallow Standing Water • Driving through standing water may cause damage Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal- inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., you can get any problems taken care of right away and
Warnings before doing so. fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after have your vehicle ready when you need it.
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean
as required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide dam-
age to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts. 4
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to pre-
vent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in

mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
188
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS WARNING! UCONNECT SETTINGS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV • ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
With 8.4-inch Display system or your Uconnect 5 NAV vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
With 12-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect contain malicious software, and if installed in your on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons
Owner’s Manual Supplement. vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle allow you to access and change the Customer Program-
systems to be breached. mable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest autho- beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instru-
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle. rized dealer immediately. ment panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER con-
trol knob located on the right side. Turn the control
CYBERSECURITY NOTE:
knob to scroll through menus and change settings.
Push the center of the control knob one or more times
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be to select or change a setting.
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
• To help further improve user experience, features, Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor- security breach, vehicle owners should: MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
○ Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea- Residents) to learn about available Uconnect the screen to turn the screen on.
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful software updates. Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica- ○ Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. certain option on the Uconnect system.
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, For the Uconnect 5 systems, push and hold the Power
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. button on the radio’s faceplate for a minimum of
15 seconds to reset the radio.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
MULTIMEDIA 189
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the Uconnect
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and Uconnect 5 NAV
FEATURES With 12-inch Display
For the Uconnect 3 system, push the SETTINGS button
on the side of the faceplate. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available pro-
grammable features.
For the Uconnect 5 systems, press the Vehicle button,
then press the Settings tab at the top of the touch-
screen. In this menu, the Uconnect system allows you
to access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings 5
may vary.
When making a selection, only press one button at a
time to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired
menu, press and release the preferred setting option
until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is com-
plete, press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen And

Faceplate Buttons
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
190 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are English,
Français, Italiano, and Español.
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization with the radio
Display Mode
display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
Display Brightness Headlights On
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
Display Brightness Headlights Off
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The available options within Custom are “Speed”
(MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or
Units
bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement
independently.
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show
Theme Mode
themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
in Cluster
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The
Time Format
“12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
MULTIMEDIA 191

Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown. The options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
Heated Steering Wheel the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is
started.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will
Radio Power Off
deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are opened.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings page 202.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options. 5
New Text Message Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Trip B This setting will turn the Trip B feature in the cluster on or off.
Audio Info On Cluster This setting will turn the audio info on the cluster on or off.
Digital Speed On All Cluster Screens This setting will show the digital speedometer on all cluster screens.
Consumption Bar On Cluster Screen This setting will show the digital fuel consumption bar on all cluster screens.
Custom Areas On Cluster This setting will allow you to customize the information displayed on the cluster.
Head Up Display This setting will turn the Head Up Display (HUD) on or off.
HUD Brightness This setting will adjust the brightness of the Head Up Display.
HUD Height This setting will adjust the Head Up Display height.
This setting will adjust the amount of content displayed on the Head Up Display. The available options are “Simple”, “Standard”,
HUD Content
and “Advanced”.
192 MULTIMEDIA

Audio Repetition This setting will turn the system audio repetition on or off.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are English,
Français, Italiano, and Español.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
ON/Brightness Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
OFF/Brightness Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Con-
sumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US],
Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show
themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
in Cluster
MULTIMEDIA 193

Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
5
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the
FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW sys-
tem signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far dis-
tance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning
Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
LaneSense Warning This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are
“Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”,
“Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and can provide both an audible chime and a
visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
194 MULTIMEDIA

Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off
Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will
activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto” setting will have the system automatically set the trailer
length. The “Max” setting will always set the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Guidelines
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Guidelines
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Power Side Steps This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The available options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the power
side steps and “Stow” to deactivate the power side steps.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The
“12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will
increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
MULTIMEDIA 195

Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will
increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
5
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
196 MULTIMEDIA

Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is completed by the system. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List. The “With
Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn
the Command List off.
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Trailer Brake/Trailer — If Equipped
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Trailer 1 Options for each Trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric, Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Elec-
tric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete
Tire Settings).
Tire Settings).
MULTIMEDIA 197

Tire Settings).
Tire Settings).
Trailer Surround Camera This setting will let you access options related to the Trailer Surround Camera.
Trailer Select Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations can be used to save different trailer
settings.
Trailer Brake Type This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric
Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the fol-
lowing list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility,
and 5th wheel. 5
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Guidelines
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Guidelines
198 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is
in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
• When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchased.
• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The avail-
able settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Steering Directed Lights This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 199
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
5
NOTE:
Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door”
Press Of Key Fob Unlocks setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only
one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
200 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote
Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is
started.
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will
Delay deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will
increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
MULTIMEDIA 201
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Sound Horn With Lower This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the key fob.
Display Suspension Messages This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages.
The “Warnings Only” setting will only display warning messages.
Aero Mode This setting will automatically adjust the vehicle ride height depending on the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will lower the vehicle to Entry/Exit height and then disable the Air Suspension system for flat towing. 5
Wheel Alignment Mode This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment, which will move the vehicle to normal ride height and then
disable the Air Suspension system. Contact an authorized dealer for further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in
changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is
selected before performing a wheel alignment. Contact an authorized dealer for further information.
202 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Switches
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:
AUX 1-4 This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momen-
tary”. The power source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting
the type and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX switches were set. The Recalled
Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source
is set to Ignition.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be
moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds
up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
MULTIMEDIA 203
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Notification Sounds This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
5
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
• A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Tune Start This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
204 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
Reset/Restore Settings To Default
When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default
settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset your vehicle’s performance values.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be
pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices
and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection. The available options are “Yes” and
“Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 205
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
YSTEM OVERVIEW

1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
206 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Radio/Media Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and
access the radio functions and external audio sources page 208.
Phone Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone
system page 216.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings page 188.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on
the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio
station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push
it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing or being
stuck.
MULTIMEDIA 207
Feature Description
Compass Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.
SAFETY AND GENERAL Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System General Information
INFORMATION • The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
device. Do not let young children use the system. Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Safety Guidelines • Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise with Innovation, Science, and Economic Canada
caution when setting the volume on the system. license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to
WARNING! the following two conditions:
• Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering away from the system. Besides damage to the sys- 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all tem, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and electronic device. 2. This device must accept any interference received,
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when including interference that may cause undesired 5
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an NOTE: operation.
accident involving serious injury or death. Many features of this system are speed dependent. For Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion. aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
Please read this manual carefully before using the sys-
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
tem. It contains instructions on how to use the system
in a safe and effective manner.
Care And Maintenance
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so • Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
can result in damage to the touchscreen. objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface. radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est sus-
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure ceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
to do so may result in injury or property damage. • Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
• Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If pro- cloth in order to clean the touchscreen. siguientes dos condiciones:
longed viewing of the screen is required, park in a
safe location and set the parking brake. • If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an interferencia perjudicial y
• Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50.
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
do so may cause injury or damage to the product. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precau-
See an authorized dealer for repair. interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
tions and directions page 376.
operación no deseada.
• Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and
emergency vehicles.
208 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Pushing the center button will make the radio switch RADIO MODE
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s Media, etc.). Radio Controls
authority to operate the equipment. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand con-
trol is different depending on which mode you are in.
UCONNECT MODES The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the next
The remote sound system controls are located on the available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine will Seek Down for the next available station.
o’clock positions.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing
the switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing 1 — Preset Radio Stations
the bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current 2 — All Preset Radio Stations
track, or the beginning of the previous track if it is 3 — Seek Down
within eight seconds after the current track begins to 4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip 5 — Tune
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into the 6 — Station Info
Remote Sound System Controls current track. 7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the The radio is equipped with the following modes:
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the • AM
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. • FM
• SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
MULTIMEDIA 209
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SXM, can then be selected by pressing the correspond- Seek Down button to advance the radio through SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like to
ing button in Radio Mode. the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite
Volume & On/Off Control radio stops at the next available station or channel Radio trial required.)
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and when the button on the touchscreen is released.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait
off the Uconnect system.
NOTE: for the beep to say a command. See an example:
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Seek • “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise
Down button will scan the different frequency • “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
bands at a slower rate. Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases
it. Info — If Equipped to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
Press the Info button to display information related to button and say “ Help”. The system provides you
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
the currently playing song and radio station. with a list of commands.
set at the same volume level as last played.
Direct Tune
Mute Button SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the 5
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio station If Equipped
Tune/Scroll Control or channel.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to Press the available number button on the touchscreen
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio sta- to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
tion frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
choose a selection. (stations that cannot be reached) will become
Seek deactivated/grayed out.
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by Undo
pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen You can backspace an entry by pressing the Back
to the right and left of the radio station display or by button on the touchscreen.
pushing the left steering wheel audio control button up
or down. GO
Seek Up and Seek Down Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
“GO”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
will automatically tune to that station. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
210 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all to change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button,
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not and Favorite button functions are available in
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and receive a signal in underground parking garages or SiriusXM® Mode.
others. tunnels.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to- No Subscription
receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a sub-
coast-to-coast radio content. SiriusXM® is a scription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
subscription-based service. does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
Visit www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review your able to receive the Preview channel only.
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual kit Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
for more information. To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription,
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold sepa- US residents visit www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or
rately after the trial included with the new vehicle pur- call: 1-800-643-2112
chase. If you decide to continue your service at the end Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or
of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will auto- call: 1-888-539-7474.
matically renew and bill at then-current rates until you
call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See NOTE:
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen. Radio
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM® The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
satellite service is available only to those at least button on the touchscreen. 1 — Browse
18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our 2 — Radio Bands
When in Satellite Mode:
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada 3 — Direct Tune
and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® • The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted. 4 — Info Button
Internet radio service is available throughout their satel- • The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of 5 — Next Button
lite service area and in AK. © 2023 SiriusXM® Radio the screen.
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are • The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the REPLAY
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. center. Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
This functionality is only available for radios equipped • The Program Information is displayed at the bottom 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite of the Channel Number. radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay
radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view
to the sky. • The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below memory is lost.
the Program Information. Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at
Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
MULTIMEDIA 211
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to

pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time.
Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button
again on the touchscreen.
Rewind Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind

the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the con-
tent at the point at which the press is released.
Forward Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen

forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding 5
of the content can only be done when the content is pre-
viously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is
released.
Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the
playing of live content.
FAVORITES The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favor-
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to acti- or song that is currently playing. The radio then uses ite artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
vate the favorites menu, which will time out within this information to alert you when either the favorite and then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
20 seconds in absence of user interaction. artist or song is being played at any time by any of the Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favor-
SiriusXM® Channels. ite song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button. The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in and then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.
the Radio is 50.
212 MULTIMEDIA
BROWSE IN SXM Remove Favorites Alert Settings

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, screen. Press the Delete Faves button on the touch- Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert
along with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List. screen to delete all of the Favorites or press the Trash me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score
Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted. update” or both when one or more of your selections is
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
Alert Settings airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow. Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites Tune Start
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose
All from a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
Press the All button on the Browse screen. After press- of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
of the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
ing the All button, the following categories become channels.
preset is selected during that current song.
available:
Game Zone
• All: Press the All button to display all the SiriusXM® Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Setting Presets
Channel Numbers. You can scroll the list by pressing
the Up and Down arrows, located on the right side of Browse screen. This feature provides you with the abil-
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating ity to select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
the TUNE/SCROLL knob. On-Air — If Equipped
• Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch- Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select any list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the
desired Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the
tunes to a channel with the content in the selected items in the list tunes the radio to that channel.
Genre. Add/Delete — If Equipped
Favorites Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to acti-
vate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league and
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favor- then you can select a team by pressing the correspond-
ites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with ing box. A check mark appears for all teams that are Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the chosen.
items in the Favorites list.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. at the top of the screen.
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/ When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
to delete all of the selections or press the Trash Can
SCROLL knob as well. preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
icon next to the selection to be deleted.
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
MULTIMEDIA 213
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio

Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen. Press
the All button to view all saved presets. To remove a
saved preset, a new preset must be saved over the old
one.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main menu
to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Audio Setting Description 5

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the
Balance/Fade rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the
Balance/Fade.
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which
Equalizer
spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio
Speed Adjusted Volume
volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which
AUX Volume Offset
spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened or until the “Radio
Radio Off With Door
Off Delay” selected time has expired.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports,
Auto Play
when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
214 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE Audio Source Selection BLUETOOTH® MODE

Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select Overview
Operating Media Mode button on the touchscreen and the desired mode but- Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
ton on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing
the Media sources available. When available, you can music, to the Uconnect system.
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to be
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
given these options:
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the
• Now Playing Uconnect system.
• Artists On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the MEDIA
• Albums button located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
• Genres press the Source button on the touchscreen and select
the Bluetooth® button page 216.
• Songs To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® but-
• Playlists ton on the left side of the touchscreen or under the
• Folders Source Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media Mode is
entered by pushing the MEDIA button located on the AUX MODE
faceplate. Overview
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
Types of Media Modes device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the
1 — Seek Down AUX port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on the face-
2 — Browse
USB MODE
plate, selecting the Source button, and then the AUX
3 — Source Overview button.
4 — Pause/Play USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
5 — Info USB port, by pushing the MEDIA button on the face- device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
6 — More Options plate and then selecting the USB button.
7 — Seek Up device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert a switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit will Controlling The Auxiliary Device
switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The display will
located on the faceplate. The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting play-
show the track number and index time in minutes and
lists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the vol-
ume with the Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob,
or the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of the
attached device.
MULTIMEDIA 215
NOTE: On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the Info

The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate or press the In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume con- Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll through and to display the current track information. Press the Info
trol on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be select a desired track on the device. Press the Exit but- or X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel
insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the ton on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse this feature.
music on the device. function.
Tracks
Seek Up /Seek Down Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touch-
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the touch- In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song
screen for the next selection on the USB device. Press screen to select the desired audio source: USB. currently playing is indicated by an arrow and lines
and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the above and below the song title. When in the Tracks List
to return to the beginning of the current selection, or to touchscreen to select the desired audio source: screen you can rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to high-
return to the beginning of the previous selection if the Bluetooth®. light a track (indicated by the line above and below the
USB device is within the first three seconds of the cur- In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touch- track name) and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob
rent selection. screen to select the desired audio source: AUX. to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up Repeat In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touch-
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touch- 5
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down screen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The cur-
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of screen to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
rently playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the button on the touchscreen is highlighted when active.
above and below the song title.
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the The Radio will continue to play the current track,
repeatedly, as long as the repeat is active. Press the Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while
first second of the current selection. the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
Repeat button again to enter Repeat All. The radio will
Browse continue to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touch- long as the repeat function is active. To cancel Repeat,
screen to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the press the Repeat button a third time. Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and
left side of the browse window displays a list of ways auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available
Shuffle
you can browse through the contents of the USB device. for connected USB and AUX devices.
If supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touch-
Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.
Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired but- screen to play the selections on the USB device in ran-
After the beep, say one of the following commands and
ton on the touchscreen on the left side of the screen. dom order to provide an interesting change of pace.
follow the prompts to switch your media source or
The center of the browse window shows items and their Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second
choose an artist:
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by press- time to turn this feature off.
ing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/ Audio • “ Change source to Bluetooth®”
SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll. Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio • “ Change source to AUX”
button page 208. • “ Change source to USB”
216 MULTIMEDIA
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Screen Activated Features

WARNING!
Hits”; “ Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre • Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the touch-
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
played on the touchscreen. wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
screen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and
Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, • Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
album, song, and genre information is displayed. it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs. accident involving serious injury or death.
PHONE MODE • Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
Overview access to connect to them quickly. “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that
NOTE: enables different electronic devices to connect to each
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial
a phone number with your mobile phone. Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via other without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly. phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and has
The feature supports the following:
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile
Voice Activated Features vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically phones or audio devices are allowed to be linked to the
• Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone. system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”). For Uconnect customer support: one audio device can be used with the system at a
• Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming time.
SMS messages.
• US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400 Phone Button
• Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of • Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call The Phone button on your steering wheel is
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text 800-387-9983 used to get into the Phone Mode and make
messages. calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). calls, view phonebook, etc. When you push
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
the button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's
to give a command.
Back”). microphone for private conversation.
Voice Command Button
• Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,” The Voice Command button on your steering
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or
“Show Recent Calls”). wheel is only used for “barge in” and when
you are already in a call or want to make
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for another call.
John Smith Mobile”).
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice
Command features if your vehicle is equipped.
MULTIMEDIA 217
Phone Operation NATURAL SPEECH You can also push the VR button or Phone button on
your steering wheel when the system is listening for a
OPERATION Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
command and be returned to the main or previous
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect menu.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice com-
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
mands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” PHONE
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
Command works: Use this QR code to access your digital
would like to”.
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith experience.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
mobile”. or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system you must pair your compatible
to guide you to complete the task. tence, the system identifies the topic or context and Scan me
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then Mobile phone pairing is the process of
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call
guided through the available options. establishing a wireless connection between a cellular
was requested but the specific name was not
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for recognized. phone and the Uconnect system. 5
the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
another prompt. ence your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit
requires more information from the user, it will ask a
• For certain operations, compound commands can question to which the user can respond without push- UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
be used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and ing the Voice Command button on the steering wheel. compatibility information.
then “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith HELP COMMAND
mobile.” If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
compound command form of the voice command is the beep.
given. You can also break the commands into parts To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push
and say each part of the command when you are the Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and
asked for it. For example, you can use the com- say a command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin
pound command form voice command “Search for with a push of the VR button or the Phone button.
John Smith,” or you can break the compound com-
mand form into two voice commands: “Search Con- CANCEL COMMAND
tacts” and when asked, “John Smith.” Please At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best when you will be returned to the main menu. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
218 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a NOTE:
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone button from the Uconnect Phone main screen. on your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to
to complete this procedure.
○ Press the Paired Phones button or the Add access your “messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok”
• The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. Device button. or “Allow” will sync your contacts with the Uconnect
Follow these steps to pair your phone: ○ Search for available devices on your system.
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When You can also use the following VR command to bring up
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
2. Press the Phone button. accept the connection request. • “Show Paired Phones”
NOTE: 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
NOTE:
while the system is connecting.
○ If there are no phones currently connected with Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect sys-
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you 7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If
would like to pair a mobile phone. tem, select “Uconnect.” this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. How-
○ This pop-up only appears when the user enters
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the ever, first make sure to delete the device from the list of
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ- phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
ously been paired. If the system has a phone connection request from Uconnect.
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
previously paired, even if no phone is currently 9. When the pairing process has successfully com- phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
connected with the system, this pop-up will not pleted, the system will prompt you to choose
appear. whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. “Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
phone will take precedence over other paired
4. Search for available devices on your Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high-
phones within range and will connect to the
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
Uconnect system automatically when entering the
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or
○ Press the Settings button on your mobile phone. vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
audio device follow these steps:
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the
○ Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled. Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, sim- 1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections. ply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect system
NOTE: will reconnect to the Bluetooth® device. 3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
NOTE: “Connect Phone”.
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN For phones which are not made a favorite, the
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
from the pop-up on your mobile phone. phone priority is determined by the order in which it
was paired. The most recent phone paired will have
the higher priority.
MULTIMEDIA 219
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A • A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four num-
AUDIO DEVICE FAVORITE bers per contact will be downloaded and updated
every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press Phone.
the Settings button located to the right of the device • Depending on the maximum number of entries
name for a different phone or audio device than the downloaded, there may be a short delay before the
currently connected device or press the preferred latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if
“Connected Phone” from the list. available, the previously downloaded phonebook is
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. available for use.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;

• Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
you will see the chosen device move to the top of
the list. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC phone connection.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE 5
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button. There are two ways you can add an entry to your favor-
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the
ites:
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button. ability to download contact names and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
device name for a different phone or audio device support this feature. Your mobile phone may receive a one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
than the currently connected device or press the pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect system appears on the list.
preferred Connected Phone from the list. to access your messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok”
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select “Con-
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. or “Allow” will sync your contacts with the Uconnect
tacts” from the Phone main screen, and then select
system.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow but-
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for ton or the Settings Gear button next to the selected
button on the touchscreen. supported phones. number to display the option’s pop-up. In the pop-
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. • To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone- up, select “Add to Favorites”.
book page 222.
NOTE:
• Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wire-
less phone connection is made to the Uconnect remove an existing favorite.
Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
220 MULTIMEDIA
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED CALL CONTROLS KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY

1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the The touchscreen allows you to control the following call 1. Press the Phone button.
Phone main screen. features:
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
Gear icon next to the contact you want to remove
from your favorites. This will bring up the options for 4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
that Favorite contact. enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite. RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
Phone Call Features You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and sup- • All Calls
ported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For • Incoming Calls or Calls Received
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way • Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
calling, this feature can be accessed through the • Missed Calls
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
vider for the features that you have. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display button on the phone main screen.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
• Redial 1 — Answer and perform the above operation. For example, say
• Dial by pressing in the number 2 — Mute/Unmute “Show my incoming calls”.
3 — Ignore
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by 4 — Transfer ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
• Favorites Other phone call features include:
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
• Mobile Phonebook • End Call Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
• Recent Call Log • Hold/Unhold/Resume Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
• SMS Message Viewer • Swap two active calls Answer button on the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 221
DO NOT DISTURB MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from CALL IS IN PROGRESS
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent
missed calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes- TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
sage, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display • Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
5
1 — Answer Button NOTE:
2 — Caller ID Box
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS selected so you can still place a second call without
being interrupted by incoming calls. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your NOTE: If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
mobile phone. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
• Reply with text message is not compatible with Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
iPhone® devices. You can also push the Phone button to toggle between
press the Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call. • Auto reply with text message is only available on the active and held phone call.
phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
JOIN CALLS
NOTE: Profile (MAP).
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone
in the market today do not support rejecting an incom-
ing call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it. button on the Phone main screen.
222 MULTIMEDIA
CALL TERMINATION Things You Should Know About Number and name recognition rate is optimized when
the entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”)
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Uconnect Phone for “0” (zero).
Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button
on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be ter- VOICE COMMAND Even though international dialing for most number com-
minated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the For the best performance: binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
new active call. combinations may not be supported.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking Audio Performance
REDIAL • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away Audio quality is maximized under:
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.” from you • Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
The Uconnect Phone will call the last num- • Ensure that no one other than you is speaking dur- • Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
ber that was dialed from your mobile phone.
ing a voice command period • Low Road Noise
CALL CONTINUATION
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting • Smooth Road Surface
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed • Fully Closed Windows
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on
the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
• Low Road Noise • Dry Weather Conditions
switched to OFF. • Smooth Road Surface • Operation From The Driver's Seat
• Fully Closed Windows Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
NOTE: • Dry Weather Conditions to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system not the Uconnect Phone.
until the phone becomes out of range for the Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by low-
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the WARNING!
ering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
vehicle. Phone Voice Commands
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and appli- Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
Advanced Phone Connectivity cations in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci- nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE dent involving serious injury or death. UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility
PHONE and pairing instructions.
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Even though the system is designed for many lan- Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
ferred from your mobile phone without terminating the guages and accents, the system may not always work say a command. Here are some examples:
call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa,
for some. • “ Call John Smith”
press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen. NOTE: • “ Dial 123 456 7890”
It is recommended that you do not store names in your • “ Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
MULTIMEDIA 223
• “ Call back” (call previously answered incoming NOTE: POWER-UP

phone number) Only use the numbering listed in the provided table. After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message. ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change,
the Phone button and say “ Call”, then pronounce Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the
the name exactly as it appears in your phonebook. implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) system page 376.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can to take advantage of this feature. For details about
say “ Call John Smith work”. MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading incom- CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
ing text messages only. For further information on how
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push
the VR button or Phone button and say:
to enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to IF EQUIPPED
your iPhone® “User Manual”.
1. “ Listen” to have the system read an incoming text Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
paired to Uconnect system.) If equipped, vehicles with ASSIST and SOS buttons are
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
connected vehicles. These buttons will be located on
2. “ Reply” after an incoming text message has been Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped either the rearview mirror or overhead console,
read. depending on the vehicle. If these buttons are present 5
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, in your vehicle, you have a connected radio and can
your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice
repeat one of the predefined messages and follow take advantage of the many connected vehicle
to send text messages, select media, place phone calls
the system prompts. features.
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back to con- For further information about the ASSIST and SOS but-
firm your requests. The system is designed to keep your tons page 289.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later. Siri help you perform useful tasks. INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED
No.
Start without
I’ll be late. To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the VEHICLE SERVICES
me. Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s Uconnect
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or wheel. After you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to
system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM
10, 15, 20, 25, play podcasts and music, get directions, read text mes-
Guardian™ connected services. To unlock the full
Are you there 30, 45, 60> sages, and many other useful requests.
Call me. potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you
yet? minutes late.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK first need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
I need See you in 5 services.
I’ll call you later. <or 10, 15, 20, Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
directions.
25, 30, 45, 60> Phone. When this happens, the connection can gener-
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes. ally be re-established by restarting the mobile phone.
now. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
I’m lost. Thanks. Bluetooth® ON mode.
224 MULTIMEDIA
WARNING!
device. SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on • The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget
equipped vehicles purchased within the continental where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada. of the Mobile App.
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-
NOTE:
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and use Uconnect system and SiriusXM Guardian™ con-
assume all risks related to the use of the features • Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are nected services.
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features dependent upon an operative telematics device, a The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS Mirror Or Overhead Console
comply may result in an accident involving serious satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability If equipped, the ASSIST button is used for contacting
injury or death. to reach the response center or reach emergency Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and
support. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. The SOS Call but-
NOTE: • Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available ton connects you directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or tomer Care for assistance in an emergency.
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, transmis-
enclosed areas.
sion and use of data from your vehicle page 237. Activation — If Equipped
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact
• Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM Guard- To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in
ian™ that may limit or prevent service delivery are
your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guard-
Information hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather, dam-
ian™ connected services.
age to the electrical system or other important parts
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
of your vehicle, network congestion, civil distur- 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
• US residents visit: bances, actions of third parties or the government, touchscreen.
https://www.driveuconnect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your
or call 1-844-796-4827 vehicle, such as in an underground parking struc- 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps.
• Canadian residents visit: ture or under a bridge.
https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available for 3. For customers in the United States, select “Cus-
or call 1-877-324-9091 all models. tomer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent who will activate services in
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™? SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in the • The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start the web.
your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the
Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which Mobile App or your computer. For customers in Canada, enter your email address
receives GPS signals and communicates with the to activate services in your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center via wireless • If equipped — Send & Go capability with the Mobile
and landline communications networks. Depending on App. Use the Mobile App to easily search, map and
the type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM send your locations directly to your Uconnect
Guardian™ connected services require an operable LTE Navigation.
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network compatible with your
MULTIMEDIA 225
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles • For customers in the United States, visit accessories for your vehicle, watch videos about your
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/Register vehicle's features, and easily access your manuals. It is
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
button in the upper right-hand corner to register also where you can manage your SiriusXM Guardian™
period for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected ser-
your account online. account. This section will familiarize you with the key
vices starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get
• For customers in Canada, register your account via elements of the website that will help you get the most
started with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM Guard-
your vehicle. of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
ian™ is required.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only. a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar.
In/Register button and enter your email address and
b. Press the Activate Services button from the password.
Features And Packages apps list. For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button.
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health Report”, and
to continue your services by calling a SiriusXM Guard- c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confirmation
email will be sent to the provided email address. “Recalls”. The website will then prompt you to log in
ian™ Customer Care agent. using your email address and password.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confirma-
GETTING STARTED WITH tion email. It may take a short time before • Edit/Edit Profile:
remote services will be available, but you will be To manage the details of your SiriusXM Guardian™
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES able to log into the Mobile App and the Owner’s account, such as your contact information, pass- 5
Site. word and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN, click on the
Download The Mobile App Edit/Edit Profile button to access the details of your
Once you have activated your services, you’re only a few
• Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
account.
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door
steps away from using connected services. Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate • Connected Services Status:
• Download the Mobile App to your mobile device. your horn and lights remotely, if equipped. This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
• Use your Owner Account login and password to open • Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
the app and then set up a PIN. of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle • Remote Commands:
or send a location to your Mobile Navigation, For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™ sub-
if equipped. scription, press one of these icons and enter your
• Press the Settings side menu in the upper left cor- four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN to
ner of the app to bring up app settings and access remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or
the Assist Call Centers. sound the horn and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Using Your Owner’s Site Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM
Your Owner’s Site website Guardian™ account. For example, any time you use
https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or your remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock),
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you with you can elect to receive a text message, push notifica-
all the information you need, all in one place. You can tion, and/or E-mail to notify you of the event.
track your service history, find recommended
226 MULTIMEDIA
To set up the notifications, please follow these With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard ○ During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
instructions: assistance features located on the rearview mirror or phone is disconnected so incoming or outgoing
overhead console designed to enhance your driving calls will go through your mobile device versus
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
experience if you should ever need assistance or the hands-free system which is not available due
https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
support. to the SOS Call.
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle” and then Description 2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
“Dashboard”. SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is made,
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the the agent will stay on the line with you.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
event of an emergency. When the connection between
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” where you the vehicle and the live agent is made, your vehicle will NOTE:
can edit Notification Preferences. automatically transmit location information. In the Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
event of a minor collision, medical or any other emer- SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address
gency, press the SOS button to be connected to a call recorded or monitored for quality assurance pur-
to notify you, and you can customize the types of
center agent who can send emergency assistance to poses. Through your enrollment in and use of the
messages.
your vehicle’s location. SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, you con-
sent to being recorded.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ NOTE: SOS Call System Limitations
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
SOS Call — If Equipped dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that
travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited ser-
network availability that is compatible with the device in
vices. In particular, responses to SOS calls or other
WARNING! your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all fea-
emergency services may be unavailable or very limited.
tures of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere
Vehicles purchased outside the United States and
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ con-
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will How It Works nected services.
NOT work without a network connection compatible
with your device. 1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
green indicating a call has been placed. following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected:
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A NOTE:
Button • The light will continuously be illuminated red.
○ In case the SOS Call button is accidentally • The screen will display the following message
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before the
Center Light Status Description SOS call is placed. The system will verbally alert
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
Off No call activated you that a call is about to be made. To cancel the
Green Active call in progress
SOS Call connection, push the SOS Call button • An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
on the rearview mirror or overhead console or phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
Red System error press the Cancel button on the touchscreen
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features within 10 seconds.
MULTIMEDIA 227
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors

beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop SOS WARNING! WARNING!
Call system operation. These include, but are not lim- • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
ited to, the following factors: • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
• The ignition key is in OFF position. could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent. All
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. GPS signal reception, which can prevent your
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and
vehicle from placing an emergency call.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- move to a safe location.
nected during a vehicle crash. • Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent • Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and
your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an regular inspection of your vehicle may result in
damaged during a vehicle crash.
emergency call. To avoid interference that can vehicle damage, accident or injury.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
signals are unavailable or obstructed. market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB
• Network congestion. radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri- Automatic SOS — If Equipped
• Weather conditions. cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON immediately connect you with help in the event that
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an accident, a live
5
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason NEITHER THE MOBILE APPS NOR THE SIRIUSXM agent will contact you through the Uconnect system
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED SERVICES WILL and alert emergency services.
system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate. OPERATE.
Requirements NOTE:
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on
• This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is required
US or Canada. if a malfunction in any part of the air bag system is for this feature to function.
• Vehicle must be properly equipped with the detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- After a crash where the airbags deploy:
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services. Vehicle nated, the air bag system may not be working prop-
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an agent.
must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and erly and the SOS Call system may not be able to
have an active subscription that includes the appli- send a signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer 2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the loca-
cable feature. Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- tion of the emergency.
nated, have an authorized dealer service your
• Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or vehicle immediately.
3. If needed, the agent will request the assistance of
4G (data) network connection compatible with your emergency services.
device. • Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The agent will
will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the
• Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, have an remain on the call until emergency services arrive.
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning elec-
trical system. authorized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
(Continued)
228 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: • In the event vehicle occupants are unable to speak, Remote Commands
emergency services will be dispatched based on the
• Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the case last known GPS coordinates.
On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to
of an emergency. several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely
• SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are depen- from your mobile device. These features include
• On your behalf, agents are able to notify family dent upon an operative telematics device, a cellular locking/unlocking, remote starting, and activating the
members about the collision. connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite horn and lights of the vehicle.
• Agents can brief first responders of the situation reception, which can limit the ability to reach the
before they arrive on scene. response center or reach emergency support.
• Terms of service of the Uconnect and the SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply. See terms
of services for complete service limitation.
Lock Press this button to lock your vehicle.
Vehicle Start Press this button to start your vehicle.
Horn & Lights Press this button to sound the horn and activate your lights.
Unlock Press this button to unlock your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start Press this button to cancel remote start.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your 2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM NOTE:
vehicle in one of three ways: Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit If you forgot your username or password, links are
• Anywhere using your mobile device and Mobile App code established when you activated your SiriusXM provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
Guardian™ connected services). Enter the SiriusXM
• From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not avail- Guardian™ Security PIN on the keypad. 2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into
able on all functions) your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you want to
• Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (not 3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to send the command to by clicking on its image along
available on all functions) go through to your vehicle. the top.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile 4. A message will let you know if the command was 3. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands.
Device And The Mobile App received by your vehicle. Press the desired icon to activate that feature.
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Site 4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM Guard-
mobile device. 1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the username and ian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code
password you used when activating your SiriusXM established when you activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle. Guardian™ connected services). Please enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
MULTIMEDIA 229
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know • Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or Working Vehicle Conditions
if the command was received by your vehicle. 4G (data) network connection. If using the Mobile • The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (for App to command your vehicle, your device must be
example, in case of an accidental lock-out): compatible and be connected to an operable LTE • The vehicle has been started with the key fob within
the last 14 days.
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care if you
• Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ • The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
are unable to lock your vehicle through the Mobile • The vehicle’s security system has been armed and
and have an active subscription that includes the
App or your key fob. not triggered since the last vehicle start.
applicable feature.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus- • An ignition cycle is required for some remote com- • The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
tomer Care agent will verify your identity by asking mands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote • The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
for your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN. Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn &
Lights activation.
• The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security fuel, along with oil and battery power.
PIN, you can ask them to perform a remote • Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be
• The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
command. processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key
is on or during an emergency call. • If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
NOTE: transmission.
Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote NOTE: • The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower 5
Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect All other remote services should be performed via your reception.
your PIN appropriately. Owner’s Site or through the Mobile App on your compat- • Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
ible device. connection.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock • If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle
Description Remote Vehicle Start must be started at least once after alarming the
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the Description system.
ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the
NOTE:
the keys and from virtually any distance. ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the
keys and from virtually any distance. Once started, the The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents are not
Working Vehicle Conditions authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact
preset climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or
• The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. cool down the interior. the Uconnect Care Team for assistance.
• The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
You can also send a command to turn off an engine Remote Horn & Lights
that has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After
• Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi 15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with Description
connection. the key, the engine will shut off automatically. It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
Requirements This remote function requires your vehicle to be parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may
• Vehicle must be properly equipped with SiriusXM equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start system. also help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle
Guardian™. for any reason.
You can set up push notifications every time a com-
mand is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start.
230 MULTIMEDIA
If you want, you can set up push notifications every • Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all non- we may record and monitor your conversations with
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and lights. connected Uconnect system features, such as radio Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care,
Working Vehicle Conditions and Bluetooth® connections. or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether such
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle. conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM Guard-
• The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. ian™ connected services in your vehicle, or via a land-
• The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features —
line or mobile device, and may share information
reception. If Equipped
obtained through such recording and monitoring in
• Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowl-
connection. assistance features located on the rearview mirror or edge, agree and consent to any recording, monitoring
overhead console designed to enhance your driving or sharing of information obtained through any such
NOTE: experience if you should ever need assistance or call recordings.
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be support.
loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the sur- How It Works Send & Go — If Equipped
roundings when using this feature. You are responsible Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you Description
for compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in will be presented with your ASSIST options on the
the location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a desti-
touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the nation on your mobile device, and then send the route
Lights. touchscreen. to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
Assist — If Equipped Requirements How It Works
Description • This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the 1. There are multiple ways to find a destination. After
US and Canada.
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™ con- selecting the Location tab at the bottom of the App,
nected services feature may contain an ASSIST button • Vehicle must be properly equipped with the browse through one of the categories provided, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services. type the name or keyword in the search box. You can
in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ con-
nected services have been activated, the ASSIST button • Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or also select categories such as “Favorites” or “Con-
can connect you directly to the Customer Care call cen- 4G (data) network connection. tact List”.
ter (if equipped). You will be directed to one of the fol- • Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ 2. Select your destination from the list that appears.
lowing four services: and have an active subscription that includes the Location information will then be displayed on the
• Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or need applicable feature. map.
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help • Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC From this screen, you will be able to:
anytime. (Accessory) position with a properly functioning elec-
• Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM Guard- trical system. ○ View the location on a map.
ian™ Customer Care call center to activate your ser- Disclaimers ○ See the distance from your current location.
vices, renew after your trial has expired, for If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, ○ Send the destination to the vehicle (Send & Go).
in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM Guardian™ con- you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside 3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in
nected services, or help answering any general assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to your vehicle. You can also call the destination by
questions surrounding your connected services. provide SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services to you, pressing the Call button.
MULTIMEDIA 231
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through a 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription
notification or in the Navigation system. to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
Description
Requirements 1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects
• Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase button
4G (data) network connection compatible with your that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made and follow the instructions.
device. your purchase, turn on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect 2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to the
• Vehicle must have an active subscription that your devices. AT&T portal to get set up.
includes the applicable feature.
• Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously 3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push the
connected to the web.
Vehicle Finder ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer
Description
• Connect several devices at one time. Care agent who will assist you.
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the loca-

• Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can
other portable-enabled media — can connect over change its name and the password by selecting the
tion of your vehicle. your private in-vehicle network. Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to • A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on button. You can also view the connected devices from
make finding your vehicle even easier. your private network access the Web — great for the app screen by pressing the View Connected Devices 5
How It Works working and relaxing. button.
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the Mobile App
NOTE:
and select the Location tab at the bottom of the App. WARNING!
Then, press the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle. A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required in
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Requirements
while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an
• Vehicle must be properly equipped with the accident involving serious injury or death. WARNING!
Uconnect system.
• Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle Always drive safely with your hands on the steering
4G (data) network connection compatible with your wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full
device. How It Works responsibility and assume all risks related to the use
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only
• Vehicle must have an active subscription that vehicle passengers with an internet access use the features and applications in this vehicle when
includes the applicable feature.
hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
• Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within access point. The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled accident involving in serious injury or death.
14 days. in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any other
portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly connect to
the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month
trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can
be activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
232 MULTIMEDIA
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped • Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more infor-
4G (data) network connection compatible with your mation, located at
Description
device. www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/privacy.html
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus- (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
tomer Care agent may be able to locate the stolen • Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
Residents).
and have an active subscription that includes the
vehicle and work with law enforcement to help recover applicable feature. For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ private
it.
policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.
How It Works NOTE:
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforce- Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
ment as soon as possible. They will work with you to everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or Description
file a stolen vehicle report. enclosed areas.
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Monthly Vehicle Health Report — problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. For fur-
ther information, go to your Owner’s website.
that your vehicle has been stolen. If Equipped
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent will Description NOTE:
ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service
by your local law enforcement). If you have down- activate services. During this process you will be asked
through which a summary of the performance of your
loaded the Mobile App, you can push the Settings to provide an email address to which the reports will be
vehicle’s key systems will be sent to you every month so
menu button on your device, select “Help”, and then sent.
you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance
select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care” to
needs. This is provided as a convenience to you and
make the call.
does not substitute for regular maintenance to your In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will authenti- vehicle. Description
cate that you are the owner of the vehicle and con- In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report, Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you
tact the law enforcement with whom you filed the the Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and when services are needed, or to alert you of other
stolen vehicle report. transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM Guardian™ and to important information, such as recall notices. When you
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work with FCA, such as your vehicle’s health and performance, receive a notification through your touchscreen, press
your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You your vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in OK to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to speak
will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle your vehicle, and other data. with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
is recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you This data collection and transmission begins when you
NOTE:
should also contact your insurance company to enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue even if
inform it of the situation. you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen will
unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Mes-
Requirements sages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can
tell them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.
• Vehicle must be properly equipped with the reopen messages or delete messages.
Uconnect system.
MULTIMEDIA 233
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped 5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle brand> To link your Uconnect account with Google Assistant,
Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT. follow these steps:
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command
your vehicle with Amazon Alexa! 6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This 1. Download and install the Google Assistant app on
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and will be the same user name and password you used your smart phone from the App Store® or Google
remotely access key services and features. when registering for SiriusXM Guardian™ connected Play.
services. There will be additional settings to confirm
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, 2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant app
on the following screen.
you can send a destination directly to your vehicle using with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by pressing
Alexa. 7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the <vehicle the icon in the upper right-hand corner.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for brand> Skill.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left corner
help, or complete a list of commands by saying: “Alexa, You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand name.
ask <brand name> for help with my car.” Alexa!
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect account.
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
Alexa: Google Assistant — If Equipped Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and keep 5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address and
• “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle tabs on your car. Google Assistant is available across password you created when you activated SiriusXM
name> with your Voice Code.” 5
your devices, including Android™ phones, iPhone® Guardian™. There will be additional settings to con-
• “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle devices, or voice-activated speakers, like Google Home. firm on the following screen.
name> with your Voice Code.”
If you need assistance, ask Google for help, or for a 6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the linking
• “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler complete list of commands by saying: “Hey Google, ask process.
Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle <brand name> for help with my car.”
name>.” Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Here are a few examples of commands:
• “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of • “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my • Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote start
my <vehicle name>.” • Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is Uconnect Navigation system
required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for • “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my • Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
SiriusXM Guardian™ page 224. level and oil life
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Ama- • “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send
zon Alexa:
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my • And more!
<vehicle name>.”
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
device (Apple® or Android™).
• “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel Description
level of my <vehicle name>.”
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS. Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give
you peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable. road. You can set boundary limits, monitor driving
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted. speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s location any time,
any place.
234 MULTIMEDIA
Use the Mobile App to set alerts: Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you CONNECTED SERVICES SOS
• Boundary Alert can enjoy these features:
• Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is
driven either out of or into a geographic boundary lock button in the app and entering your security 1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call
that you set. PIN. button on the mirror or overhead console? You have
• Curfew Alert • Remote start or stop your vehicle. 10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button to
• View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the
Receive a notification when your car is being driven
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and more. SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button
outside of the curfew time.
on the in-vehicle touchscreen.
• Speed Alert For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel for
SmartWatch Integration. 2. What type of information is sent when I use the
Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a
SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle
speed limit you set.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM information, such as make and model, is transmit-
• Valet Alert GUARDIAN™ ACCOUNT ted along with the last known GPS location.
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use
driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop- To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, press
the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone
off zone. the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM
else needs emergency assistance.
Guardian™ Customer Care.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
NOTE: CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Mobile App right on
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FAQS
in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™ Care to
your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get started, remove your personal data. 1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the door?
follow these steps: Depending on various conditions, it can take up to
three minutes or more for the request to get to your
1. Download the Mobile App from the App Store® or
Google Play. CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs vehicle.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the For additional information about SiriusXM Guardian™, 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App? Your
username and password you created when you first active subscribers can push the ASSIST button key fob will lock/unlock the door more quickly, how-
set up your account. (if equipped) and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call ever its range is limited and your Mobile App comes
on your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM in handy for these and other situations.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are con- Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM
nected through Bluetooth®. 3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People
Guardian™ agent or held in a queue until an agent is sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why
4. The Mobile App should appear on your SmartWatch. available. If you do not have an active subscription, security measures have been engineered into the
push the ASSIST button and press the Activate button Mobile App. Asking for your username, password
on the touchscreen to activate services.
MULTIMEDIA 235
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are required CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
for the activation of Remote services through your them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you
mobile device. It is your responsibility to protect your FAQS — IF EQUIPPED can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
passwords and PINs. pushing the red Panic button.
1. How long does it take to send the route and desti-
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile App? nation to my vehicle? Depending on various condi-
The Mobile App is compatible with most devices tions, it can take up to three minutes for the request
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN
with the Apple® and Android™ operating systems. to get through to your vehicle. VEHICLE ASSISTANCE FAQS —
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other operating
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once IF EQUIPPED
you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the
systems may be supported in the future. 1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance your
pop-up message stating that you have a new route
5. Why is the Mobile App running slow? The Mobile will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle,
App relies on a mobile network connection from that will cancel the route if selected. a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to
your device to send commands to your vehicle which activate this service. You must involve local law
3. Can I select a different route than the most recent enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ locate
must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for
(data), or 5G (data) network connection. If either
vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message other law enforcement or government agencies,
your device or your vehicle is in an area with below
offers a “Locations” option. Once “Locations” is subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM Guard-
5
average coverage, it may take longer to log in and
selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent ian™ to do so. We will also provide the service for
send commands.
destinations. FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have pur-
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE
chased through them.
ASSISTANCE FAQS 2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you

FINDER FAQS provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
1. What is the phone number for roadside assistance agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your vehicle
call? The phone number is: work together with law enforcement to try to locate
may be located by anyone who has your PIN and
○ US: 1-800-521-2779 your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be
access to your account. It is your responsibility to
contacted by law enforcement.
○ Canada: 1-800-363-4869 guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for more 3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance rates?
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, does it
information. Some insurance providers offer lower rates on
cover towing or other expenses incurred by using
vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto
roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle 2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash
theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure to
may include Roadside Assistance Call services. the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can
inform the insurance provider of your SiriusXM
take three minutes or more for the request to get
Guardian™ connected services subscription to find
through to your vehicle.
out if the insurance provider can offer you a lower
rate.
236 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: 5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance compa- cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the
nies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an insurance vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
product. You are responsible for obtaining insurance button will not stop the vehicle.
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
coverage for your vehicle and yourself. 6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile App? account? There are three ways that you can register
The Mobile App has been designed to work on most your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE devices with the Apple® and Android™ operating ○ Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed to
VEHICLE START FAQS systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us an agent who can assist in registering your new
to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating account.
1. How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle? systems may be supported in the future.
Depending on various conditions, it can take three ○ Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Select the button to speak with an agent,
minutes or more for the request to get through to CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE who can assist in registering your new account.
your vehicle.
HORN & LIGHTS FAQS ○ Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App? Your menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen and
key fob will remote start your vehicle more quickly. 1. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash
then follow the prompts from the provided email.
However its range is limited. For example, when you the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can
You will receive an email with an activation link
are leaving the stadium after the game, you can use take three minutes or more for the request to get
that will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
the Mobile App to remote start your vehicle and through to your vehicle.
activation link, you will be prompted to fill out
have the inside of your vehicle comfortable by the 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App? Your your information and accept Terms and Condi-
time you get to it. key fob will sound the horn and flash the lights tions. Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device? quicker; however, its range is limited. Guardian™ home page to complete your profile
People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which and demo the remote services.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
is why security measures have been engineered into them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you 2. Why do I need an email address? Without an email
the Mobile App. Asking for your username, password can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by address, customers cannot register for SiriusXM
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN help to pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Guardian™. Customers need to register so they can
ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three subscribe to receive additional services and create
happen to find your device. minutes. a SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for remote com-
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the 4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile App?
mand requests.
App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys The Mobile App has been designed to work on most 3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security
to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply devices with the Apple® and Android™ operating PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN
starts the engine to warm up or cool down the inte- systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us during the registration process. The SiriusXM Guard-
rior before you arrive. to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating ian™ Security PIN will be required to authenticate
systems may be supported in the future. you when accessing your account via SiriusXM
MULTIMEDIA 237
Guardian™ Call or performing any remote services, then current subscription rate and on every renewal 15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes.
such as Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & date thereafter, unless you cancel your subscription If you have an annual subscription, your subscrip-
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start. by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not tion will be canceled the day you cancel. If you
added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM have a monthly subscription, your subscription will
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ security
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in be canceled on the last day of the month in which
PIN? If you’ve already activated services and forgot
advance of your expiration date to remind you that you choose to cancel.
your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN, you can
your subscription is ending soon.
reset the PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Own- 16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
er’s Site. 10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ notifi- Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you’ll
cation preferences? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ want to remove your account information. This pro-
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ payment
Customer Care, or go to your Owner’s Site and then cess removes all personal information, returns the
account address? Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Pay-
update your preferences on the SiriusXM Guard- Uconnect system to its original factory settings,
ment Account address can be updated online, or by
ian™ customer web portal. removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ connected ser-
calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care from
vices and account information. To remove your
ASSIST in your vehicle. To update online: login to 11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
account information from the Uconnect system,
your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by pushing the
contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
Guardian™ Payment Account. ASSIST button on your rearview mirror or overhead
console. 17. What if I forgot to remove my account information 5
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ profile?
before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Con-
Your name, home address, phone number, email 12. How do I update my credit card information?
tact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
address and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can Login to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile,
be updated online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account. 18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data),
your Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit your 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection com-
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on my
personal information. Make your edits and click patible with my device is temporarily unavailable?
subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
Save. The SOS Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function
tomer Care.
if you are not connected to an operable LTE (voice/
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy them?
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and choose a data) or 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services
Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an
subscription to view its expiration date. When your that required your smartphone only direct calls to
included trial period for certain Apps and services.
subscription is about to expire, you will receive an Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if you
8. Can I access every App and service while driving? email or letter of notification. have an operable network.
No, some applications and services are not avail-
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
able while driving. For your own safety, it is not pos-
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
sible to use some of the touchscreen features while
the date of cancellation for annual plans or longer. The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which
the vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).
Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ may include information about your vehicle, your vehi-
9. What happens when my subscription comes up for Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing cle’s health and performance, your vehicle’s location,
renewal? If you have added a credit card to your plans of other lengths and other circumstances. your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other
account information, your subscription will be auto- data. The collection, use and sharing of this information
matically renewed for a term length in accordance is required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ con-
with the service plan that you have selected at the nected services and is further described by the
238 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at REGULATORY AND SAFETY WARNING!
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/privacy.html
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian INFORMATION Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
Residents). This information may be collected by US/CANADA mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
SiriusXM® Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared use only and should not be done on any public road-
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the ways. It is recommended that these features be used
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and diagnostic The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure in a controlled environment and within the limits of
information including location data may be used by the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health Report to you. limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscrip- a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopar-
from the human body.
tion, this vehicle diagnostic health information, includ- dize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a
ing location data, may still be transmitted from your The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
vehicle and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report found in radio frequency safety standards and recom- accidents.
sent to you. mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scien-
tific community.
Use of any of the connected services including SiriusXM The Performance Pages include the following:
Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent to the collec- The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
tion, use and disclosure of this information in accor- radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy • Timers
dance with the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy • Gauges
want this information to be collected, used, or shared, emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
• G-Force
you must cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety
by contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy some situations or environments, such as aboard air- • Pitch & Roll
Policy. planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour- • Dyno/Engine
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire- • Vehicle Dynamics
less radio page 376. Snapshot
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The Snapshot feature allows you to take a screenshot
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED of any page. The information can be saved onto a USB
device.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or Performance Pages is an application that provides a To take a snapshot, make sure a USB device is plugged
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the display for performance indicators that will help you into the vehicle. Next, press the Snapshot icon located
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If gain familiarity with the capabilities of your vehicle in in the lower left corner of the touchscreen.
your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve real time. The file will be saved to the USB drive. At the time a
from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recom- To access the Performance Pages, press the Vehicle snapshot is taken, the bottom bar of the touchscreen
mended that the volume be turned down or off during button on the touchscreen. Then, press the Perfor- will be replaced with the historical data from the vehicle
mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect mance tab. Press the desired button on the touch- present at the time the snapshot icon was pressed.
system. screen to access that specific Performance Page.
MULTIMEDIA 239
The following information will display: NOTE: GAUGES

• Date Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m],
When selected, this screen displays the following val-
1/8 mile [200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and 1/4 mile
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) [400 m]) and Acceleration Timers (0-60 mph
ues:
• Longitude And Latitude Coordinates [0-96 km/h] and 0-100 mph [0-160 km/h]) will be • Coolant Temperature
• Outside Temperature ready to acquire new recent data measurements Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Odometer when the vehicle is at 0 mph (0 km/h) and vehicle is
• Oil Temperature
The following describes each feature and its operation: in drive.
Shows the actual oil temperature.
The timer listed shows the measured time required to
TIMERS travel at the cited distance is met. Some timers will also • Oil Pressure
display speeds present at the time the distance was Shows the actual oil pressure.
When the Timers page is selected, you will be able to
view the Drag and Accel & Braking timers.
met. • Trans Temp
• Recent • 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Shows actual transmission oil temperature.
A real-time summary of performance timers for the • 0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) • Battery Voltage
most recent valid run, or the status of a test in • 60 ft (20 m) ET Shows actual battery voltage.
progress. • 330 ft (100 m) ET • Intake Air Temp 5
• Last • ⅛ Mile (200 m) + ET Shows actual intake air temperature.
The last recorded run of performance timers. • ⅛ Mile (200) + mph If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View Page will
• Best • 1000 ft (300 m) ET appear on the screen. This page shows gauge values
for the previous two minutes on the selected gauge.
The best recorded run of performance timers, • ¼ Mile (400 m) + ET Pressing the Left or Right Arrow will cycle through the
except for braking data. • ¼ Mile (400 m) + mph details for each of the gauges. Pressing the minimize
Save • Brake Distance ft (meters) button beside the graph will return to the Gauge menu.
Pressing the SAVE button will let you save the timer
NOTE:
data for Recent, Last, and Best recorded times to an
The distance measurement will be aborted if the
G-FORCE
inserted USB flash drive.
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
The Timers pages contain:
engaged, before the vehicle comes to a complete available:
• Reaction Time: Measures the driver's reaction time stop. • Vehicle Speed
for launching the vehicle against a simulated drag
strip timing light (behavior modeled after • Brake from mph (km/h) Measures the current speed of the vehicle in
500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the instrument either mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maxi-
NOTE: mum value.
cluster display.
Brake Distance and Speed timers only display
“ready” when vehicle is traveling at a speed greater • Front G-Force
than 30 mph (48 km/h). Measures the peak braking force on the front of the
vehicle.
240 MULTIMEDIA
• Right G-Force selected). Once the right side of the page is reached, VEHICLE DYNAMICS
Measures the peak force on the right side of the the graph will scroll with the right side always being the
most recent recorded sample. The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information con-
vehicle.
cerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
• Left G-Force The following options can be selected:
Steering Angle — If Equipped
Measures the peak force on the left side of the • Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph. Steering Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to cal-
vehicle. Selecting “Play” will clear the graph and restart the
process. culate the degree of the steering relative to zero
• Rear G-Force (straight ahead) reference angle. The zero degree refer-
Measures the peak acceleration force on the rear of • Press the + or – button to change the history of the ence angle measurement indicates the actual front tire
graph. The selectable options are “30”, “60”, “90”,
the vehicle. steering angle.
“120” seconds. The graph will expand or constrict
depending on the setting selected. Transfer Case
NOTE:
Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak • Select the “Gear” display setting to turn the graph This feature will be active when the vehicle is in 4WD
values. These readings can be reset by clearing gear markers on or off. HIGH, 4WD AUTO, Neutral, or 4WD LOW.
peak G-Force on the instrument cluster. NOTE:
NOTE:
The friction circle display shows instantaneous G-Force A lock symbol will only be present on the Transfer Case
The Gear On/Off feature will only display if your vehicle
as a highlight and previous G-Force as dots within the button when the vehicle is in 4WD LOW.
is equipped with an Automatic Transmission.
circle. The system records previous G-Force for three
Rear Axle Locker
minutes. If there are multiple samples at a given point,
the color of the dot will darken from blue to red. Vectors
Engine This feature will allow you to lock and unlock the rear
more frequent will show in red; infrequent vectors will Press the Left and Right Arrow buttons on the bottom of axle. To change the status, push the AXLE LOCK button.
show in blue. the touchscreen to cycle between the Dyno and Engine
Pitch & Roll

pages.
When selected, this screen displays the following val-
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
The G-Force page displays the vehicle’s current pitch ues: Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages
(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in • Vehicle Speed: Shows the actual vehicle speed. which display vehicle information related to the drive-
degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualization train, transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
of the current vehicle angle.
• Engine Power: Shows the instantaneous power. To access Off-Road Pages, press the Vehicle button on
• Engine Torque: Shows the instantaneous torque. the touchscreen, select the Off-Road Pages tab, and
DYNAMOMETER (DYNO)/ENGINE • Boost Pressure: Shows the actual engine boost then select the Off-Road button on the main screen.
pressure. Off-Road Pages can also be accessed through the app
Dynamometer (Dyno) • Gear: Shows the current (or pending) operating gear drawer.
of the vehicle.
The system will start drawing graphs for Power and
Torque (top chart) and Engine Speed (bottom chart).
The graph will fill from the left side of the x-axis and fill
to the right side of the x-axis (based on History time
MULTIMEDIA 241
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR

The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bot-
tom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the
four selectable page options. It provides information for
the following items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control
5. Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status

2 — Latitude/Longitude
Off-Road Button 3 — Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control Status
5 — Speed
242 MULTIMEDIA
VEHICLE DYNAMICS ACCESSORY GAUGE

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information con- The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status
cerning the vehicle’s transfer case and steering angle. of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature,
The following information is displayed: Oil Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle
MULTIMEDIA 243
PITCH & ROLL

The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side)
in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualiza-
tion of the current vehicle angle.
NOTE:
Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These num-
bers will update once the vehicle is driven.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Oil Temperature
2 — Coolant Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
244 MULTIMEDIA
SUSPENSION FORWARD FACING CAMERA

The Suspension page displays the current status of the Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward Facing
vehicle’s suspension system and the current ride height Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of
of the vehicle. The Suspension page will also indicate the front view of your vehicle. The image will be dis-
when the vehicle’s height changes. played on the touchscreen along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera button on
the touchscreen.
Suspension Menu
245
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES WARNING!
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip- The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake caused by improperly installed or high output radio
as long as four seconds.
performance under most braking conditions. The sys- transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
tem automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances
Installation of such equipment should be per- driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
vehicle control during braking.
formed by qualified professionals. brake system is not functioning and that service is
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the required. However, the conventional brake system will
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
on.
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
The ABS is activated during braking when the system be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
down or stop.
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. 6
likelihood of ABS activation(s). braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
You also may experience the following normal charac-
the traction afforded.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
teristics when the ABS activates:
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those (EBC) SYSTEM
• ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may con- resulting from excessive speed in turns, following Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
tinue to hear for a short time after the stop)
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
• Brake pedal pulsations • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
stop ner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equip- safety of others. Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
ment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result (TCS). These systems work together to enhance both
in degraded ABS performance. vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
246 SAFETY
Brake Assist System (BAS) required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
WARNING!
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
gerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
system detects an emergency braking situation by Electronic Brake Force Distribution safety or the safety of others.
sensing the rate and amount of brake application, and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can (EBD)
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent over- ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con- slip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal System (ABS) before the front axle. applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to coun-
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the teract the above conditions. Engine power may also be
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
The ERM system anticipates the potential for wheel lift • Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
WARNING! by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the • Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s appropriate for the steering wheel position.
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing then applies the appropriate brake and may also vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
including those resulting from excessive speed in lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan- lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneu- brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must vers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking
ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the objects or other vehicles. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
safety of others. in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
WARNING! Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
Brake System Warning Light Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when tions and driving conditions, influence the chance accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre- sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
stay on for as long as four seconds. vent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that road conditions.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
not functioning properly and that immediate service is (Continued)
SAFETY 247
WARNING!
ESC Operating Modes WARNING!
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent system may have multiple operating modes. • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
the natural laws of physics from acting on the ESC On of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by described in the TCS section) has been disabled
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated.
accidents, including those resulting from excessive ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or this mode. This mode should be used for most driving reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap- for specific reasons as noted in the following tem is reduced.
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a paragraphs.
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- Partial Off
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for acti- Full Off — If Equipped
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or vation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
the safety of others. allowed. This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main- To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac- ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
6
the steering system, suspension, braking system, turn off. sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and NOTE:
cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor- For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push ESC OFF button.
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle and release of the button will toggle the ESC modes.
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the Multiple attempts may be required to return to “ESC NOTE:
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle On”. System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes
(if equipped).
248 SAFETY
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
WARNING! ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to vehicle speed).
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator Enabling HDC
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
reduction and stability features are disabled. HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the fol-
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by your speed and driving to the prevailing road
lowing conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency conditions.
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that • The driveline is in 4WD Low.
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a • The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use reduced mode. • The parking brake is released.
only. • The driver door is closed.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre- NOTE: Activating HDC
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by • The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be
accidents, including those resulting from excessive each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following sum-
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or mode. marizes the HDC set speeds:
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN HDC Target Set Speeds
mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator turned off previously. activate.
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking • R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
Light in the instrument cluster will come on maneuver that caused the ESC activation. • D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN • 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
mode. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal- HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving while in • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descend- • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ing hills during various driving situations. HDC controls • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho- HDC Has Three States:
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
diagnosed and corrected. 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate). • 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys- conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid-
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction ing with brake or throttle application).
SAFETY 249
NOTE: Feedback To The Driver The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC to activate:
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the • The feature must be enabled.
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the driver about the state HDC is in.
transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-
• The vehicle must be stopped.
selected set speed and corresponding driving
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and • The parking brake must be off.
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
conditions. This is the normal operating condition for HDC. • The driver door must be closed.
Driver Override
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for sev- • The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or eral seconds, then extinguish when the driver • The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direc-
brake application at any time. pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
Deactivating HDC not met.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for sev- • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
eral seconds, then extinguish when HDC disables gears. The system will not activate if the transmis-
the following conditions occur:
due to excess speed. sion is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
• The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The WARNING!
• The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
• The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
6
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
grade. WARNING! while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
• The vehicle is shifted to PARK. HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
Disabling HDC vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the fol- remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
lowing conditions occur: responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
• The driver pushes the HDC switch. attention is always required while driving to maintain
• The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low. Hill Start Assist (HSA) safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
• The parking brake is applied. HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete injury.
• The driver door opens. stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does Disabling And Enabling HSA
not apply the throttle before this time expires, the sys-
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph tem will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). the current setting, proceed as follows:
down the hill as normal.
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature. If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings page 188.
250 SAFETY
Towing With HSA monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
WARNING!
driver. The Electronic Brake Control system will prepare
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
the brake system for a panic stop. If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
while towing a trailer.
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
Traction Control System (TCS) trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
WARNING! The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deacti-
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS
may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
vated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a IF EQUIPPED
released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the tail-
trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of lights, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automo-
prior to releasing the brake pedal. the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque biles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the park- remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
ing brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a col- Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
lision or serious personal injury. TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi- NOTE:
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers tongue weight recommendations page 172.
are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
active, there is no notification to the driver and no Rear Detection Zones
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
driver interaction is required. may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys- to let the driver know that the system is operational.
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking tem is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
when an emergency braking situation may occur by vehicle is in PARK.
SAFETY 251
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane

width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system moni-
tors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles
in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the Radar Sensor Locations Warning Light Location
detection zones.
If the system detects degraded performance due to The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
• BSM may experience dropouts (blinking on and off) contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driv-
of the side mirror warning indicator lamps when a you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in ing to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will
motorcycle or any small object remains at the side side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
than a couple of seconds). Entering From The Side
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
are met. First clear the taillights around the sensors of
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either 6
the blockage. After removing the blockage, the following
or other road contaminations accumulate on the rear side of the vehicle.
procedure can be used to reset the system:
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located. Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If block- ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a
age is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, blockage.
Wipe Rear Corners” message will display in the cluster, The system may also detect a blockage if the vehicle is
both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The sys- as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop.
tem will automatically recover and resume function The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
when the condition clears. To minimize system block- detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
age, do not block the area of the rear fascia/bumper located in the outside mirrors, in addition to sounding
where the radar sensors are located with foreign an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep page 253. Side Monitoring
it clear of road contaminations.
252 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja-
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a cent lanes page 207.
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking/Approaching
Opposing Traffic
Rear Monitoring
For information on how Blind Spot Monitoring functions
Overtaking Traffic when pulling a trailer page 253.
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in WARNING!
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
Overtaking/Passing with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli- result in serious injury or death.
age, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This
is normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
SAFETY 253
Rear Cross Path (RCP) NOTE: an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sen- detected object are present on the same side at the
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
system will not be able to alert the driver. issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on)
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
will also be muted.
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic, and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, WARNING! NOTE:
alert the driver. Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver system, the radio is also muted.
detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
using RCP. Always check carefully behind your object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so chime.
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
Blind Spot Modes visual or audible alerts from either the BSM, RCP, or
6
Trailer Merge Assist systems.
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
RCP Detection Zones that are available in the Uconnect system. NOTE:
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of Blind Spot Alert Lights Only The BSM system will store the current operating mode
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM sys-
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
tem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of used.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
Trailer Merge Assist — If Equipped
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot Moni-
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible audible alert is requested, the radio is muted. toring (BSM) system that extends the blind spot zone to
alarms, including reducing the radio volume. work while pulling a trailer.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, NOTE:
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross Path
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If is disabled.
the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
254 SAFETY
Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub functions: length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in the NOTE:
• Automatic Trailer Detection instrument panel cluster . The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in
crowded or busy environments. Busy parking lots, nar-
• Trailer Length Detection • Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is selected, row areas surrounded with trees, or any other crowded
• Trailer Merge Warning the system will default to the maximum blind spot
area may prevent the radar sensors from being able to
zone regardless of what size trailer is attached .
adequately detect the trailer. The system will try to
detect a trailer at every ignition cycle or 90 seconds of
NOTE:
standstill.
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. To change this setting, it must be
selected through the Uconnect Settings page 188.
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established, the
trailer length will be established (by making a
90 degree turn) and then the trailer length category
(example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be displayed. This
can take up to 30 seconds after completing the turn.
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new “trailer
detection request” is enabled by the system once the Trailer Length Detection
vehicle resumes motion.
Automatic Trailer Detection 1 — Trailer Length
The maximum trailer length supported by the Trailer
There are two modes of operation for the detection of 2 — Trailer Hitch
Merge Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
the trailer length: 3 — Trailer Width
considered the forward most portion of the trailer hitch
• Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is selected, to the rearward most portion of the body, fascia/
the system will use the blind spot sensors to auto- bumper, or ramp of the trailer. Trailer length will be identified and placed into one of
matically determine the presence and length of a the following categories:
The maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
trailer. The presence of a trailer will be detected Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is mea- • Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone will
using the blind spot radar within 90 seconds of for- sured at the widest portion of the trailer and may be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
ward movement of the vehicle. The vehicle must be include wheels, tires, finders, or rails. • Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to 6 m) —
moving above 6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the fea- Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 20 ft (6 m)
NOTE: .
ture. Once the trailer has been detected, the system
Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported by
will default to the maximum blind spot zone until the Trailer Merge Assist.
• Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to 9 m) —
Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 30 ft (9 m)
.
SAFETY 255
• Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m to WARNING!

If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to Max gressive warnings, then the system will provide a lim-
distance . The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to ited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
NOTE: reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be subject system will compensate and provide additional brake
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
to being placed in the category above or below the cor- force as required.
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
rect one. If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
result in serious injury or death.
Trailer Merge Warning 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maxi-
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind spot mum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
function to cover the length of the trailer, plus a safety FORWARD COLLISION WARNING collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitiga-
margin, to warn the driver when there is a vehicle in the tion event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by the illumination
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION — hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
of the BSM Warning Light located in the outside mirror IF EQUIPPED release the brakes.
on the side the other vehicle is detected on. In addition,
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
an audible (chime) alert will be heard and radio volume
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
will be reduced page 253.
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
NOTE: when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warn- 6
ings and limited braking are intended to provide the
• The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are potential collision.
outside the detection zones.
NOTE:
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi- FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mir-
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
ror warning indicator lamps when a motorcycle or
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
any small object remains at the side of the vehicle
When the system determines that a forward collision is FCW Message
for extended periods of time (more than a couple of
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
seconds).
visual warnings as well as a possible brake jerk When the system determines a collision with the
• Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighborhoods, warning. vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
etc. may lead to an increased amount of false warning message will be deactivated page 207.
alerts. This is normal operation.
256 SAFETY
NOTE: Turning FCW On Or Off FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
(5 km/h). the control settings page 188. grammable through the Uconnect system
page 188.
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other • To turn the FCW system on, press the forward colli-
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based sion button once. • Far
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a • To turn the FCW system off, press the forward colli- ○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far”
part of normal FCW activation and functionality. sion button once. setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a pos-
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such NOTE: sible more distant collision with the vehicle in
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking front using audible/visual warnings.
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion • When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to ○ More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle. warn the driver of a possible collision with the warnings may prefer this setting.
vehicle in front.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If NOTE:
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should • When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to from warning the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
the surroundings.
OFF” will be displayed in the instrument cluster • Medium
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as display. ○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in “Medium” setting and the system status is “Only
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are • When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this pre- Warning”, this allows the system to warn the
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with vents the system from providing limited active brak-
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
the same or higher rate of speed. ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not
front using audible/visual warnings.
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable collision. • Near
screens. ○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near”
• When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”, setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a pos- this allows the system to warn the driver of a pos-
WARNING! sible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/ sible closer collision with the vehicle in front
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking. using audible/visual warnings.
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every • The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” from ○ This setting provides less reaction time than the
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon- one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle off, it will reset to “Full On” when the vehicle is more dynamic driving experience.
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning restarted. ○ More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
could lead to serious injury or death. avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
SAFETY 257
NOTE: event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by
FCW possible collision warnings experienced. release the brakes. When the system determines a col- the driver after ignition shut down.
lision with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no
FCW Limited Warning longer probable, the warning message will be TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
deactivated.
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condi- (5 km/h). TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
tion that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
is still driveable under normal conditions, the active WARNING! NOTE:
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition
that limited the system performance is no longer pres- Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instru-
ent, the system will return to its full performance state. to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect ment cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure
If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. every type of potential collision with a pedestrian. The is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In
driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic
Service FCW Warning controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Fail- showing the pressure values of each tire with the low
ure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury tire pressure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster radio will display a TPMS message; when this occurs
displays: or death.
you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required Turning PEB On Or Off
mended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
6
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required Warning Light to turn off.
This indicates there is an internal system fault. NOTE: The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal condi- The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the sys- 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
tions, have the system checked by an authorized tem to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
dealer. pedestrian/cyclist. sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — controls settings page 188.
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
If Equipped To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian Emer-
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire infla-
PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system that provides gency Braking button once. tion pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
the driver with audible and visual warnings in the instru- To turn the PEB system back on, push the Pedestrian pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure
ment cluster display, and may apply automatic braking Emergency Braking button again. will also increase as the vehicle is driven — this is nor-
when it detects a potential frontal collision with a Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the sys- mal and there should be no adjustment for this
pedestrian/cyclist. tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in increased pressure.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph case of a possible frontal collision with the See page 345 on how to properly inflate the vehi-
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to mitigate pedestrian/cyclist. cle’s tires.
the potential collision with a pedestrian. If the PEB
258 SAFETY
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

CAUTION!
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects tain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
and natural pressure loss through the tire • The TPMS has been optimized for the original pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
page 207. warning have been established for the tire size reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system Warning Light.
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not operation or sensor damage may result when • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom- using replacement equipment that is not of the sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low TPMS same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels sure in the tire.
Warning Light illuminates, increase the tire pressure to can cause sensor damage.
the recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
turn off once the system receives the updated tire pres- sealant it is recommended that you take your
sures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the sensor function checked.
TPMS to receive this information.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
NOTE: always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pres- • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wire-
sure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen-
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi failure or condition. sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure pressure readings to the receiver module.
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
(158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert (TFA) NOTE:
to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle system.
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately It is particularly important for you to check the tire pres-
sure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes maintain the proper pressure.
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s rec- Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire The TPMS consists of the following components:
ommended cold placard pressure value. tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and • Receiver module
stopping ability.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
SAFETY 259
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, its original color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- • Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
which display in the instrument cluster tem Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to wheel housings
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph • Using tire chains on the vehicle
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low information. • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS sen-
Pressure Warnings NOTE: sor location condition. When a system fault occurs due
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to to an incorrect TPMS sensor location, the Tire Pressure
Warning Light will illuminate in the instru- be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on
ment cluster and a chime will sound when the recommended cold placard pressure in order to and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will off. instrument cluster will display a Tire Pressure Temporar-
display a graphic showing the pressure values of each ily Unavailable message in place of the tire pressure
tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. Service TPMS Warning display screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
An "Inflate to XX" message will also be displayed. sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitor-
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire
ing System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light” will no lon-
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system
ger flash and the tire pressure display screen will be
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instru-
displayed showing the tire pressure values the correct
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes-
locations.
sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display 6
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
which sensor is not being received. Compact Spare
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, • The non-matching full size spare or compact spare
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault tire does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the non-
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE matching full size spare or compact spare tire.
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a • If you install the non-matching full size spare or
Low Tire Pressure Display pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
system fault can occur due to any of the following: pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driv- Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light and a
ing next to facilities emitting the same radio fre-
(those in a different color in the instrument cluster quencies as the Tire Pressure Monitoring System “LOW TIRE” message will remain on and a chime
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard sensors will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument
pressure inflation value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" cluster will still display a pressure value in a differ-
message. Once the system receives the updated tire • Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ent color and an “Inflate to XX” message.
materials that may block radio wave signals
pressures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to
260 SAFETY
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above NOTE: • The horn will also sound three times if the tire is
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring then underinflated and will continue to sound every
System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off • Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the five seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addi- Tire Fill Alert system.
tion, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE • The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five sec- existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system (TTPMS) — If Equipped
onds and then display dashes (--) in place of the is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
pressure value. The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TTPMS) is
The system will be activated when a positive increase in a feature that displays the trailer tire pressure values
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime tire pressure is detected by the TPMS while inflating the and warns the driver of a low tire pressure event based
will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System tire. The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the on the driver’s set target tire pressure value, through
(TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for transmission in PARK. TTPMS settings found in the radio.
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYS- NOTE: The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and
TEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and warns the driver through the instrument cluster, when
It is not required to have the engine running to enter
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure either a low tire pressure condition falls below 25% of
Tire Fill Alert mode.
value. the driver’s set pressure or if a system malfunction
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is occurs. The instrument cluster will display the actual
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and in Tire Fill Alert mode. tire pressure or dashes for each of the trailer tires in
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non- When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure the correct trailer position, based on trailer configura-
matching full size spare or compact spare, the display screen will be displayed in the instrument tion. The TTPMS can support up to 12 trailer tires per
TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the Tire cluster. configured trailer on up to four configurable trailers
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light page 188.
will turn off and the graphic in the instrument clus- If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating the
ter will display a new pressure value instead of tire, the TPMS sensor may be out of range preventing
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In this
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active case, the vehicle may need to be moved either forward
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up or backward slightly to exit the null spot.
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for Operation:
the TPMS to receive this information. • The horn will sound once to let the user know when
to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recom-
Tire Fill Alert mended pressure.
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire • The horn will sound three times if the tire is over-
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire. filled and will continue to sound every five seconds
You may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill Alert if the user continues to inflate the tire.
feature through use of the Uconnect Settings in the • The horn will sound once again when enough air is Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
radio. let out to reach proper inflation level.
SAFETY 261
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing NOTE:

In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure sen- If the pairing process times out after three minutes of
sors must be installed in the desired trailer tires and no communication with a sensor, a double horn chip
the sensors must be paired to the truck. If the target will occur indicating the pairing has failed and a mes-
trailer requires more than the provided four sensors, sage will display on the radio indicating the process was
additional sensors can be purchased at an authorized unsuccessful. Under certain circumstances, the double
Ram dealership. horn chirp may continue to happen every three minutes
With the sensors installed and the trailer near or con- indicating the failed pairing. If this happens, the horn
nected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing process by chirping may be canceled by cycling the ignition button
entering the settings menu in the radio and selecting OFF and then back to RUN position.
trailer. Select the desired trailer profile to pair to, open Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure
the “Tire Pressure” menu, and hit “Setup All Tires” Warnings
page 188. When a tire pressure low in one or more of the active
road tires is detected, the instrument cluster will display
NOTE: Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing a message stating “Trailer Tire Pressure Low”. The
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing process instrument cluster will then display the TTPMS graphic
is complete. Follow the on screen prompts to select the number of showing the pressure values of each tire with the low
axles (1-3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), tire pressure values in a different color.
and the set trailer tire pressure. The range is selectable Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
anywhere between 25-125 psi (172-862 kPa). and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition 6
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen (those in a different color in the instrument cluster
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order shown. graphic) to the customer programmed target tire pres-
Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 psi (34 kPa) and sure value as shown at the top of the TTPMS instru-
wait for a horn chirp. It may take up to three minutes for ment cluster graphic. Once the tire(s) are inflated, the
the chirp to occur, indicating that the sensor has paired. system will automatically update the graphic display in
Repeat process on each tire, in order, until complete. the instrument cluster, returning to its original color.
Do not exit the pairing screen until process is complete. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
If pairing was unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to
sound, and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you receive the updated information.
to retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when Service TTPMS Warning
setup fails. Each tire must be successfully paired during
a single pairing process to receive the success screen. If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service
Required” message for a minimum of five seconds.
262 SAFETY
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire Pres- Some of the safety features described in this section 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
sure System Service Required" message will no longer may be standard equipment on some models, or may vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
be displayed. The vehicle may need to be driven for up be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the ask an authorized dealer. between occupants and the door and occupants
TTPMS to receive the trailer tire pressure information. could be injured.
Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured” mes- Please pay close attention to the information in this modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
sage will be displayed in the instrument cluster on the section. It tells you how to use your restraint system page 374 for customer service contact
TTPMS instrument cluster graphic when a trailer num- properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as information.
ber is selected that has not had trailer tire pressure possible.
sensors paired. To correct this condition, see Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
page 188.
WARNING!
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active Trailer
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
Trailer” message will be displayed in the instrument seat.
cluster when the trailer sensors being received by the younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
TTPMS module do not match the trailer sensors paired 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle restraint.
to the current trailer number selected. This message seat belt properly must be secured in the appropri-
ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
will be displayed when the sensors being received com- front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
pletely match the sensors paired to another trailer num- a rear seating position page 276. restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
ber configured in the TTPMS module. 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
To correct this condition, the correct trailer number child restraint) must ride in the front passenger child restraint in that vehicle.
must be selected in the radio page 188. seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child restraint page 276.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
Some of the most important safety features in your on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
5. You should read the instructions provided with your driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
vehicle are the restraint systems:
child restraint to make sure that you are using it This can happen far away from home or on your own
properly. street.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
FEATURES shoulder belts properly. can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
• Seat Belt Systems 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
• Child Restraints bags room to inflate.
SAFETY 263
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may Lap/Shoulder Belts
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
should be belted at all times. occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
lap/shoulder belts.
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder buckle their seat belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
System (BeltAlert) Change Of Status
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped If the driver or outboard front seat passenger under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
driver and outboard front seat passenger BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
(if equipped with outboard front passenger traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The until the seat belts are buckled again. WARNING!
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
is in the START or ON/RUN position. active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc- • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
Initial Indication your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is lisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig- recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas-
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
senger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho- led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or 6
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert. vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out- vehicle are buckled up properly.
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when NOTE:
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out- outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
BeltAlert Warning Sequence board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat or killed.
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger buckled. belts.
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen- • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
264 SAFETY
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the

WARNING! WARNING! front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your your seat belt snugly. belt to go around your lap.
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
too. ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
• Two people should never be belted into a single the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
seat belt. People belted together can crash into injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
one another in a collision, hurting one another internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
for more than one person, no matter what their that your strongest bones will take the force in a
size. collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
WARNING! likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of are meant to be used together. Pulling Out The Latch Plate
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
belt as low as possible and keep it snug. frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If involved in a collision, or if you have questions
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
have it fixed. rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle for inspection.
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
buckle nearest you. Instructions
(Continued) Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
SAFETY 265
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
shoulder belt.
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a anchor point.
collision.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
ately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the Adjustable Anchorage
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer fer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
twisted. if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
der belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
Positioning The Lap Belt Anchorage to make sure that it is locked in position. 6
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the NOTE:
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will downward to position the seat belt away from your equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position upward position without pushing or squeezing the
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the that serves you best. release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate until it is locked into position.
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
266 SAFETY
WARNING! WARNING! Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer increase the risk of serious injury or death in a slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec- seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, ommended seating positions. Remove and store collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
too. the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. including those in child restraints.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
NOTE:
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
the vehicle is stationary.
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Seat Belt Extender Energy Management Feature

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable Energy Management feature that may help further
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
Switchable Automatic Locking
a different occupant, it must be removed.
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
Retractors (ALR)
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
WARNING! if they are wearing a seat belt. equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys-
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the tem page 283. The figure below illustrates the lock-
required in order to properly fit the original seat ing feature for each seating position.
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the arm.
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
(Continued)
SAFETY 267
WARNING! WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can increase the risk of injury in collisions.
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child occupants who are wearing the seat belt or chil-
restraint. dren who are using booster seats. The locked
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not restraining the child.
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations (All SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Models) How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode SYSTEMS (SRS)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. Some of the safety features described in this section
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the may be standard equipment on some models, or may
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
the entire seat belt is extracted.
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate ask an authorized dealer.
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a 6
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi- collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- Mode. associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." Air Bag System Components:
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto- it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer- Air Bag System Components
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
gency) locking mode. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with • Air Bag Warning Light
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should WARNING! • Steering Wheel and Column
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the • Instrument Panel
vehicle with a rear seat. switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- • Knee Impact Bolsters
ture or any other seat belt function is not working • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual. • Seat Belt Buckle Switch
(Continued) • Supplemental Side Air Bags
268 SAFETY
• Front and Side Impact Sensors • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four Front Air Bags
• Seat Belt Pretensioners to eight-second interval.
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
• Seat Track Position Sensors • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
remains on while driving. bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
• Occupant Classification System tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
NOTE:
Air Bag Warning Light If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control- partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
monitors the readiness of the electronic ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air embossed on the air bag covers.
parts of the air bag system whenever the bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in immediately.
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec- on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal- the air bag system immediately.
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes Redundant Air Bag Warning Light 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
on again after initial startup. If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal- tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
function is detected that could affect the air bag sys- Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the WARNING!
tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the mal- instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
function. While the air bag system is designed to be will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
an authorized dealer service the air bag system Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
immediately. been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
panel.
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is (Continued)
first in the ON/RUN position. ately page 105.
SAFETY 269
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger On the other hand, depending on the type and location
WARNING! Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight severe initial deceleration.
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or input, as determined by the OCS. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
restraint. WARNING! are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the should have deployed.
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child • No objects should be placed over or near the air Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing because any such objects could cause harm if the away from an inflating air bag.
child restraint in that vehicle. vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate. When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the infla-
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag cov- tor units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag ers or attempt to open them manually. You may to inflate the front air bags.
Features damage the air bags and you could be injured
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage The protective covers for the air bag cushions are ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro- designed to open only when the air bags are the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of col- air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
lision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Control-
inflating.
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping 6
ler (ORC), which may receive information from the front • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more to restrain the driver and front passenger.
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
components. your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col- Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during your seat belts even though you have air bags. Front Passenger Seat
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
energy output is used for more severe collisions. Front Air Bag Operation designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro- output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags determined by the OCS.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not the following:
the Advanced Front Air Bags. deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset • Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based collisions.
upon seat position. • Air Bag Warning Light
270 SAFETY
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor classification. In order for the OCS to operate as • The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located designed, it is important for the front passenger to be senger, including a child; or
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. • The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger facing child restraint; or
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the infla- • The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front tion rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM OCS estimates that: time.
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC • The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger light objects on it; or
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, cation status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classifica-
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag WARNING! tion to determine whether the Passenger Advanced
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front • Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
passenger seat and never install a child restraint sys- front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is impor-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not tant for the front passenger to be seated properly and
passenger seat. have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passen-
child restraint in that vehicle. gers are:
WARNING! • Children 12 years or younger should always ride • Sitting upright
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of seat.
• Facing forward
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can • Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet com-
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or fortably on or near the floor
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
able classification. The OCS estimates the seated • Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
restraint. seatback in an upright position
weight on the front passenger seat and where that
(Continued) weight is located. The OCS communicates the classifi-
SAFETY 271
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-

senger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
Seated Properly • The front passenger carries or holds an object while Not Seated Properly
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) • Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is work- • Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
ing improperly. passenger seat. 6
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat • Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter- ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
mines the most probable classification of the occupant an output signal to the OCS that is different from the
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passen- occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example: Not Seated Properly
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
272 SAFETY
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,

WARNING! take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
the seatback in an upright position, your back The following requirements must be strictly followed:
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
fortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig- seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Not Seated Properly serious injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front pas- • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working • At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
properly, which may result in serious injury or tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on fastener be modified or replaced with any part
the floor under the front passenger seat. except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel WARNING!

will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS • Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
may affect the operation of the air bag system. the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
collision. This could result in death or serious
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
Not Seated Properly service immediately.
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
WARNING! components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp- OCS components must function as designed. Do not
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to make any modifications to the front passenger seat
dealer.
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop- components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
SAFETY 273
Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs)
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags. Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
WARNING! the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-

Supplemental Side Air Bags board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). a very high speed and with such a high force that it
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
6
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury Label Location
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the from a deploying air bag.
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
seats. ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury WARNING! tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
structure. dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury. headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
274 SAFETY
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com- The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win- including some collisions at certain angles, or some WARNING!
dows in certain side impact events. side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas- • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front killed.
WARNING!
air bags deploy.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy- restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
ment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the it takes to blink your eyes. erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
path are located should remain free from any have Side Air Bags.
obstructions. WARNING!
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not • Occupants, including children, who are up against
NOTE:
install any accessory items in your vehicle which or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket injured or killed. Occupants, including children, Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that should never lean on or sleep against the door, but they will open during air bag deployment.
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) side windows, or area where the side air bags Rollover Events
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed
the roof of the vehicle for any reason. restraint.
to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deploy-
Side Impacts are necessary for your protection in all collisions. ment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain They also help keep you in position, away from an on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs deployed.
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact against the seats. Children must be properly
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to is appropriate for the size of the child.
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occu- vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
pant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags WARNING! and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pre-
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean tensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not against the door or window. Sit upright in the cen-
ter of the seat. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
have deployed. (Continued) dows in certain rollover or side impact events.
SAFETY 275
Air Bag System Components caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per- Enhanced Accident Response System
manent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
NOTE: haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the you have any blistering, see your doctor
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated immediately.
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke- have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) like particles. The particles are a normal by-product the following functions:
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
• Air Bag Warning Light for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may • Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have • Cut off battery power to the electric motor
• Instrument Panel skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. (if equipped)
• Knee Impact Bolsters For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par-
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
• Supplemental Side Air Bags Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have System
• Front and Side Impact Sensors deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
• Unlock the power door locks
• Seat Belt Pretensioners bags will not be in place to protect you.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
• Seat Track Position Sensors these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
6
• Occupant Classification System WARNING! dent Response System:
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot • Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
If A Deployment Occurs protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor • Cut off battery power to the:
after deployment. assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi- ○ Engine
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller ○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
NOTE: System serviced as well. ○ Electric power steering
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli- ○ Brake booster
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the ○ Electric park brake
air bag system. NOTE: ○ Automatic transmission gear selector
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, ○ Horn
any or all of the following may occur:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior ○ Front wiper
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abra- ○ Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi- authorized dealer immediately.
lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid-
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
276 SAFETY
NOTE: • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
WARNING! accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper pas- • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully senger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify These data can help provide a better understanding of
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compart- the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
ment and on the ground near the engine compartment add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air NOTE:
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an acci- works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
dent, reset the system by following the procedure the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
described below. If you have any doubt, contact an • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
authorized dealer. are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
not function properly if modifications are made.
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
Enhanced Accident Response System Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
Reset Procedure trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in a crash investigation.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- any way (including removal or loosening/tightening To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
tem functions after an event, the ignition switch must of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
engine compartment and on the ground near the modify the air bag system for persons with disabili- equipment, can read the information if they have
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the ties, contact an authorized dealer. access to the vehicle or the EDR.
system and starting the engine. After an accident, if the
vehicle will not start after performing the reset proce- CHILD RESTRAINTS
dure, the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer Event Data Recorder (EDR) Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder times, including babies and children. Every state in the
Response System reset. (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer- United States, and every Canadian province, requires
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
Maintaining Your Air Bag System bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
WARNING! formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
the rear seats rather than in the front.
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could vehicle is designed to record such data as:
be injured if the air bag system is not there to pro- • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
tect you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
(Continued)
SAFETY 277
There are different sizes and types of restraints for chil- NOTE:
WARNING! dren from newborn size to the child almost large
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child • For additional information, refer to http://
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to 1–888–327–4236
hold even an infant on your lap could become so seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s • Canadian residents should refer to Transport
strong you are. The child and others could be badly Manual and on all the labels attached to the child Canada’s website for additional information:
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle restraint. https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it child-car-seat-safety.html
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Children who are two years old or younger and who have
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
Infants and Toddlers not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle 6
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
Small Children grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
Larger Children restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
height or weight limit of their booster seat
278 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints WARNING!

their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear sup- as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
port leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not allowed by the child seat.
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can designed to manage the crash forces of this type of All children whose weight or height is above the
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child car seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
seats. as it was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
your child may be more severely injured as a result. properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
It is recommended for children from birth until they
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc-
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear- WARNING!
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car-
rier but are still less than at least two years old. • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible collision. The child could be badly injured or killed.
child seat. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the Older Children And Child Restraints the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and cause serious personal injury.
child restraint in that vehicle. convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
SAFETY 279
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
WARNING!
between the neck and arm?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touch- Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
bend over the front of the seat when their back is ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach? arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
the vehicle seat? seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-
the way back? tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below 6
Child + Child Restraint LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Restraint
280 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System Restraints In This Vehicle
Crew Cab Full Bench, Quad Cab Full Bench And

60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor- Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system ing Position)
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets ing Position)
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor-
ages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
SAFETY 281
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a
No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench rear seat: Use the seat belt and tether
No
lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions? anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
No
anchorage? seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger
Yes restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
seat?
manual for more information.
6
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that There are tether strap anchorages located
are found at the rear of the seat cushion behind each of the rear seats.
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side (Example Shown)

282 SAFETY
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have Always follow the directions of the child restraint
a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the all child restraint systems will be installed as described
anchorage. here.
Center Seat LATCH To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child

All Quad Cabs Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No Restraint
Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
WARNING! belt, following the instructions below. See
page 283 to check what type of seat belt each
• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi- seating position has.
Outboard Tether Anchorage tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
tether anchor to install a child seat in the center easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
seating position. anchorages.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
more than one child restraint page 282. for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH Anchor- the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
ages Available the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks position to make room for the child seat. You may
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard posi- also move the front seat forward to allow more room
tion, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in for the child seat.
the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors
Center Tether Anchorage Over Head Rest or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
position. restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be seating position.
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to WARNING! 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connec- the top tether anchorage. See page 284 for
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more directions to attach a tether anchor.
tion to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints than one child restraint page 282.
and some rear-facing child restraints will also be
SAFETY 283
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
restraint rearward and downward into the seat. WARNING! page 266 for additional information on ALR.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child • Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- Please see the table below and the following sections
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted for more information.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
path. It should not move more than 1 inch attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR Installing Child Restraints Using The

(ALR) Seat Belt: Vehicle Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
used by other occupants or being used to secure child lap/shoulder belt.
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. WARNING!
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter- child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of The child could be badly injured or killed. 6
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations (All
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Models)
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
should not play with them. equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac- Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
WARNING! seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. pulled back into the retractor.
(Continued)
284 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a Weight limit of the Child Restraint forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit
forward facing child restraint? of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas- Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
Yes
senger seat? allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No Head restraints may not be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
No
belt path of the child restraint? retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt nect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
(ALR): path. the tether strap page 284.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a “click.” pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
lap/shoulder belt. path. It should not move more than 1 inch
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
against the child seat.
WARNING! Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web- Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
The child could be badly injured or killed. bing to retract back into the retractor. As the web-
Tether Anchorage
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions bing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
mode. WARNING!
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi- 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may locked, you should not be able to pull out any web- to any location in front of the car seat, including the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may lap portion around the child restraint while you push anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make the child restraint rearward and downward into the located behind the top of the vehicle seat. For the
room for the child seat. You may also move the front vehicle seat. (Continued)
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
SAFETY 285
3. Pass the tether strap hook through the space between NOTE:
WARNING! the head restraint and the seat back behind the child If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left and
location of approved tether anchorages in your seat, through the tether strap loop behind the seat right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both
vehicle, see page 280. and over to the center tether strap loop. child seats should be connected to the center tether
strap loop. This is the correct way to tether two out-
board child seats.
Center Seat:
1. Reach between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air Bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint. 4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the 6
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
tether strap loops located between the rear
glass and the back of the rear seat. There is Center Tether Strap Loop Location
a tether strap loop located behind each seat-
ing position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether 2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the
strap of the child restraint. tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back
Right Or Left Outboard Seats: and headrest, through the tether strap loop behind
the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind
1. Reach between the rear seat and rear glass to either the right or left outboard seat.
access the tether strap loop.
3. Pass the tether strap hook over the headrest behind
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the the child seat, through the tether strap loop behind
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether
through the space between the head restraint and strap loop.
the seat back, through the tether strap loop behind
the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
center seat. Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
286 SAFETY
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop,

but do not tighten the straps yet. SAFETY TIPS
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route
the tether strap following the directions for the cen- TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
ter seating position, above. NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
(see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to injured or killed.
the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
belts.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
left tether straps before the center tether strap. TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
WARNING! pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possi-
bly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to or in a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And child. Use only the anchorage position directly
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
seat belts.
tether strap.
Installing Three Child Restraints: • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, CONNECTED VEHICLES
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
Route the tether straps following the directions for not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
slack in the strap.
right and left seating positions, above. information and private communications without your
SAFETY 287
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collec- as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illumi-
tion & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag WARNING!
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
Cybersecurity” page 113. is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer any other floor mat. NEVER install or
service the vehicle immediately. stack an additional floor mat on top of
WARNING!
See page 262 for further information. an existing floor mat.
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the pos-
sible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are Defroster • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
including safety related systems, could be impaired or the blower control on high speed. You should be able to needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho- floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
an accident involving serious injury or death. rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. your vehicle.
Floor Mat Safety Information

• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera- depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
tion of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
Seat Belts a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat floor mat interferes with the operation of any
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the 6
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. in your trunk.
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system. • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have WARNING!
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor condi-
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
tions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
for inspection.
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. loss of vehicle control.
Air Bag Warning Light To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when install your floor mat upside down or turn
the ignition switch is first placed in the ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a • If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have regular basis. re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon (Continued)
(Continued)
288 SAFETY
WARNING! Fluid Leaks the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
check for interference with the accelerator, brake, ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
immediately.
Replace as required.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always EXHAUST GAS CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
check your floor mat has been properly installed
and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat. WARNING! WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
these safety tips:
VEHICLE • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
fined areas any longer than needed to move your
Tires vehicle in or out of the area.
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other rear doors open, make sure that all windows are running for more than a short period, adjust the
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation the vehicle.
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for mode.
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
cold inflation pressure. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con- time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
Lights trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru- the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
ment panel. exhaust system.
Door Latches Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
289
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: NOTE:
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch Uconnect With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the display, the Hazard Warning Flashers button is located wear down your battery.
upper switch bank just below the radio. above the display.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Hazard Warning Flashers Button Hazard Warning Flashers Button with 12-inch display
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash-

ers. When the button is activated, all directional turn 7
Assist And SOS Buttons
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning Flashers. 1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
and a SOS button.
warning for other motorists.
When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance, the Haz-
ard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio, WARNING!
Phone and NAV issues.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the SOS Call assume all risks related to the use of the features
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console. and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features NOTE: so may result in an accident involving serious injury
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features or death.
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call sys-
so may result in an accident involving serious injury tem initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the
or death. NOTE:
SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on
the overhead console or press the cancellation but- ○ Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
ton on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS
NOTE: ○ Once a connection is made between the vehi-
Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead cle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized console. SOS operator may be able to open a voice con-
by the subscriber page 207. 2. The LED lights located within the ASSIST and SOS nection with the vehicle to determine if addi-
• The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you buttons on the overhead console will turn green tional help is needed. Once the SOS operator
are connected to an operable 4G (data) network, once a connection to a SOS operator has been opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
which comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect made. Call system, the operator should be able to
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
Guardian™ service is active and connected to an hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehi-
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
operable 4G (data) network. cle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain con-
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
nected with the SOS operator until the SOS
ASSIST Call operator:
operator terminates the connection.
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you ○ Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri-
to any one of the following support centers:
○ The vehicle brand ate emergency responders and provide them with
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need ○ The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assis- 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
tance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its through the vehicle audio system to determine if WARNING!
location. Additional fees may apply for roadside additional help is needed.
assistance. • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
• SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle WARNING! or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
vehicle issues. location.
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
(Continued) (Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
WARNING!
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the • The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
following may occur at the time the malfunction is nected during a vehicle crash
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper- detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle: • 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satel-
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre- • The overhead console lights located within the lite signals are unavailable or obstructed
vent operable network and GPS signal reception, ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an red.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
emergency call. An operable network and GPS sig- • Operator error by the SOS operator
nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
• The Device Screen will display the following mes- • 4G (data) network congestion
sage: “Vehicle device requires service. Please con-
function properly. tact an authorized dealer.” • Weather
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket device requires service. Please contact an autho-
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys- rized dealer.”
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a WARNING!
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter- ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, WARNING! road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your • Ignoring the overhead console light could mean
assume all risks related to the use of the features
you will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
console light is illuminated, have an authorized
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR so may result in an accident involving serious injury
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, • The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
or death.
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
OPERATE. if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- NOTE: 7
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
pant Restraint Control system immediately. • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
is not there to help protect you.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 4G
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent 4G
SOS Call System Limitations (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system limited to, the following factors: your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
capabilities. operable 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
• The ignition is in the OFF position signal is required for the SOS Call system to function
not answer or respond to SOS system calls. • The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact properly.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
NOTE: NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension sys-
party responsible for compliance could void the user's tem, there is a feature which allows the automatic level-
authority to operate the equipment. ing to be disabled to assist with changing a tire. This
Automatic SOS — If Equipped feature can be activated through the Uconnect system
page 201.
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
vided radio supplement for complete information.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Air Suspension, you will
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING need to enable Tire Jack Mode in the Uconnect system
page 133 before changing the tire. Wheel Blocked Example
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
WARNING! NOTE:
areas.
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off WARNING!
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the JACK LOCATION
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the The jack and tools are stored under the front passenger
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or seat.
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body changing the wheel.
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. To access the jack and tools, you must remove the plas-
where it can be raised on a lift. tic access cover located on the side of the front passen-
3. Apply the parking brake.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is ger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of
on a jack. 4. Shift the transmission into Park (P). the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to
release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for 5. Turn the ignition OFF.
loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle 6. Block both front and rear of the wheel diagonally is free from the seat frame.
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
ice or slippery areas. driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the pas-
senger’s rear wheel.
NOTE:
If the tailgate is lowered, adding the shorter extension
#5 to jack extension #4 will enable lowering the spare
tire without having to raise the tailgate.
CAUTION!
• The lug wrench can only be attached to extension
#2.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism
be sure the large flared end opening on extension
#4 is positioned correctly over the winch mecha-
Pull Jack Access Cover From Front Jack And Tool Bag nism adjusting nut.
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt There are two ways to assemble the tools: • Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool
counterclockwise. After removing the wing bolt, slide
the assembly out from under the seat. Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising assembly.
Jack And Tools Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove 1 — Lug Wrench
tools from bag. 2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip #2
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip #3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip #4
5 — Short Extension #5
Assembled For Jack Operation REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up
the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension
tubes with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle.
2. Remove the protective cover over the access hole
for the winch mechanism by sliding the cover
upward.
Winch Mechanism Tube

Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension #2
5 — Short Extension #5
6 — Extension With Hook
Access Hole Cover Location
WARNING! 3. Insert the extension tube through the access hole
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in between the lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/
the original carrier and location. While driving you bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other CAUTION!
objects in the vehicle may move around with force, 4. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until
resulting in serious injury. The winch mechanism is designed for use with the the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or slack to allow you to pull it out from under the
other power tools is not recommended and can dam- vehicle.
age the winch.
WARNING!
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle Disengaging The Retainer

5. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
access to the spare tire retainer.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle. Jack Warning Label 7
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the trans- CAUTION!
mission in PARK.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated in the Jacking
Pulling The Spare Tire Out be raised.
Instructions for this vehicle.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to jack.
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from the
stored location.
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel. jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If 2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts (but do
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a not remove), by turning them counterclockwise one
service center where it can be raised on a lift. turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
(Continued)
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
jack handle driver to the extension, then to the lug
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack Operate the jack using the extension with jack hook
wrench.
under the rear portion of the lower control arm as and the lug wrench. The extension tubes may be
shown. Access the front jacking location from used but are not required.
behind the front tire.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the exten-
sion with jack hook to the jack and connect the
extension tubes. Access the rear jacking location
from behind the rear tire. Place the jack under the
Jack Lifting Point located on the rear axle lower con-
trol arm bracket. Then locate the slot in the jack lift
plate onto the rear axle Jack Lifting Point. Attach the
extension with jack hook extending to the rear of the
vehicle.
Assembled Jack And Tools
4. Placement for the front and rear jacking locations

are critical. See the following images for proper jack- Front Lifting Point
ing locations.
Rear Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location

Jack / Extensions Placement
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. Install TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
the spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the lug nuts toward the wheel. Hand tighten 1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
the lug nuts with the vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten
2. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper
the lug nuts until the vehicle has been completely
facing outward. Push the end of the winch’s cable,
lowered.
spring and steel sleeve through the back of the road
7. Lower the vehicle to the ground and finish tightening wheel. Making sure the valve stem is facing the
the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench handle for ground when the wheel is stowed.
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each lug nut has been tightened twice
page 364. If in doubt about the correct tight-
Rear Jacking Location ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
an authorized dealer or at a service station.
Connect the long extensions to the lug wrench.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
and adjust the jack position as required. in the places provided.
Reinstalling The Retainer
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the 8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel center cap, 7
vehicle until the wheel just clears the ground install the cap and remove the wheel blocks. Do not 3. Remove the extension with the hook and reattach
surface. install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the short extension #5 page 292. Attach the lug
the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage. wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle
facing away from the vehicle. Insert the extension
WARNING! 9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
tubes through the access hole between the lower
replaced tire, and secure the jack and tools in the
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and into
proper location.
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and the winch mechanism tube.
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough 10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can dam-
age the winch.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle Jack And Tool Bag
NOTE: 3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.

Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the repaired or replaced immediately.
winch mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It
cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire sev-
eral times to ensure it is firmly in place. REINSTALLING THE JACK AND
TOOLS Jack And Tools Tied
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack 4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position hold-
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug. ing the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and
tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug
into the fastener on the floor.
wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down
location.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor NOTE:

pan. Reinstall the plastic cover. WARNING! The positive battery post may be covered with a protec-
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the posi-
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. tive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol
on or around the post.
Follow these steps to prepare for jump starting:
CAUTION!
1. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any the parking brake and turn the ignition OFF.
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
alternator or electrical system may occur. accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
NOTE: park the vehicle within the jumper cables’ reach,
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
is OFF.
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START WARNING!
the original carrier and location. While driving you The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration engine compartment, behind the left headlight could establish a ground connection and personal
or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other assembly. injury could result.
objects in the vehicle may move around with force, 7
resulting in serious injury.
4. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over
the positive (+) battery post.
JUMP STARTING WARNING!

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp- fan blades.
erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
Positive (+) Battery Post Location electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

WARNING! cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an CAUTION!
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is frame or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or the positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or large bolt. The ground must be away from the bat- current will blow the fuse.
sparks away from the battery. tery and the fuel injection system.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnection

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING! 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable

from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could charged battery.
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
CAUTION!
Jump Starting Label from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
or the discharged vehicle. WARNING!
vehicle with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) protective cap.
Connecting The Jumper Cables post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to you should have the battery and charging system
result in personal injury.
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. inspected at an authorized dealer.
NOTE: 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
CAUTION!
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
post. start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper battery. draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
the negative (-) post of the booster battery. battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle. WARNING!
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
Cap-Less Fuel System. The refueling funnel is located in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
under the passenger’s seat along with the jack and tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
tools. If refueling is necessary, while using an approved Light to turn on.
gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
opening. Take care to open both flappers with the fun- container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
nel to avoid spills. burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

Inserting Funnel If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open. In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening. action.
• On the highways — slow down.
Fuel Funnel Location CAUTION! • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine 7
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
NOTE: the fuel tank after filling. brakes.
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel NOTE:
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area. There are steps that you can take to slow down an
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
impending overheat condition:
door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling: WARNING! • If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
See the following steps for refueling: being filled.
1. Retrieve funnel from under the passenger’s front (Continued)
seat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maxi- MANUAL PARK RELEASE
mum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower
control to high. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system. WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the park-
WARNING! ing brake before activating the Manual Park Release.
In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cool- with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activat-
ant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you ing the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is
not open the hood until the radiator has had time to not secured by the parking brake, or by proper con-
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap nection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Manual Park Release Access Cover
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to seri-
ous injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. 4. Behind the Manual Park Release access cover is the
orange tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far
CAUTION! In order to move the vehicle in cases where the trans- as it will go, then release it. The tether and lever will
mission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a remain outside of the trim panel and the transmis-
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available. sion should now be in NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull to be moved.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back 1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT in the driver’s seat.
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
2. Apply the parking brake if possible.
off immediately and call for service.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, open the
Manual Park Release cover, which is located to the
lower left of the steering column.
Manual Park Release Tether

To Reset The Manual Park Release: DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal WARNING!
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
in the driver’s seat.
spinning the wheels or racing the engine. ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it. or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its CAUTION! explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
original position. cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon-
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, dis-
abled vehicles may also be towed as described on
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
page 183.
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Manual Park Release Tether It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the NOTE:
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no Vehicles equipped with the Active-Level Four Corner Air
4. Verify the transmission is in PARK.
transmission shifting occurring).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and rein-
Suspension System must be placed in Transport mode, 7
before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or
stall the access cover. If the access cover cannot be
NOTE: flatbed truck page 133. If the vehicle cannot be
reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4.
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
NOTE: run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
the body). Failure to follow these instructions may
When the lever is locked in the released position the Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
access cover cannot be reinstalled. more than two seconds, you must press the brake
tie-down tension.
pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stabil-
ity Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it rocking the vehicle page 246. Once the vehicle has
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the been freed, push the ESC OFF button to restore “ESC
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around On” mode.
the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Four-Wheel Drive Models
Models
See Instructions
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED • Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in N (Neutral)
• Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS CAUTION!
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ment per FCA US LLC instructions. Use of safety chains ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- age from improper towing is not covered under the
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/ sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with front New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). Instruc-
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, tions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the when the engine is OFF page 302.
ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph the ground.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is (48 km/h).
discharged, find Instructions on shifting the transmis- • The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
sion out of PARK in order to move the vehicle (48 km). CAUTION!
page 302.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) and farther remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
CAUTION! than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF damage to the transmission or transfer case will
the ground. An acceptable method to tow the vehicle on occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. a flatbed are as follows: towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do • Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the (Continued)
front wheels in the straight position with the rear
not attach to front or rear suspension components. wheels raised and the front wheels ON the ground.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above • Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
requirements can cause severe transmission Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New • Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ing serious injury.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —

CAUTION!
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
hooks. vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could dam-
age your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System. 7
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact page 275.
Emergency Tow Hooks
NOTE: EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
the vehicle. that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle page 276.
306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
ENGINE than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by turns on.
referring to the steps described under Instrument Clus- • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
ter Display page 95. master cylinder, and fill as needed.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for NOTE: • Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
scheduled maintenance.
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or MAINTENANCE PLAN
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required mainte-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally nance. More frequent maintenance may be needed in
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely only a concern for fleet customers. severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very short
hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional
the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have maintenance not specified in the maintenance sched-
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the • Check engine oil level. ule may be required.
next 500 miles (805 km). • Check windshield washer fluid level.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change the oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
• Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
• Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect the engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner, as necessary.
• Deploy power side steps and clean linkages with high pressure car wash wand to remove any foreign debris. Apply MOPAR Spray White Lithium Grease to the pivot points.
• Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
100,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
192,000
208,000
160,000
224,000
240,000
176,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
X X X X X X X
replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If
gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid
level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, X X X X X
off-road or frequent trailer towing, change axle
fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect transfer case fluid. X
8
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
For severe dusty driving conditions, inspect
and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Filter as necessary; replacement may be more
frequent depending on conditions.
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
If equipped with Stop/Start, replace accessory
X
drive belt with OEM grade Mopar® belt.
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
100,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
192,000
208,000
160,000
224,000
240,000
176,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace spark plugs. ** X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
whichever comes first.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent X X
trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING! SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
• You can be badly injured working on or around a Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for referring to the steps described under Instrument Clus-
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a scheduled maintenance. ter Display page 95.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change NOTE:
mechanic. indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months,
vehicle could result in a component malfunction such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot whichever comes first.
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have your Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
could cause an accident.
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next • Check engine oil level.
500 miles (805 km). • Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake • Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
unusual wear or damage. master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as
needed.
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter.
• Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
• Change fuel filter and drain water from fuel filter assembly.
• Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner, as necessary.
• Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
• Deploy power side steps and clean linkages with high pressure car wash wand to remove any foreign debris. Apply MOPAR Spray White Lithium Grease to the pivot points.
CAUTION! 8
Failure to comply with Oil Change or Fuel Filter Drain
and Replacement requirements (every oil change, not
to exceed 10,000 miles) will result in premature
engine wear. Such wear is not covered by the New
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
100,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
192,000
208,000
160,000
224,000
240,000
176,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
16,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. If gear oil leakage is suspected,
check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road X X X X X
or frequent trailer towing change the axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter assembly.
NOTE:
In states that mandate fuel use of Biodiesel blends greater than 5% X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
(B6-B20) [Example: Minnesota in summer months] oil changes and
fuel filter replacements are required every 8,000 miles and should not
exceed 6 months.
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following: police,
X X
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
100,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
192,000
208,000
160,000
224,000
240,000
176,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
16,000
Or Kilometers:
Change transfer case fluid. X
WARNING! CAUTION!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a • Replace fuel filter and drain water from fuel filter
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you assembly every oil change, do not exceed
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If 8,000 miles or 6 months.
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a • If biodiesel greater than 5% (B6-B20) is used per
service job, take your vehicle to a competent state mandate (example Minnesota in Summer
mechanic. months) the fuel must be used within 30 days by
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your driving (to less than a quarter tank) and filled with
vehicle could result in a component malfunction fresh diesel fuel. Failure to do so can result in
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This engine damage that is not covered by the New
could cause an accident. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
8
In states that mandate fuel use of Biodiesel blends
greater than 5% (B6-B20) [Example: Minnesota in
summer months]:
• Oil changes are required every 8,000 miles and
should not exceed 6 months.
(Continued)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5.7L ENGINE WITHOUT STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
5.7L ENGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL ADDING WASHER FLUID WARNING!

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and the
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid res- contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
a fully warmed up engine is shut off. ervoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will ately with large amounts of water page 299.
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. blade performance.
There are four possible dipstick types: To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
• Crosshatched zone. or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This a booster battery or any other booster source with
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. rating information can be found on most washer fluid an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end containers.
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN WARNING! after handling.
and the MAX ends of the range.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
NOTE: are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch must be exercised when filling or working around the CAUTION!
markings on the dipstick. washer solution.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading is at • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster battery that the positive cable is attached to the
to the high end of the range marking. for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing positive post and the negative cable is attached to
or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
washer solution used with water as directed on the con- tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
CAUTION! tainer, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or terminal posts and free of corrosion.
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage trim. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
your engine. the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
ENGINE OIL The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
and connections however, the pressures generated Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
by these machines is such that complete protection page 371.
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed. CAUTION!
NOTE:
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after startup chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE and then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds.
This is normal and will not harm the engine. This char-
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person- acteristic can be caused by short drive cycles. For
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service example, if the vehicle is started then shut off after Synthetic Engine Oils
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are driving a short distance. Upon restarting, you may expe-
available which include detailed service information for rience a ticking sound. Other causes could be if the Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before vehicle is unused for an extended period of time, incor- use synthetic API approved engine oils.
attempting any procedure yourself. rect oil, extended oil changes or extended idling. If the Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
engine continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
NOTE: Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized bers should not be used.
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems dealer.
may void your warranty and could result in civil penal- Materials Added To Engine Oil
ties being assessed against you. Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids addition of any additives (other than leak detection
WARNING! page 371. dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
You can be badly injured working on or around a American Petroleum Institute (API) mental additives.
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you Approved Engine Oil 8
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade- Filters
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
mark oils. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
The API Starburst trademark certifies and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils. indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter Replacement — Except G/T Model
at every engine oil change. Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if
Engine Oil Filter Selection you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for change your engine air cleaner filter.
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters 1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners on the
should be used. engine air cleaner filter cover.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals page 306.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING! 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can 2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces-
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no NOTE:
one is near the engine compartment before starting Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is pres-
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, ent before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in 1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
serious personal injury. assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover tion surface facing downward.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the housing assembly.
Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be engine air cleaner filter.
used. 3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air cleaner
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous- filter assembly.
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
Replacement — G/T Model NOTE:
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is pres-
you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should ent before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
clean your engine air cleaner filter per the recom-
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter onto the engine
mended procedure or replace it.
air cleaner filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
1. Release and remove the engine cover from ball engine air cleaner filter assembly.
studs by lifting up on each side edge of the engine
cover. 3. Tighten the fasteners (four) on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly 4. Install the engine cover.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Fasteners G/T AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE

2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover Clean Engine Air Filter
The scheduled air filter cleaning interval is
4. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the 30,000 miles (48,280 km), or if in a dusty environment
vehicle. the engine air filter should be checked periodically to
ensure optimal air flow.
1. Spray the air filter with the recommended Mopar®
air filter cleaner or apply mild dishwashing detergent
and water and let sit for at least 10 minutes to
Engine Cover loosen dirt before rinsing.
1 — Engine Cover Ball Stud Location NOTE: 8

2 — Engine Cover Never use strong detergents, high pressure, or gaso-
line on the air filter.
2. With suitable tool fully loosen (four) fasteners on the
2. Rinse the air filter with cool low-pressure water
engine air cleaner filter cover.
applied from the inside (clean side) out in order to
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter cover from the Engine Air Cleaner Filter flush the dirt out of the filter. Continue to rinse the
engine air cleaner filter assembly. filter until all traces of the cleaner have been
removed.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
NOTE: NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat steps 1 and 2 if the Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids from
air filter is not completely clean. your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately discarded,
can present a problem to the environment. Contact an
3. After rinsing the air filter, gently shake off the excess
authorized dealer, service station, or government
water and allow air filter to dry naturally.
agency for advice on recycling programs and for where
NOTE: used fluids and filters can be properly disposed of in
Do not use forced air pressure as it may damage the your area.
filtering capabilities of the filter’s microfibers and Drain the fuel/water separator filter when the Water In
also void its warranty. Fuel Indicator Light is ON. Within 10 minutes of vehicle
shutdown, turn the filter drain valve (located on the bot-
DRAINING FUEL/WATER tom of the filter housing) counterclockwise to drain
Fuel Filter Assembly fuel/water, then turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
SEPARATOR FILTER — DIESEL tion, and allow any accumulated water to drain. Leave
ENGINE 1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve the drain valve open until all water and contaminants
have been removed. When clean fuel is visible, close
The fuel/water separator filter housing is located inside the drain valve by turning it clockwise, and turn the igni-
the frame rail, behind the left front wheel. The best
CAUTION! tion switch to OFF.
access to this water drain valve is from under the
vehicle. If more than two ounces or 60 milliliters of fuel have
If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO been drained page 321.
NOT START the engine before you drain water from
CAUTION! the fuel filter to avoid engine damage.
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL
• Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light comes on and a FILTER REPLACEMENT — DIESEL
the engine is running. single chime is heard while you are driving, or with the ENGINE
• Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. ignition in the ON position, there may be a problem with
Drain the filter into an appropriate container. your water separator wiring or sensor. See an autho- NOTE:
rized dealer for service. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufactur-
If water is detected in the water separator while the Upon proper draining of the water from the fuel filter, er’s filtration and water separating requirements can
engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in the the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain illuminated severely impact fuel system life and reliability. Under
ON/RUN position, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will for approximately 10 seconds. If the water was drained normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be
illuminate and an audible chime will be heard. At this while the engine was running, the Water In Fuel Indica- replaced every 20,000 miles (every other oil change). If
point, you should stop the engine and drain the water tor Light may remain on for approximately three the vehicle is being used in severe operating condi-
from the filter housing. minutes. tions, or in certain geographical areas of the country
(Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, 3. Open the water drain valve, and let any accumu-
Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and lated water drain. CAUTION!
Nebraska) due to fuel cleanliness issues, it’s recom- The starter motor will engage for approximately
4. Close the water drain valve.
mended to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles. 30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between
5. Remove bottom cover using a strap wrench. Rotate cranking intervals.
counterclockwise for removal. Remove the used
CAUTION! o-ring and discard it.
• Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. 6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing NOTE:
Drain the filter into an appropriate container. and dispose of it according to your local regulations. The engine may run rough until the air is forced from all
• Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new
7. Wipe the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing
the fuel lines.
fuel filter. There is a possibility debris could be
introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It clean.
WARNING!
is best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank 8. Install a new o-ring into the ring groove on the filter
lift pump to prime the fuel system. housing and lubricate with clean engine oil. Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with die-
sel fuel.
OUT OF FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
WARNING! CAUTION!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel use of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel sys-
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious tem. Do not start the engine as damage will occur
injury or death. that is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, 8
Fuel Filter Assembly approximately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L).
NOTE:
2. Press ignition switch twice without your foot on
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve brake to put vehicle in ON/RUN position. This will • In addition, commercially available fuel additives are
2 — Fuel Filter Access activate the in tank fuel pump for approximately not necessary for the proper operation of your diesel
30 seconds. Repeat this process twice. engine.
1. Turn engine off.
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting” proce- • For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar® Premium Die-
2. Place a drain pan under the fuel filter assembly. dure page 118. sel Fuel Treatment" is recommended to assist with
cold starting.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants page 371 for Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
further information.
STRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS R–1234yf
FLOW (DIESEL ENGINE) AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions For best possible performance, your air conditioner Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your should be checked and serviced by an authorized with a low global-warming potential. It is recommended
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and dealer at the start of each warm season. This service that air conditioning service be performed by an autho-
exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly inte- should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a rized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
grated into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine com- checked at this time. NOTE:
bustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no WARNING! compressor oil, and refrigerants.
input or interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you to • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Cabin Air Filter Replacement
additional maintenance required on your vehicle or approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
engine page 95. tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause WARNING!
WARNING! the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
information.
materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
those items that come into contact with your exhaust • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
where your exhaust system can contact anything that injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant personal injury.
can burn. or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following proce-
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID dure to replace the filter:
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by CAUTION!
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
the name of its active component, UREA—is a key com- Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning contents.
ponent of Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) systems, system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
which help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
regulations. DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into harm-
less nitrogen and water vapor.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the

glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment
door and release into dash panel.
Glove Compartment Filter Cover Removal

1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 1 — Finger Tabs
3 — Glove Compartment Door
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out
Right Side Of Glove Compartment 4. Disengage the glove compartment door from its of the housing.
1 — Glove Compartment Door hinges by opening the glove compartment past the
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether travel stop and pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on both tabs on each end of the filter cover.
sides of the glove compartment door. Push inward
on both sides of the glove compartment to release
the glove compartment travel stops.
8
Cabin Air Filter
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, press on each end until you hear an audible
Filter Cover click.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by

CAUTION! inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indi- and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
cate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to compartment door.
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often. ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the WARNING!
glove compartment past the travel stops by pushing
in on the glove compartment sides. • Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature Conditions that would require replacement:
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving • Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a • Rib or belt wear
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you • Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If • Belt slips
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a • “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct
service job, take your vehicle to a competent position on pulley)
mechanic.
• Belt broken
Glove Compartment
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks • Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
rib, are considered normal. This is not a reason to NOTE:
replace the belt. However, cracks running along a rib Identify and correct problem before new belt is
3 — Glove Compartment Door (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks run- installed.
ning along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
NOTE: replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glazing. If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start, belt must
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged. be replaced with an OEM grade Mopar® belt.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and CAUTION!
a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser- Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
tions of salt or road film.
viced at an authorized dealer. glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may be damaged.
BODY LUBRICATION may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as or dirt from a dry windshield. 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
be lubricated periodically. Use a lithium-based grease,
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to assure quiet,
etc.
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con- NOTE:
cerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
removed. Particular attention should also be given to marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
hood latching components to ensure proper function. wiper blades or replace as necessary.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
cleaned and lubricated. periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a following points:
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® • Wear or uneven edges
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. • Foreign material 1 — Wiper Blade
8
2 — Wiper Arm
• Hardening or cracking 3 — Release Tab
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not press the release tab on the wiper blade and while
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged. holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
EXHAUST SYSTEM CAUTION!

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine • The catalytic converter requires the use of
exhaust system. unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys- control device and may seriously reduce engine
tem; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the performance and cause serious damage to the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is engine.
damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
1 — Wiper Blade Replace as required. malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook resulting in possible damage to the converter and
3 — J Hook Retainer vehicle.
WARNING!
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
blade from the wiper arm.
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Car- verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
bon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
Installing The Front Wipers damage.
see page 286.
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park NOTE:
over materials that can burn. Such materials might Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of be grass or leaves coming into contact with your can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
the wiper arm. exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper contact anything that can burn. engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
audible click. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
vice, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter Engine Coolant Checks Selection Of Coolant
damage:
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every For further information page 371.
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in NOTE:
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
the vehicle. refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumula- coolant, may result in engine damage and may
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic tion of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spray- decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough ing water from a garden hose vertically down the face of different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
radiator core. or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
COOLING SYSTEM Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rub- engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connec- in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
tion at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
WARNING! the entire system for leaks. (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN as soon as possible.
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
you see or hear steam coming from under the
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill tors or anti-rust products, as they may not be com-
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system patible with the radiator engine coolant and may
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is NOTE:
plug the radiator.
hot. Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to • This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
The fan starts automatically and may start at any to be added to the system please contact an authorized ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
dealer. recommended.
time, whether the engine is running or not. 8
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to
the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032). lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON For the proper maintenance intervals page 306. ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
mode. tact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant Disposal Of Used Coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
ant is needed to be added to the system, please
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine with your local authorities to determine the disposal
contact an authorized dealer.
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To • Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT immediately. If ingested, seek emergency assistance
your vehicle. coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as immediately.
Please review these recommendations for using possible.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L Engine
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Cooling System Pressure Cap The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant: The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range
• We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine on the bottle when the engine is cold.
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped). is no need to remove the cap unless checking for cool-
Material Standard MS.90032. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any ant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer surfaces. the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
WARNING!
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance. • Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never bottle. Do not overfill.
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to Checking Coolant Level — 5.7L Engines
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald- coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE range on
cooling system. ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the dipstick.
the system is hot or under pressure.
To check the coolant level:
NOTE: • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine 1. Open the coolant reservoir.
• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper damage may result. 2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reser-
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the voir neck.
vehicle is operated.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows through another hose to the intake manifold of the
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may engine. This cooling process enables more efficient
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. To guarantee optimum performance of the system,
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler, condenser
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant and radiator clean and free of debris. Periodically check
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant the hoses leading to and from the charge air cooler for
expansion bottle must also be protected against cracks or loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and
freezing. reduced engine performance.
• If frequent engine coolant additions are required, BRAKE SYSTEM
the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks. In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick system components should be inspected periodically
• Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini- page 306.
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick. mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there your engine which contains aluminum components.
is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking WARNING!
for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over- Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
engine coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac- • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
month. condenser clean. sible brake damage. You would not have your full
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter braking capacity in an emergency.
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
bottle. Do not overfill. ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor- Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cooling System Notes mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Cylinder 8
NOTE: CHARGE AIR COOLER — The fluid level of the brake master cylinder should be
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immedi-
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
INTER-COOLER (DIESEL ENGINE) ately if the Brake System Warning Light is on. If neces-
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- The charge air cooler is positioned in front of the radia- sary, add fluid to bring level within the designated
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high tor and the air conditioner condenser. Air enters the marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- engine through the air cleaner and passes through the cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine turbocharger, where it is pressurized. This pressurized area before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. air rapidly reaches high temperature. The air is then
directed through a hose to the charge air cooler and
can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION!
fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced.
If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system
for leaks page 373.
Special Additives If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
WARNING! Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and to adjust the fluid level accurately.
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
• Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
page 373. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
Fluid And Filter Changes
can severely damage your brake system and/or
may adversely affect seals. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the origi-
life of the vehicle.
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder CAUTION!
reservoir. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New disassembled for any reason.
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from
Selection Of Lubricant
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
Fluid Level Check ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Use only the manufacturer recommended transmission
This could result in a collision. require adjustment under normal operating conditions. fluid page 373. It is important to maintain the
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also can check your transmission fluid level using special any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be service tools. used.
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the CAUTION!
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis- Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
sion damage. er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
ure. This could result in a collision.
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder page 373.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT NOTE:

WARNING!
When refilling a limited slip differential axle which
DRIVING AXLE FLUID LEVEL requires a friction modification additive, the additive Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not should be added before the gear lubricant to ensure other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons proper additive fill. breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the TRANSFER CASE and/or property damage.
fluid level page 373. This inspection should be • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
made with the vehicle in a level position. Fluid Level Check tion is off and that all the other services are
The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler switched off and/or disengaged.
hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge of hole) for the plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
front axle and rear axle. filler plug hole (or within 1/8 inch of the bottom) with rized dealer.
the vehicle in a level position. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
Drain And Refill bag system, braking system), power unit systems
For the proper maintenance intervals page 306. Drain And Refill (engine system, transmission system) or steering
For the proper maintenance intervals page 306. system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Lubricant Selection
For further information page 373. Selection Of Lubricant
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid CAUTION!
page 373.
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment,
corrosion and possible failure of differential compo- FUSES take care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the
nents. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be windshield wiper motors with water.
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
Limited-Slip Differentials current. 8
Rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential WARNING! When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar® Limited Slip Addi- element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
tive be added to the gear lubricant page 373. The
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
Mopar® Limited Slip Additive should be added to the as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with extended periods of time with the engine off may result
gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made to an another fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a in vehicle battery discharge.
axle equipped with a Limited Slip Differential. fuse with a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
Underhood Power Distribution Center

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit break-
ers. A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity num-
ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
CAUTION!
Blade Fuses
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
1 — Fuse Element may allow water to get into the power distribution
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element center and possibly result in an electrical system
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element failure.
(blown fuse)
8
Underhood Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Pump Motor
F02 – – Spare
F03 – 5 Amp Tan MGU *
F04 – – Spare
F05 – – Spare
F06 – 10 Amp Red OUTPUT TO UPFITTER PDC *
F07 – – Spare
F08 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Left
F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Right
F11 – 15 Amp Blue ID/CLEARANCE LIGHTS *
F12 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Park Lamp
F13 – – Spare
F14 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch
F15 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F16 – – Spare *
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension
F18 – 15 Amp Blue AGS / Rear Axle Cooling Valve / Active Air Dam
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals *
F21 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step *
F22 50 Amp Red – Air Module *
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F25 40 Amp Green – MOD CBC 4 Exterior Lights 2

* If Equipped
F26 50 Amp Red – ESP Module
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F28 – 10 Amp Red PCM / ECM
F29 40 Amp Green – ESP Module
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM / PCM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F34 – – Spare
PCM / ECM / Power Pack Unit (PPU) Motor Generator Unit (MGU)
F35 – 10 Amp Red
Wake Up * / EPS / ATMM / ESP
F36 – – Spare
F37 – 5 Amp Tan R / S Output to iPDC
F38 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Active CL TEMP VLV
F39 – 15 Amp Blue MOD ATMM *
F40 40 Amp Green – Starter
F41 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heaters
F42 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #5 *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow MGU Coolant Pump / ADCM *
8
F44 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Camera *
F45 – 10 Amp Red ADCM *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Heater *
F47 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F48 – – Spare
F49 30 Amp Pink – Htr Ctrl *
F50 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #6 *

* If Equipped
F51 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #1 *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 10 Amp Red Supply / Purging Pump *
15 Amp Blue PCM *
F54 –
10 Amp Red Vapor Blocking Valve *
F55 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F58 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #2 *
F59 – 25 Amp Clear Injectors / IGN Coil / Glow Plug Module *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM / PCM / ACT Short Running Valve / LTR Coolant Pump *
F61 – 15 Amp Blue LT HID Headlamp
60 Amp Blue Glow Plug *
F62 –
40 Amp Green LTR Coolant Pump *
F63 20 Amp Blue – NOx Sensor *
F64 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor *
Internal Power Distribution Center See the following steps for accessing the interior fuses: 2. After removing the screws, gently pull both the left
and right side of the fuse panel cover to release the
The Power Distribution Center is located under the driv- 1. Locate and remove the two screws from the lower
fastener clips.
er’s side instrument panel. This center contains car- portion of the fuse panel cover.
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
Interior Fuse Box Location

Fuse Panel Screw Locations
Fuse Cover Panel 3. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the fuse panel
cover.
Internal Fuse Chart

* If Equipped
F01 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F02 – – Spare 8
F03 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Front (Pass)
F04 – – Spare
F05 – 20 Amp Yellow Module PPU Cooling Fan *
F06 – – Spare
F07 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 3 PWR Locks
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – 5 Amp Tan Output to Under-hood Power Distribution Center (UPDC) Run Coil
F12 – 25 Amp Clear Mod Audio Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation
F13 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod Seat Heater Front (Driver)
F14 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Seat Heater Front (Steering Wheel)
F15 A&B – – Spare
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow LT Spot Lamp *
F18 30 Amp Pink – Motor Sunshade Sunroof
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Rear Seat Module (CRSM) (Heat Rear RT)
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 15 Amp Blue Mod RF Hub / Mod Ignition / Mod Cluster CNN
F25 40 Amp Green – Mod Integrated Trailer Brake
Mod Cluster CCN / Mod Cyber Security / Trailer Gateway Module
F26 – 15 Amp Blue
(360 Camera)
F27 – 5 Amp Tan Mod Cluster CCN / Mod SGW
F28 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F29 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod CRSM (Heat Rear LT)
F30 30 Amp Pink – Mod DTCM / Mod Tailgate
F31 30 Amp Pink – Mod CBC 1 Interior Light
F32 – 20 Amp Yellow RT Spot Lamp *
Assy Overhead Console / Switch 911 / Switch Assist / Sunshade /
F33 – 10 Amp Red
HUD

* If Equipped
F34 – 15 Amp Blue Frt & RR Ventilated Seat Motor
Mod Inverter / Mtr Sunshade Sunroof / Mtr Dual Sunroof / USB
F35 – 10 Amp Red
Charge Only
F36 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 2 Exterior Light 1
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 20 Amp Blue – Dome Pursuit Vehicle *
Lumbar Support & Pass SW / Steering Column Control Module /
F41 A&B – 15 Amp Blue
HVAC Control Module / ICS Switch Bank / Upper Switch Bank
Mod Transfer Case Switch Module (TCSM) / SBW / Electric Park
F42 A&B – 10 Amp Red Brake SW / Module TPM Trailer / Module Gateway Can-C Trailer TPM
/ Seat LT & RT Vent
F43 A&B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics / Front & Rear USB
F44 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio / DCSD / Telematics Box Mod / Trailer Gateway Module (360)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Driver
F46 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F47 – – Spare
Rearview Mirror / SW Window Passenger / Rear USB / Wireless
F48A – 10 Amp Red
Charging Pad Mod
8
Mod CVPM / SNSR Blind Spot / HDLP Adaptive Front Lighting Sensor
F49 – 15 Amp Blue
(AFLS)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Battery PACK Control Mod (BPCM) *
F51 A&B – – Spare
F52 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed *
F53 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Reverse Steering Control / Trailer Steering Control Knob

* If Equipped
Power Outlet Center Seat Battery Feed Position
F54 A&B – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet Center Seat Ignition Feed Position
F55 25 Amp White – Upfitter *
F56 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface *
F60 50 Amp Red – Mod Inverter
F61 – – Spare
ITBM / Mod Occupant Class / Mod IAIR Suspension / Mod HVAC /
Snsr In car Temp / Integrated Radar Camera Mod (IRCM) / Humidity
F62 A&B – 10 Amp Red
Rain & Light Sensor (HRLS) / Parktronics System Mod (PTS) / Gate-
way Can-C Trailer TPM Mod
F63 – – Spare
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F66 – 10 Amp Red Run - Accessory Feed
Circuit Breakers
Cavity Circuit Breaker Description

Driver Window SW Rear PWR Windows / Overhead SW
CB1 25 Amp
Rear Defrost
CB2 25 Amp Driver PWR Seat / Driver Seat Memory Mod
CB3 25 Amp Passenger Power Seat / Passenger Seat Memory Mod
BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE:

See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this sec-
tion includes bulb description and replacement part
numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-
wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED
8
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) 7444NA
Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED
Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) W5W
Front Side Marker LED
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps LED
Exterior Bulbs
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror – If Equipped) LED
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 7440LL/W21WLL
Premium Rear Tail/Turn/Backup and Stop Lamp LED
Base Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cargo Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp LED
Base Turn Lamp 7440NA / WY21W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness connec-
tor from the low beam bulb.
BASE QUAD: LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH
BEAM HEADLAMP, FRONT PARK AND TURN CAUTION!
— IF EQUIPPED
Low Beam
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
See the following steps to replace: oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
1. Open the hood. • Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
3. Locate the low beam access cover, which can be socket, or the lamp wiring.
found on the back side of the headlamps. Low Beam Headlight Cover
NOTE:
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to
It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air unlock the bulb from the lamp.
Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
headlamp/side marker light bulbs. 7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
4. Disengage the bulb access cover by rotating 8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb
counterclockwise. and covers.
High Beam
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
socket, or the lamp wiring.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to Park And Turn Socket
unlock the bulb from the lamp.
High Beam Headlight Cover
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 4. Reach behind the headlamp and unlock the park
See the following steps to replace: and turn socket from the lamp by rotating counter-
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb clockwise a quarter turn.
1. Open the hood. and cover.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. Front Park And Turn
See the following steps to replace: 6. Separate the bulb from the socket without twisting.
3. Locate the high beam access cover, which can be
found on the back side of the headlamps. 1. Open the hood. 7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb
and covers.
NOTE: 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
Side Marker Lamp
It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air 3. Locate the park and turn socket, which can be See the following steps to replace:
Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side found on the back side of the headlamps.
headlamp/side marker light bulbs. 1. Open the hood.
8
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage the 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
access cover by rotating counterclockwise. 3. Locate the side marker lamp, which can be found on
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness connec- the back side of the headlamps.
tor from the high beam bulb.
Side Marker Lamp Fog Lamp Bulb Tail Lamp Locations

4. Disengage the side marker socket by rotating coun- 3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to 1 — Tail Lamp
terclockwise a quarter turn. unlock the bulb from the housing. 2 — Fasteners
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the 4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 3 — Push - Pin Retainers
housing.
5. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and cover. 2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without twisting.
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the out-
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb CAUTION! board side of the lamp housing from the two plastic
and covers. snap post retainers in the outer box side panel.
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily sur-
Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED and faces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Halogen front fog lamps.
Halogen REAR TAIL/STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND
See the following steps to replace: BACKUP LAMPS
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/bumper to 1. Remove the two screws and push pin retainers that
access the back of the front fog lamp housing. pass through the bed sheet metal.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
Tail Lamp Removal

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP 3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn counter-
bulb socket. (CHMSL) WITH CARGO LAMP clockwise and remove the socket and bulb from
housing.
See the following steps to replace:
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
1. Remove the four screws holding the housing/lens to
the body as shown.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contract other oily sur-
faces. Shortened bulb life will result.
○ Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps

○ Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Wiring Harness Connector 5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
TIRES
CAUTION!
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
wiring harness to the body. Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow-
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily sur- bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
faces. Shortened bulb life will result. and Tire Loading.
8
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
housing.
CHMSL Bulb Location

Tire Markings NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
Tire Markings letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code LT235/85R16.
(TIN) • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
2 — Size Designation emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
3 — Service Description into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
4 — Maximum Load Example: T145/80D18 103M.
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- • High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ture Grades into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART

EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
8
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on
the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on
the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will
have the full TIN, including the date code, located on
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
Maximum Inflation Pressure
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Term Definition
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-
Tire Placard
ment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
door.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tires.
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle. Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
Tire And Loading Information Placard tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard in Vehicle Loading
page 171.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded. 8
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing page 171.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
Tire And Loading Information Placard XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight of • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
Limit— luggage and cargo being loaded on the (392 kg).
(1) Locate the statement “The com- vehicle. That weight may not safely
bined weight of occupants and cargo exceed the available cargo and lug-
should never exceed XXX kg or gage load capacity calculated in Step
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. 4.
(2) Determine the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a
the driver and passengers that will be trailer, load from your trailer will be
riding in your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
(3) Subtract the combined weight of reduces the available cargo and lug-
the driver and passengers from XXX kg gage load capacity of your vehicle.
or XXX lbs. Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
(4) The resulting figure equals the will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
available amount of cargo and luggage amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there NOTE:
will be five 150 lb passengers in your • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
CAUTION!
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
Tire Pressure response or over responsiveness in the steering. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe NOTE: reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause could damage the valve stem.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Safety Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
• Fuel Economy • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
the vehicle to drift left or right.
• Tread Wear Fuel Economy
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
• Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
Safety resulting in higher fuel consumption. hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
Tread Wear the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
WARNING! Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor- sidewall.
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can the need for earlier tire replacement. range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
cause collisions.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability with temperature changes.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
in overheating and tire failure. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion ride. mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
especially in the Winter.
cause damage that result in tire failure.
Tire Inflation Pressures Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
loss of vehicle control.
door. (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
At least once a month:
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
right or left. judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
may look properly inflated even when they are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
underinflated.
mended cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced WARNING!
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper- and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym- ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
ating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. bol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
designed to be reused. one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
WARNING! Run Flat Tires — If Equipped 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of infla-
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious tion pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maxi- as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when Tread Wear Indicators
mum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
(120 km/h). kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it tires to help you in determining when your tires should
has limited driving capabilities and needs to be be replaced.
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Radial Ply Tires When a Run Flat tire is changed after driving with
underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPMS
WARNING! sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven
under Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. NOTE:
The instability could cause a collision. Always use The TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them vehicle on a flat tire condition.
with other types of tires. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
Tire Repair mode. 8
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it For more information page 257.
meets the following criteria: Tire Tread
Tire Spinning
• The tire has not been driven on when flat 1 — Worn Tire
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) 2 — New Tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch stopping.
(6 mm)
For further information page 303.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact WARNING!
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). with oil, grease, and gasoline. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the to steering and suspension components. You could
tire should be replaced. Replacement Tires lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
For further information page 354. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Life Of Tire wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capac-
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac- manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires ity, other than what was originally equipped on
tors including, but not limited to: equivalent to the originals in size, quality and perfor- your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
mance when replacement is needed page 353. could result in tire overloading and failure. You
• Driving style Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the could lose control and have a collision.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will adequate speed capability can result in sudden
will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
For more information relating to the Load Index and
replacement
Speed Symbol of a tire page 347.
• Distance driven It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two CAUTION!
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match may result in false speedometer and odometer
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended those of the original wheels. readings.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
WARNING! dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure TIRE TYPES
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. All Season Tires — If Equipped
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
in serious injury or death. WARNING! Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
NOTE: rating other than that specified for your vehicle. on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when Some combinations of unapproved tires and four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing wheels may change suspension dimensions and and handling of your vehicle.
tires. performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
(Continued)
Summer Or Three Season Tires — (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
If Equipped loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con- only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let-
checked before using these tire types. ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example:
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor- T145/80D18 103M.
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation NOTE: Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Of Emergency” for further information. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
WARNING! wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
CAUTION! tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. WARNING!
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
Snow Tires For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
nated for temporary emergency use page 177.
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire 8
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent
in size and type to the original equipment Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; fail- wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ure to do so may adversely affect the safety equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
and handling of your vehicle. axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and mended tire rotation pattern.
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped Full Size Spare — If Equipped WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size same soap solution recommended for the body of the
tire. spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same vehicle and remember to always wash when the sur-
Collapsible spare tire description example: as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the faces are not hot to the touch.
165/80-17 101P. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
the first opportunity.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the from corroding and tarnishing.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con- original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
ventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the CAUTION!
tire. same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
WARNING! at the first opportunity. brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and auto-
matic car washes may damage the wheel's protective
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive WARNING! finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal- Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle recommended.
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driv- prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treat-
er’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
vehicle control.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
CAUTION! Clear Coat Wheels
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may CAUTION! traction devices are recommended. Follow these rec-
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is ommendations to guard against damage:
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or • Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
equivalent is recommended. polishing compounds. They will permanently damage tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
this finish and such damage is not covered by the manufacturer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY • No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
NOTE: USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. the snow traction device.
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel maintain this finish.
• Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Snow Traction Device (maximum pro-
4x2 (2WD)
Axle Tire/Wheel Size jection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
HFE
Tradesman 275/65R18
Rear S Class
Bighorn Lonestar 275/55R20
Laramie
Longhorn
Sport Rear 275/55R20 S Class 8
Limited
REBEL Not Chainable
Snow Traction Device (maximum pro-

4x4 (4WD)
Axle Tire/Wheel Size jection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
Tradesman
275/65R18
Bighorn Lonestar Rear S Class
275/55R20
Laramie
Longhorn
Sport Rear 275/55R20 S Class
Limited
REBEL Not Chainable
WARNING! CAUTION! TIRE ROTATION

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) • Install device as tightly as possible and then RECOMMENDATIONS
between front and rear axles can cause unpredict- retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
able handling. You could lose control and have a Autosock traction devices do not require different loads and perform different steering, driving,
collision. retightening. and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). unequal rates.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
CAUTION! bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
pavement.
following precautions: tain mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute
• Because of restricted traction device clearance • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s to a smooth, quiet ride.
between tires and other suspension components, instructions on the method of installation, operat-
it is important that only traction devices in good ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The
condition are used. Broken devices can cause seri- suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be cor-
ous damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
rected prior to rotation being performed.
occurs that could indicate device breakage. • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
Remove the damaged parts of the device before tire.
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
further use.
does not apply to some directional tires that must not
(Continued) be reversed.
TREADWEAR WARNING!
The Treadwear grade is a comparative The traction grade assigned to this
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
tire when tested under controlled con- ing traction tests, and does not
ditions on a specified government test
include acceleration, cornering,
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half hydroplaning, or peak traction
times as well on the government characteristics.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends TEMPERATURE GRADES
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi- The Temperature grades are A (the
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES cantly from the norm due to variations highest), B, and C, representing the
in driving habits, service practices, and tire's resistance to the generation of
The following tire grading categories
differences in road characteristics and heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
were established by the National High-
climate. when tested under controlled condi-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
specific grade rating assigned by the TRACTION GRADES test wheel.
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on The Traction grades, from highest to Sustained high temperature can cause 8
your vehicle. lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These the material of the tire to degenerate
grades represent the tire's ability to and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
All passenger vehicle tires must con- stop on wet pavement, as measured perature can lead to sudden tire fail-
form to Federal safety requirements in under controlled conditions on speci- ure. The grade C corresponds to a level
addition to these grades. fied government test surfaces of of performance, which all passenger
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
may have poor traction performance. eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher BODYWORK BODY AND UNDERBODY

levels of performance on the labora- MAINTENANCE
tory test wheel, than the minimum PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
required by law. Cleaning Headlights
AGENTS Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
WARNING! graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make breakage than glass headlights.
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
The temperature grade for this tire is Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and there-
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
fore different lens cleaning procedures must be
established for a tire that is properly sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
followed.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
inflated and not overloaded. Exces- contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
sive speed, underinflation, or exces- remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
sive loading, either separately or in metal trim, and underbody protection. lowed by rinsing.
combination, can cause heat buildup The following maintenance recommendations will Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro- steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
and possible tire failure. sion resistance built into your vehicle. lenses.
What Causes Corrosion? Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau
STORING THE VEHICLE paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar® Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three The most common causes are:
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery. • Insects, tree sap and tar. Washing
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser- • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will with water.
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen
is started again.
Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar® CAUTION!

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to pro- mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
tect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch • Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
the paint. • Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These prod-
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing ucts may damage the bumper’s protective finish. paint to match the color of your vehicle.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
finish. Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is recommended. During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
CAUTION! • Avoid products or automatic car washes that use Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives, or harsh hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners and auto- exposure will lead to fading.
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will matic car washes may damage the bumper’s pro- To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bed-
scratch metal and painted surfaces. tective finish. Such damage is not covered by the liner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is truck at least twice per year using the Mopar®
paint and decals. recommended. Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner available at a local
authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Fascia/Bumper Care Special Care Bedliner
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain the • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive 1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
chrome components of the vehicle. Wash away road near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
debris and salt using an automotive soap. Fascia/ once a month. loose dirt and debris.
bumpers should be cleaned regularly using mild (neu- • It is important that the drain holes in the lower 2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water. Then apply
tral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept solution with a soft cloth or brush.
prevent corrosion. clear and open. 3. Rinse bedliner with water.
Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to deterioration • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the 8
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, paint, touch them up immediately. 4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar® Spray-On
calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and
to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Do not use • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi- wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.
lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can stain or dam-
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
age the protective coating that helps keep them from WARNING!
possible.
corroding and tarnishing.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz- Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become
are well packaged and sealed. slippery and may result in personal injury.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — WARNING!
different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil,
hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill
If Equipped
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
soon as possible to avoid permanent damage. manner:
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a with a clean, dry towel. diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across • For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or a you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point is exposed mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
under the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is pos- remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Pro-
sible. While not covered by your new vehicle warranty, a soap residue. gram facility for inspection.
cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the scratch
is required. To repair a tear or gouge, follow the direc-
• For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
tions provided in the Mopar® Quick Repair Kit. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
INTERIORS protectants on Stain Repel products.
CAUTION!
Seat Belt Maintenance
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical sol- • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and vents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
carpeting. painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or cause permanent damage. Wipe away
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the immediately.
WARNING! vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
• Damage caused by these type of products may not
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
areas they may cause respiratory harm. not work properly.
NOTE:
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning loop Lenses
for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
cloth until all residue is removed. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be GLASS SURFACES
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
LEATHER SURFACES type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
leather upholstery. other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu- When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather directly on the mirror.
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
Total Clean leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
8
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
364
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
and the Brake Warning Light and the Anti-Lock Brake Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not sub-
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the instru- System (ABS) Warning Light will activate during brake stitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
ment panel, visible through the windshield. use. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
Vehicle Identification Number TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Wheel Mounting Surface
NOTE: Lug Nut/
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ **Lug Nut/ Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
Bolt Socket
Bolt Torque Bolt Type Bolt Size nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
Size
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
BRAKE SYSTEM 130 Ft-Lb
Cone M14 x 1.50 22 mm insert it halfway).
(176 N·m)
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/ be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before against the wheel.
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the tightening.
vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness.
This will be evident by increased pedal travel during
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 365
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
considering service for the vehicle. system components.
3.6L ENGINE MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL

Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
15% in this engine. octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
This engine is designed to meet all emission and stability additives are recommended. Using
sions regulations and provide optimum fuel gasolines that have these additives will help improve
economy and performance when using high fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
quality unleaded regular gasoline having a performance.
Four, Five, And Six Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
2 method. The use of higher octane premium gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
WARNING! is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
regular gasoline in these engines. tem deposits. When available, the usage of
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle 5.7L ENGINE www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may Gasoline retailers.
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
result in personal injury. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
15% in this engine.
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE fuel economy and performance when using
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
high-quality unleaded gasoline having an
ENGINE octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
2 method. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is recom-
While operating on gasoline with the required octane mended for optimum performance and fuel economy. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the genates such as ethanol.
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the REFORMULATED GASOLINE 9
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner-
recommended octane number can cause engine failure burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Lim- Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
ited Warranty. specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
366 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
MODIFICATIONS
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Modifications that allow the engine to run on Com- CAUTION!
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv- pressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo- result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel performance:
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable system components. Problems that result from running
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac- • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as turer and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. formance and damage the emissions control
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains system.
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Problems that result from using gasoline containing overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing IN GASOLINE some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gaso- vice. Contact an authorized dealer for service
line blended with MMT provides no performance advan- assistance.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX tage beyond gasoline of the same octane number with-
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
out MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark
FUEL VEHICLES plug life and reduces emissions system performance in
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most
of these products contain high concentrations of
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gaso- gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The mance problems resulting from the use of such
line with higher ethanol content may void the New MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
Vehicle Limited Warranty. gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask the gasoline manufacturer and may void or not be covered
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these prohibited in Federal and California reformulated
symptoms: gasoline.
• Operate in a lean mode. NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on. can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE WARNING!

• Commercially available fuel additives are not neces-
sary for the proper operation of your diesel engine
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending when using good quality diesel fuel with a maximum
blend of 5% biodiesel.
CAUTION! agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel • Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only
• Use of Biodiesel Blends greater than 5% is not fuel. be used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F or
approved. Use of blends greater than 20% can -23°C) exist.
result in engine damage. Such damage is not cov- Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To pre-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. vent fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water CAUTION!
• If biodiesel greater than 5% (B6-B20) is used per from the fuel/water separator filter using the fuel/water
state mandate (example Minnesota in Summer separator drain provided on the fuel filter housing. If If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline on
months) the fuel must be used within 30 days by you buy good quality fuel and follow the cold weather your diesel vehicle, do not start the engine. Damage
driving (to less than a quarter tank) and filled with advice above, fuel conditioners should not be required to the engine and fuel system could occur. Please call
fresh diesel fuel. Failure to do so can result in in your vehicle. If available in your area, a high cetane an authorized dealer for service.
engine damage that is not covered by the New “premium” diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting
Vehicle Limited Warranty. and warm-up performance.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with CAUTION! A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM speci-
Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur fication D975 is approved for use with your diesel
maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO engine.
Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid dam- NOT START engine before you drain the water from
age to the emissions control system. the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable resources
page 320. typically derived from animal fat, rapeseed oil (Rape-
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in seed Methyl Ester (RME) base), or soybean oil (Soy
your vehicle. For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel Methyl Ester (SME or SOME) base).
fuel meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American
Society for Testing and Materials) specification DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. If the This diesel engine has been developed to take advan- CAUTION!
vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or tage of the high energy content and generally lower cost In the event that the vehicle is filled with fuel contain-
-7°C), or is required to operate at colder-than-normal Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel or Number ing greater than 5% biodiesel (B6-B20), the fuel must 9
conditions for prolonged periods, use Climatized Num- 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Climatized diesel fuels. be used within 30 days by driving (to less than a quar-
ber 2 diesel fuel or dilute the Number 2 diesel fuel with
ter tank) and filled with fresh diesel fuel. Failure to do
50% Number 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better pro- NOTE:
so can result in engine damage that is not covered by
tection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel
• A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
filters.
specification D-975 may be used with your diesel
engine without any adjustments to regular service
schedules.
% Biodiesel Customer View Pump Required Label
0–5% (B5)
No Label Required
Acceptable For Use
6–20% (B6–B20)
DO NOT USE except in states
requiring B20 sale (e.g.
Minnesota in Summer months)
NOTE:
Refer to Fuel Requirements - Die-
sel Engine for further informa-
tion.
% Biodiesel Customer View Pump Required Label
>21% (B21)
DO NOT USE
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 and Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM specification
Ambient Temperatures D-6751
Mopar® Approved Fuel Filter Elements
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient tem- Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and water
peratures, which may pose problems for both storage Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar® filtration
and operation. Precautions can be necessary at low Within Six Months Of Manufacture system is designed to provide adequate fuel water
ambient temperatures, such as storing the fuel in a separation capabilities.
heated building or a heated storage tank, or using cold Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which can
temperature additives. result in long term storage problems. Fuel produced to Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
approved ASTM standards, if stored properly, provides
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM for protection against fuel oxidation for up to six
months. Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed with 9
Standards the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not exceed
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only fuel 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil change interval
produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the following specifi- must be maintained with in the suggested schedule.
cations may be blended to meet Biodiesel blend B6 –
B20 fuel meeting ASTM specification D-7467:
Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals

NOTE:
Use only maximum blends of Biodiesel 5%.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 23 Gallons 87 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 33 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit 1.8 Quarts 1.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 26 Gallons 98.5 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Tradesman/Rebel Models 5.14 Gallons 19.5 Liters
All Other Models 5.74 Gallons 21.7 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 8.5 Quarts 8.0 Liters
US Metric
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

GASOLINE ENGINES
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Gasoline Engine Coolant
Technology).
Motor Generator Unit — 3.6L Engine We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
(If Equipped) Technology).
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Engine Oil — 3.6L & 5.7L Engine Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
page 317.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed
Gasoline Engine Oil Filter
SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection — 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
DIESEL ENGINE
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive 9
Diesel Engine Coolant
Technology).
We recommend using 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar® that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-12991 and
Engine Oil — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
the API SP engine oil category is required.
We recommend using Mopar® engine oil filters. Using an oil filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration requirements
Diesel Engine Oil Filter
can severely impact engine life and reliability.

We recommend using Mopar® fuel filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s fil-
tration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability. Under normal conditions the diesel
fuel filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in severe operat-
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
ing conditions, or in certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas,
Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every
10,000 miles (16,000 km).
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra
Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur
maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
We require you to use diesel with up to a maximum blend of 5% biodiesel (B5), meeting ASTM spec D-975 with your diesel engine.
If biodiesel greater than 5% (B6-B20) is used per state mandate (example Minnesota in Summer months) the fuel must be used
within 30 days by driving (to less than a quarter tank) and filled with fresh diesel fuel.
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of flu-
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
ids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
If Climatized or Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available,
and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), in sustained gency, the cooling system will need to be drained,
arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treat- flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (con-
ment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling. forming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION! • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage coolant and may plug the radiator.
and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
(Continued)
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Automatic Transmission Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Transfer Case – 48-11 Active On-Demand 2–speed Transfer Case (With 4WD AUTO) We recommend using Mobil Fluid LT.
Transfer Case – 48-12 Part Time 2–Speed Transfer Case (Without 4WD AUTO) We recommend using Shell Spirax S2 ATF A389.
Front Axle We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (MS-A0160).
Rear Axle (3.21/3.55) Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar® Limited Slip
Additive (MS-10111).
We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985).
Rear Axle (3.92) Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar® Limited Slip
Additive (MS-10111).
Max Tow Rear Axle (3.92) We recommend using Dana SAE 80W90 Axle Lubricant.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
9
374
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
our products and services. Phone: (866) 726-4636
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
All work to be performed may not be covered by the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and CENTER
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's ser- are most concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the P.O. Box 1621
vice history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor- Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
PREPARE A LIST rectly and in a timely manner. (800) 387-9983 French
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the This is why you should always talk to an authorized
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you MEXICO
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
the service advisor know. owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable Sante Fe C.P. 05109
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Mexico, CDMX
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS Customer Assistance center. In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
If you list a number of items and you must have your Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with should include the following information:
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental • Owner's name and address PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a • Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and ISLANDS
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements office)
FCA Caribbean LLC
when you call for an appointment. • Authorized dealer name P.O. Box 191857
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) San Juan 00919-1857
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage Phone: (866) 726-4636
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 375
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE panies’ contracts. If you purchased a contract other For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for further
than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service contract and information.
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED you have a problem, you will have to contact the admin- Use this QR code to access your digital
(TDD/TTY) istrator of that contract for resolution. If you have any experience.
questions about the service contract, call the FCA's Ser-
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA vice Contract National Customer Hotline at (800) 465-
US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication 2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable protec- Scan me
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
tion against repair costs after your vehicle warranties
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the
in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide addi-
MOPAR® PARTS
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require tional protection beyond your vehicle's warranty. Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
assistance can use the special needs relay service factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to it operating at its best and maintain its original
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. condition.
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex- when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
pected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans autho-
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted WASHINGTON, D.C.
with the ownership experience.
rized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If If you believe that your vehicle has a
you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you WARRANTY INFORMATION defect that could cause a crash or
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification cause injury or death, you should
Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliv- See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
ery date. If you have any questions about the service sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this immediately inform the National High-
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for way Traffic Safety Administration
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922. further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased addi-
tional coverage with an extended service contract. FCA sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this LLC. 10
Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts. vehicle and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada Inc. for further information.
service contract. We are not responsible for other com-
376 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi- To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
may open an investigation, and if it gations and Recalls at (Canada).
finds that a safety defect exists in a 1-800-333-0510 or go to Or visit:
group of vehicles, it may order a recall wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
and remedy campaign. However, PCDB-BDPP. Owner’s Manuals (US).
NHTSA cannot become involved in indi- Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
vidual problems between you, an Ordering and Accessing Owner’s • 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
Information
To contact NHTSA, you may call the To order the following manuals, you may use either the
General Information
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at website or the phone numbers listed below. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: Service Manuals Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
1-800-424-9153); or go to These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: components and is written in straightforward language Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. subject to the following two conditions:
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Diagnostic Procedure Manuals 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, 2. This device must accept any interference received,
obtain other information about motor charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make including interference that may cause undesired
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled operation.
vehicle safety from vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
http://www.safercar.gov. find and correct problems, using step-by-step trouble-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
IN CANADA tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic Pro-
If you believe that your vehicle has a cedure manuals, visit: 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
safety defect, you should contact the www.techauthority.com (US and Canada). 2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouil-
Owner's Manuals lage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
Customer Service Department immedi- susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
ately. Canadian customers who wish to assistance of service and engineering specialists to
report a safety defect to the Canadian acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
government should contact Transport
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 377
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
10
378
INDEX
A Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 319 Axle Locker System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . .324 Air Pressure Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .142, 144 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . .328 Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 136
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168 Alarm B
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 108 Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Adjust Alterations/Modifications Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106, 316
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .327, 370 Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . .18
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Battery Saver Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . .245 Bed Divider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Adjustable Pedals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Bedliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Advance Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Bed Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Air Bag Audio Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .268, 269 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Bluetooth
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . .275, 305 Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . .305 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Or Audio Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . .218
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
If Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Automatic Tailgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . .325
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . .57 Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . .276 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .125, 330 B-Pillar Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . .268 Fluid And Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329, 373
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 268, 287 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329, 364
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .318 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330, 373 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Air Conditioner Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .322 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Air Conditioner Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . .128 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Air Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 AutoPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 55 AUX Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . .125
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 322 Auxiliary Driving Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . .57 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331, 373 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 341
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
INDEX 379
C Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 D

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Camera, AUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . .53, 55, 287
Camera, Surround View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Deleting A Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Camera, Trailer 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Capacities, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Connected Services FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Caps, Filler Connected Services Features . . . . . . . . . . .226 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Connected Services, Getting Started . . . . . . . .225 Fill Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . .328 Connected Services, Introduction . . . . . . . . .223 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Care And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . .328 Bulk Storage Of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming . . . . . . . . . .321
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .328 Differential, Limited Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327, 328 Dimmer Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . .345 Cooling Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Disable Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . .58 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . .328 Disc Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Charge Air Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Disposal
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .114 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .328
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety. . . . . . . . . .286 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106, 107
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .327, 370, 371 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106, 107
Child Restraints Corrosion Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Door Locks
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Cruise Control Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . .283, 284 Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . .283 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter . . . . . . . .320
Infant And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .278 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Driver Memory Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . .281 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . .142, 144 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . .280 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Driving
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . .278 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Clean Air Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Cleaning Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
11
380 INDEX
E Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 118 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . .275, 305 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Electric Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . .245 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . .246, 250 Exhaust Gas Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 326 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Electric Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 288 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 371
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . .130, 131 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .365, 367, 370
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . .128 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .246 F Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . .106 Family Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Fuel Saver Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Emergency Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Filters Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Emergency Gas Can Refueling . . . . . . . . . . .301 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Emergency, In Case Of Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 322
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . .303 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 G
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 371 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .42
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . .114 Flashers Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 288 Gauges
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .122 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Compartment . . . . . . . . .312, 313, 314, 315 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Compartment Identification . .312, 313, 314, 315 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Gross Combination Weight Rating . . . . . . . . .172
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Fluid Level Checks Gross Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 344 Guide
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Fold-Flat Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 370 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317, 370, 371 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 H
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Hazard
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 365, 367 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317, 370 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
INDEX 381
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Location And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 L

Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Instrument Cluster Display LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .46 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Driver Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 StopStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Head Rests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Stored Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 341
Heads Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . . .100, 101 Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Vehicle Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 268, 287
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .362 Air Suspension Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Integrated Trailer Brake Control . . . . . . . . . .178 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . .46 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .248 Intervention Regeneration Strategy . . . . . .102, 322 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 111
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Inverter Outlet (115V). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Hitches Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . .42 J Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Hood Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 ECO Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
HUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 101 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Electric Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator . . .107
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 288
I K Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 344
Ignition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . .19 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 47
Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .18 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 113
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . .19 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . .46
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 289 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 116 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . .113, 248
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . .88, 90, 92, 93, 94, 95 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Hood Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 91, 93, 95 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Engine Oil Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
11
382 INDEX
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .111 M O

NEUTRAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 71 Occupant Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . .365
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . .306, 308, 309 Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . .186
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . . .109 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . .186
Rear Axle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 111 Manual Off Road Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Accessory Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Pitch And Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Vehicle Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Service Forward Collision . . . . . . . . . . .109 Memory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317, 371
Service LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Service Stop Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Stop Start Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 371
Trailer Brake Disconnected . . . . . . . . . . .107 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Transmission Temperature . . . . . . . . . . .107 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Manual Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions .105, 107 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Water In Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .317, 370
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . .139, 331 Power Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 289 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Tilt Side In Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . .104 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Load Shed Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction. . . . . . . .104 Mobile App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . .113, 114
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . .104 Modifications/Alterations Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Locks Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Operator Manual
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . .257 Owner's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Multi-Function Control Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Multifunction Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 P
Lug Nuts/Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
N Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone .217
INDEX 383
Parallel Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Pretensioners Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock . . . . .229, 234
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Remote Features, Horn And Lights . . . . . . . . .229
Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Profile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Remote Features, Starting . . . . . . . . . .229, 236
ParkSense Active Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . .155 Remote Keyless Entry
ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . .19
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 R Remote Sound System (Radio) Control . . . . . . .208
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Remote Start (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Pedestrian Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . .327, 328 Remote Start (Gasoline). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Radio Remote Starting
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Off Road Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Comfort Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 78 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 23
Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 71 Sound Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Remove, Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . .349 Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Power Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . .332, 337 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208, 238 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Restraints, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . .63, 65 RamBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .230, 235
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 RamBox Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Side Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Rear Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails. . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 S
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 69 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Power Seats Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .288
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . .184 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . .184 Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . .185 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Saved Radio Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . .266 Registering SiriusXM Guardian . . . . . . . . . . .224 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . .306, 308, 309
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Pressure Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Release, Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262, 287
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .265
11
384 INDEX
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . .265 Settings, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . .208
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .265 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System . . . . . .208
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . .266 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Steps, Power Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case Stolen Vehicle Assistance . . . . . . . . . .232, 235
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . .266 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Stop/Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .262, 263, 264 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Below Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . .264 Side Steps, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Front Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 112, 288 Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . .265 Sirius Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 In Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Rear Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . .58
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 360
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Browse in SXM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Store Radio Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Sunglasses Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Sliding Rear Window, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 69, 71
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Smart Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Surround View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Seat Belts Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Suspension
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 31, 32 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 136
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 32 SOS Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 234 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 356 Symbol Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . .144 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116, 118
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 T
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Tailgate, Electronic Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Second Row USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 118 Tailgate, Multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 108 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 118 Tailgate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .371 Steering Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Send & Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230, 235 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . .57
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Tilt
Service Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29 Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Service Contract. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Service Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Wheel, Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . .36
INDEX 385
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 303 U

Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Uconnect
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .349 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . .348 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 352, 355, 359 Towing Behind A Motorhome. . . . . . . . . . . .183 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display. . . . .188
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Uconnect 4C Nav With 12-Inch Display . . . . . . .188
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Trailer Reverse Steering Control . . . . . . . . . .175 Uconnect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Trailer Sway Control (TSC). . . . . . . . . . .172, 250 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Trailer Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Call Currently In Progress . . . . . . . . . . .221
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .352, 355 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Frontal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 No Call Currently In Progress . . . . . . . . . .220
Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Bluetooth Communication Link . . . . . . . .223
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Call Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Call Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .110, 257 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Call Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . .175 Cancel Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Weight Carrying Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Weight Distributing Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Or Audio Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . .218
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Run Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Join Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 352 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite . . .219
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . .130, 131 Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 356 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Managing Your Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Natural Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 330 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone .217
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Phonebook Download . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold . . . . . . . .221
Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .348 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . .172, 175 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 360 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Toggling Between Calls . . . . . . . . . . . .221
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 To Remove A Favorite . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 112, 342, 344 11
386 INDEX
Touch-Tone Number Entry . . . . . . . . . . .220 Water

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone . . . .222 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Water Separator
Uconnect (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Uconnect Settings Wheel And Wheel Tire Care . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Customer Programmable Features . . . . .26, 189 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . .26 Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Uconnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . .265 Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 316
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
V Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Vehicle Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 235 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Wipers Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Vehicle Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . .364 Wireless Charging Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 349
Vehicle Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . .11
Vehicle Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Vehicle Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 360
Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . .36
W
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Washing Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
to install them on products previously manufactured. dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
substitution therefore. is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and transportation.
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2022 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM 1500

OWNER’S MANUAL
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. FIFTH EDITION
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_DT_OM_EN_USC

2022 RAM 1500 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 RAM 1500 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 RAM 1500 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 RAM 1500

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM 1500

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 7

8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 8

9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 9

10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 10

INTRODUCTION DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . 37

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 MULTIMEDIA

Intervention Regeneration Strategy — BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

NOTE: Red Warning Lights

Air Bag Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning Lights Red Warning Lights

Hood Open Warning Light Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Oil Pressure Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light

Oil Temperature Warning Light Yellow Warning Lights

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light Service LaneSense Warning Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light Entry/Exit Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

TOW/HAUL Indicator Light Water In Fuel Indicator Light

Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light Green Indicator Lights

Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

LaneSense Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready Indicator

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Cruise Control SET Indicator Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights LaneSense Indicator Light

4WD AUTO Indicator Light Blue Indicator Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Key Fob Battery Replacement

Backup Starting Method

DOORS POWER DOOR LOCKS —

NOTE: AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — WARNING!

Manual Seat Adjustment Bar

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT WARNING!

Reclining The Seatback

WARNING! • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when

INTRODUCING VOICE • “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session.

The center head restraint is not adjustable or

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display

GET STARTED • Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or

Adjustable Pedals Switch

The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in NOTE:

Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.

ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR

Digital Rearview Mirror

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —

Power Folding Mirror Switch Blindspot Mirror

NOTE: MULTIFUNCTION LEVER HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH

when the headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) posi-

LANE CHANGE ASSIST —